Panasonic AV-UHS500P/ AV-UHS500E Live Switcher Instruction Manual

Instruction Manual for Panasonic models including: AV-UHS500P, AV-UHS500E, Live Switcher, AV-UHS500P, AV-UHS500E Live Switcher, Q0220GU3031

Operating Instructions

AV-UHS500 User Guide

Panasonic AV-UHS500 4K Live Production Video Switcher | Full Compass Systems

Not Your Device? Search For Manuals / Datasheets:

File Info : application/pdf, 220 Pages, 14.95MB

Document

60875-AVUHS500UserGuide

Operating Instructions
Live Switcher
Model No. AV-UHS500P Model No. AV-UHS500E

Before operating this product, please read the instructions carefully and save this manual for future use. Please carefully read the "Read this first!" (pages 3 to 7) of this Manual before use.

W0220GU3031 -FJ

ENGLISH DVQP2118WA

pp Information on software for this product 1. Included with this product is software licensed under the GNU General Public License (GPL) and GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), and users are hereby informed that they have the right to obtain, change and redistribute the source codes of this software. To obtain the source codes, go to the following website:
https://pro-av.panasonic.net/
The manufacturer asks users to refrain from directing inquiries concerning the source codes they have obtained and other details to its representatives. 2. Included with this product is software which is licensed under MIT-License. 3. This product includes software which is licensed under FreeType Project (www.freetype.org).
For more information about these, refer to the website below. https://pro-av.panasonic.net/manual/en/index.html Details are given in the original (English language) text.

Trademarks and registered trademarks
pp The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the United States and other countries.
pp SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC. pp Primatte® is the registered trademark of Photron Limited. pp Photron Limited is the holder of the intellectual rights to
Primatte®. pp Photron Limited is the holder of the patent for Primatte®. pp Other names of companies and products contained
in these Operating Instructions may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
About copyright and licence
Distributing, copying, disassembling, reverse compiling, reverse engineering, and also exporting in violation of export laws of the software provided with this unit are expressly prohibited.

Abbreviations

The following abbreviations are used in this manual.
pp Both SDHC memory cards and SDXC memory cards are described as "memory cards" in this manual. When individual descriptions are provided, they are featured individually.
pp Personal computers are referred to as "computers".

Furthermore, the product numbers of equipment are referred to as follows.

Model number of unit
AV-UHS500P AV-UHS500E AV-UHS5M1G AV-UHS5M2G AV-UHS5M3G AV-UHS5M4G AV-UHS5M5G

Model number given in manual
AV-UHS500 AV-UHS500 AV-UHS5M1 AV-UHS5M2 AV-UHS5M3 AV-UHS5M4 AV-UHS5M5

Illustrations and screen displays featured in the manual
pp What is shown in the manual's illustrations and screen displays may differ from how it is actually appears.
2

Read this first!

WARNING:
This equipment must be grounded. To ensure safe operation, the three-pin plug must be inserted only into a standard three-pin power outlet which is effectively grounded through normal household wiring. Extension cords used with the equipment must have three cores and be correctly wired to provide connection to the ground. Wrongly wired extension cords are a major cause of fatalities. The fact that the equipment operates satisfactorily does not imply that the power outlet is grounded or that the installation is completely safe. For your safety, if you are in any doubt about the effective grounding of the power outlet, please consult a qualified electrician.
WARNING:
· To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this equipment to rain or moisture.
· To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, keep this equipment away from all liquids. Use and store only in locations which are not exposed to the risk of dripping or splashing liquids, and do not place any liquid containers on top of the equipment.
WARNING:
Always keep memory cards (optional accessory) or accessory (mounting screws) out of the reach of babies and small children.
WARNING:
This equipment is compliant with Class A of CISPR 32. In a residential environment this equipment may cause radio interference.
CAUTION:
Do not remove panel covers by unscrewing. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not remove the covers. No user serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.
CAUTION:
To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, refer mounting of the optional interface boards to qualified service personnel.

CAUTION:
To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock and annoying interference, use the recommended accessories only.
CAUTION:
In order to maintain adequate ventilation, do not install or place this unit in a bookcase, built-in cabinet or any other confined space. To prevent risk of electric shock or fire hazard due to overheating, ensure that curtains and any other materials do not obstruct the ventilation.
CAUTION:
The mains plug of the power supply cord shall remain readily operable. The AC receptacle (mains socket outlet) shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible. To completely disconnect this equipment from the AC mains, disconnect the power cord plug from the AC receptacle.
CAUTION:
A coin type battery is installed inside of the unit. Do not expose the unit to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.
CAUTION:
Naked flame sources, such as lighted candles, should not be placed on the apparatus.
For U.S.A. and Canada
CAUTION:
This apparatus can be operated at a voltage in the range of 100 240 V AC. Voltages other than 120 V are not intended for U.S.A. and Canada. Operation at a voltage other than 120 V AC may require the use of a different AC plug. Please contact either a local or foreign Panasonic authorized service center for assistance in selecting an alternate AC plug.

indicates safety information.

Read this first!
The symbols on this product (including the accessories) represent the following: AC
For AV-UHS500P FCC NOTICE (USA)
Supplier's Declaration of Conformity Model Number: AV-UHS500P Trade Name: Panasonic Responsible Party: Panasonic Corporation of North America Two Riverfront Plaza, Newark, NJ 07102 Support contact: 1-800-524-1448 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Warning: To assure continued FCC emission limit compliance, the user must use only shielded interface cables when connecting to external units. Also, any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment could void the user's authority to operate it.
NOTIFICATION (Canada)
CAN ICES-3 (A)/NMB-3(A)
indicates safety information.
4

Read this first!

For AV-UHS500E

Caution for AC Mains Lead

FOR YOUR SAFETY PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY. This product is equipped with 3 types of AC mains cable.

Appropriate mains cable must be used in each local area, since the other type of mains cable is not suitable.

FOR CONTINENTAL EUROPE, ETC. FOR U.K. ONLY

FOR INDIA ONLY

Not to be used in the U.K.

If the plug supplied is not suitable for

your socket outlet, it should be cut

off and appropriate one fitted.

FOR U.K. ONLY
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 13 amp fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 13 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362. Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your local Panasonic Dealer.

How to replace the fuse 1. Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver.

2. Replace the fuse.

Fuse

indicates safety information.

Manufactured by: Panasonic Corporation, Osaka, Japan Importer's name and address of pursuant to EU rules:
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH Panasonic Testing Centre Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
5

Read this first!
EMC NOTICE FOR THE PURCHASER/USER OF THE APPARATUS
1. Pre-requisite conditions to achieving compliance with the above standards
<1> Peripheral equipment to be connected to the apparatus and special connecting cables · The purchaser/user is urged to use only equipment which has been recommended by us as peripheral equipment to be connected to the apparatus. · The purchaser/user is urged to use only the connecting cables described below.
<2> For the connecting cables, use shielded cables which suit the intended purpose of the apparatus. · Video signal connecting cables Use double shielded coaxial cables, which are designed for 75-ohm type high-frequency applications, for SDI (Serial Digital Interface). Coaxial cables, which are designed for 75-ohm type high-frequency applications, are recommended for analog video signals. · Audio signal connecting cables If your apparatus supports AES/EBU serial digital audio signals, use cables designed for AES/EBU. Use shielded cables, which provide quality performance for high-frequency transmission applications, for analog audio signals. · Other connecting cables (LAN, RS-422) Use shielded cables, which provide quality performance for high-frequency applications, as connecting cables. · When connecting to the DVI signal terminal, use a cable with a ferrite core. · If your apparatus is supplied with ferrite core(s), they must be attached on cable(s) following instructions in this manual.
2. Performance level The performance level of the apparatus is equivalent to or better than the performance level required by these standards. However, the apparatus may be adversely affected by interference if it is being used in an EMC environment, such as an area where strong electromagnetic fields are generated (by the presence of signal transmission towers, cellular phones, etc.). In order to minimize the adverse effects of the interference on the apparatus in cases like this, it is recommended that the following steps be taken with the apparatus being affected and with its operating environment: 1. Place the apparatus at a distance from the source of the interference. 2. Change the direction of the apparatus. 3. Change the connection method used for the apparatus. 4. Connect the apparatus to another power outlet where the power is not shared by any other appliances.

Turkey Only
AEEE Yönetmeliine Uygundur. AEEE Complies with Directive of Turkey.

Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries

Only for European Union and countries with recycling systems

These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and

batteries must not be mixed with general household waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points in

accordance with your national legislation.

By disposing of them correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health

and the environment.

For more information about collection and recycling, please contact your local authority, dealer or supplier.

Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation

Note for the battery symbol (bottom symbol): This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.

TO REMOVE BATTERY
Back-up Battery (Lithium Battery) · For the removal of the battery for disposal at the end of its service life, please consult your dealer.

Read this first!

: : :

Panasonic Corporation Kadoma, Osaka, Japan
Japan

, ,

: :

" " , 7, , 03066,

, .

X X XXXXXXX

: (6 2016, 7 2017,...0 2020) : , ... L

Contents

Read this first! ............................................. 3
Before use .................................................. 11
Overview ......................................................................... 11 Concerning the ratings display .................................... 11 Disclaimer of warranty .................................................. 11 Network security ............................................................ 11
Precautions for use ................................... 12
Installation precautions ............................ 13
Features...................................................... 14
Accessories ............................................... 15
Installation and connections .................... 15
How to install the optional units................................... 15
Parts and their functions .......................... 17
Control panel ................................................................... 17 Crosspoint area .............................................................. 18 Memory/wipe pattern/number key area.......................... 19 User button area............................................................. 20 Transition area................................................................ 20 Display area ................................................................... 22 Positioner area ............................................................... 24 Memory card area .......................................................... 25
Rear panel area ............................................................... 26
Preparations............................................... 27
Turning the unit's power on and off .............................. 27
Basic menu operations................................................... 28 Menu configuration and operations ................................ 28 Keyboard screen operations........................................... 30 Menu delegation function ............................................... 30 Setting the system format............................................... 31 Setting the date and time ............................................... 31
Basic operations........................................ 32
Background transition .................................................... 32 Selecting the bus............................................................ 32 Selecting the bus using the SHIFT function ................... 32 Selecting the bus mode.................................................. 33 Selecting the transition mode ......................................... 33 Manual transition ............................................................ 34 Auto transition ................................................................ 34 Cut transition .................................................................. 34
Wipe.................................................................................. 35 Selecting the wipe pattern.............................................. 35 Selecting the wipe direction............................................ 36 Wipe decorations (border, soft effect) ............................ 36
8

Setting the wipe start position ........................................ 37 Modifying wipe................................................................ 37 Setting the latency.......................................................... 38 Creating an animated wipe............................................. 39
Key.................................................................................... 39 Selecting the key type .................................................... 40 Selecting the key material .............................................. 41 Key transitions ................................................................ 42 Key preview .................................................................... 44 Adjusting the luminance key and linear key ................... 45 Adjusting the chroma key ............................................... 45 Key decorations.............................................................. 51 Masking the key signals ................................................. 52 Flying key ....................................................................... 52 Setting the priority .......................................................... 53
PinP (picture in picture).................................................. 54 Selecting the PinP channel and material ....................... 54 Selecting Shape ............................................................. 54 PinP adjustments ........................................................... 55 Linking Key PinP and DSK PinP .................................... 55 PinP decorations ............................................................ 56 Trimming settings ........................................................... 57
DSK (downstream key) ................................................... 58 Selecting the DSK type .................................................. 58 Selecting the DSK material ............................................ 59 DSK transitions............................................................... 60 DSK preview................................................................... 61 DSK adjustments............................................................ 61 Masking the DSK signals ............................................... 62
Key Link ........................................................................... 63
FTB (Fade to Black)......................................................... 63
Internal color signals ...................................................... 64 Setting the color background.......................................... 64 Setting the Wash effect................................................... 65
Internal color bar signal ................................................. 65 Test tone settings ........................................................... 65
Switching the AUX output .............................................. 66 Selecting the AUX output materials................................ 66 AUX1/2 transitions.......................................................... 66 Setting enable/disable for the AUX1/2 transition ............ 67
Memory ............................................................................ 68 Memory registration ....................................................... 69 Memory recall items ....................................................... 69 Storing the settings in the memory (Store)..................... 70 Recalling the operations stored in the memory (Recall) ...................................................................... 71 Deleting the operations stored in the memory (Delete) ...................................................................... 72 Selecting the buses whose settings are to be registered and or played back..................................................... 73

Contents

Setting effect dissolve (shot memory) ............................ 74 Editing event memory timelines ..................................... 75 Macro memory settings.................................................. 80 Registering memories (Register) ................................... 83
Video memories .............................................................. 84 Recording still images (Still) ........................................... 85 Recording moving images (Clip) .................................... 86 Saving to the internal storage......................................... 87 Playing back moving images (Clip) ................................ 88 Internal storage management ........................................ 91 Still playlists.................................................................... 93
Memory card.................................................................... 96 Formatting memory cards .............................................. 98 Saving data on memory cards ....................................... 98 Loading data from memory cards .................................. 99 Deleting files on memory cards.................................... 100 Displaying the memory card information ...................... 101
Internal storage ............................................................. 102 Project file management screen................................... 102 Saving project files to the internal storage ................... 102 Loading project files from the internal storage ............. 103 Deleting project files from the internal storage............. 103 Changing the filenames of project files saved in the internal storage ........................................................ 104
Waveform monitor settings.......................................... 105
Input/output signal settings ................... 106
Input signal settings ..................................................... 106 Settings for the exclusionary input connectors............. 108 Settings for the color range for input signals ................ 108 Checking the input signal status................................... 109 Setting the frame synchronizer..................................... 109 Setting the delay amount.............................................. 110 Freezing the input signals ............................................ 110 Setting the material names .......................................... 111 Setting the up-converter ............................................... 111 Color Corrector............................................................. 112 Setting the HDMI input signals ..................................... 115 Displaying the HDMI input signal information............... 116
Output signal settings .................................................. 117 Assigning the output signals......................................... 118 Setting the SDI output color range ............................... 118 Setting the HDMI output signals................................... 119 Setting the down-converter (optional) .......................... 120
Setting the sync signals ............................................... 121
Adjusting the output signal phase .............................. 121
Setting the multi view display ...................................... 125 Setting the screen layout .............................................. 125 Setting the split frame and characters.......................... 126

Setting the tally displays............................................... 126 Changing the material names ...................................... 127 Setting the level meters ................................................ 127 Setting the input signal marks ...................................... 128 Setting the markers ...................................................... 128
Ancillary settings for the AUX bus, PGM, and PVW... 129
Audio settings for the AUX bus, PGM, and PVW ........ 130
System settings ....................................... 131
Setting the system format ............................................ 131 Switcher mode settings ................................................ 131 Dynamic range and color range settings...................... 131
Setting the crosspoints ................................................ 132 Assigning signals to the crosspoints ............................ 132 Setting the crosspoint switching ................................... 133
Button assignments...................................................... 134 Setting the user buttons ............................................... 134
Setting the date and time ............................................. 135
Network settings ........................................................... 135
Setting the built-in display backlight and button illumination ............................................................... 136
Status displays.............................................................. 137 Alarm status displays ................................................... 137 Alarm message ............................................................ 137 Displaying information about the version and optional units ......................................................................... 138
Initialization ................................................................... 139 Initializing setting data .................................................. 139 Initializing fader ............................................................ 139
Remote camera link functions ............... 140
Settings for connections to remote cameras ............. 141 Selecting the terminals for remote camera connection ............................................................... 141 IP address settings....................................................... 141 Remote camera port settings ....................................... 142 Remote camera authentication settings ....................... 142 Checking the remote camera connection status .......... 142 Remote camera operation direction settings................ 143 Remote camera tally control settings ........................... 143 Selecting the cameras to be operated.......................... 144 Controlling in the camera control screen...................... 145 Remote camera settings .............................................. 146 Selecting the remote camera, checking information, and controlling power...................................................... 146 Remote camera control speed settings........................ 147 Remote camera on-screen menu and color bar settings .................................................................... 147 Remote camera lens control settings ........................... 148 Remote camera image adjustment settings ................. 148

Contents
Remote camera preset memory playback settings ...... 149 Disabling remote camera control.................................. 149 Controlling in the camera preset memory screen ........ 150 Storing preset memories .............................................. 152 Recalling preset memories........................................... 152 Deleting preset memories ............................................ 152 Selecting a page of preset memories........................... 153
ROI function ............................................. 154
ROI mode settings........................................................ 156 Adjusting the position and range for ROI extraction ..... 157 ROI adjustments from the CAM CONT screen ............ 158 ROI preset memory...................................................... 159
External interfaces .................................. 161
Setting the GPI I/O......................................................... 161 LAN................................................................................. 164 Controlling with external panels.................................. 165
Preparations ................................................................. 165 External panel settings................................................. 165 Settings on this unit when external panels are
connected ................................................................ 165 List of bus IDs and source IDs ..................................... 166 External Control ........................................................... 171 Macro Trigger ............................................................... 172
Appearance .............................................. 175 Specifications .......................................... 176 Setting menu table .................................. 178 Appendix (glossary) ................................ 212 Index ......................................................... 215
10

Before use

wpOverview
This unit is a 1 ME digital video switcher which supports a multiple number of 4K, 3G and HD formats. The 12G-SDI-compatible AV-UHS500 4K live switcher has basic functions that rival those in larger high-end switchers, making available to you the same operability you would use for producing HD video when you produce 4K video. With its excellent portability, the all-in-one main unit can easily be transported for use at a variety of live music, sport, and entertainment events. Furthermore, along with compatibility with multiple formats (4K, 3G, and HD), the addition of optional units makes it possible to expand to a maximum of 16 SDI inputs, enabling smooth operation even at events with a large number of cameras. The keyers, which enable a variety of program production techniques, are equipped with a total of five keyers including two channels for chroma keys and two channels of PinP. Furthermore, you are able to flexibly select video output to match your purposes, even when you have scenes using different formats, using features such as the up/down converters, HDR/SDR converters, and the ITU-R BT.2020/ BT.709 converters. We have endeavored to make the product useful in a variety of portable applications, such as special event venues, broadcast vehicles, at university or company presentations, etc., and of course inside broadcasters themselves. This 4K live switcher really exhibits its high performance capabilities when it produces living images on location.
wpConcerning the ratings display
The name, model number, and power rating for the unit are displayed on the rear panel.
wpDisclaimer of warranty
IN NO EVENT SHALL Panasonic Corporation BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY OR ANY PERSON, EXCEPT FOR REPLACEMENT OR REASONABLE MAINTENANCE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR THE CASES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO BELOW:
1 ANY DAMAGE AND LOSS, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR EXEMPLARY, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE PRODUCT;
2 PERSONAL INJURY OR ANY DAMAGE CAUSED BY INAPPROPRIATE USE OR NEGLIGENT OPERATION OF THE USER;
3 UNAUTHORIZED DISASSEMBLE, REPAIR OR MODIFICATION OF THE PRODUCT BY THE USER;
4 INCONVENIENCE OR ANY LOSS ARISING WHEN IMAGES ARE NOT DISPLAYED, DUE TO ANY REASON OR CAUSE INCLUDING ANY FAILURE OR PROBLEM OF THE PRODUCT;
5 ANY PROBLEM, CONSEQUENTIAL INCONVENIENCE, OR LOSS OR DAMAGE, ARISING OUT OF THE SYSTEM COMBINED BY THE DEVICES OF THIRD PARTY;

6 ANY INCONVENIENCE, DAMAGES OR LOSSES RESULTING FROM ACCIDENTS CAUSED BY AN INADEQUATE INSTALLATION METHOD OR ANY FACTORS OTHER THAN A DEFECT IN THE PRODUCT ITSELF;
7 LOSS OF REGISTERED DATA CAUSED BY ANY FAILURE;
8 ANY DAMAGE OR CLAIMS DUE TO LOSS OR LEAKAGE OF IMAGE DATA OR SETTING DATA SAVED ON THIS UNIT OR ON A MEMORY CARD OR COMPUTER.
wpNetwork security
The unit also has functions which are used when it is connected to a network. Using the unit when it has been connected to a network may possibly give rise to the following issues.
1 Leakage or theft of information through this unit 2 Use of this unit for illegal operations by persons with
malicious intent 3 Interference with or stoppage of this unit by persons
with malicious intent
It is your responsibility to take precautions such as those described below to protect yourself against the above network security risks.
pp Use this unit in a network secured by a firewall, etc. pp If this unit is connected to a network that includes
computers, make sure that the system is not infected by computer viruses or other malicious entities (using a regularly updated antivirus program, anti-spyware program, etc.).
The following points should be borne in mind as well. pp Use with the same segment is recommended for the
equipment which is connected to the unit. If the unit is connected to equipment whose segments are different, events dependent upon the settings inherent to the network equipment, for instance, may occur so thoroughly check the connections with the equipment to which the unit will be connected prior to the start of operation. pp Do not choose an installation location where the unit, cables and other parts will be easily damaged.

Precautions for use

p Handle carefully.
Do not drop the product, or subject it to strong shock or vibration. Do not carry or move the product by the fader lever. This is important to prevent malfunctioning or accidents.
p Use the product in an ambient temperature of 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F).
Avoid using the product at a cold place below 0 °C (32 °F) or at a hot place above 40 °C (104 °F) because extremely low or high temperature will adversely affect the parts inside.
p Power off before connecting or disconnecting cables.
Before plugging or unplugging the cables, be sure to switch power off.
p Avoid humidity and dust.
Avoid using the product at a humid, dusty place because much humidity and dust will cause damage to the parts inside.
p Maintenance
Turn off the unit's power and wipe the product using a dry cloth. To remove stubborn dirt, dip a cloth into a diluted solution of kitchen detergent (neutral), wring it out well, and wipe the product gently. Then, after wiping the product with a moist cloth, wipe it again with a dry cloth.
Caution · Avoid using benzine, paint thinners and other volatile
fluids. · If a chemical cleaning cloth is to be used, carefully
read through the precautions for its use.

p Built-in display (LCD monitor)
Leaving the built-in display on with the same image over a long period of time may result in temporary afterimage (burn-in). Such afterimages are usually resolved when ordinary moving images are displayed for a while.
The liquid crystal parts are highly precise with 99.99% of the pixels effective. This leaves less than 0.01% of pixels that may not light or may remain on all the time. These phenomena are normal and will have no effect on the images you shoot.
Condensation may form if you use the unit where temperatures fluctuate. Wipe dry with a soft, dry cloth.
When the unit has completely cooled down, the display on the LCD monitor appears slightly darker than usual immediately after the power has been turned on. Once the internal temperature of the unit rises, the display returns to the normal brightness.
p When the product is to be discarded
When the product is to be discarded at the end of its service life, ask a specialized contractor to dispose of it properly in order to protect the environment.
p Concerning the consumable parts
Cooling fan: This is a consumable part. As a general rule, replace it every 5 years or so (when the unit has been operated for 15 hours a day).
The period when the consumable parts need to be replaced will differ depending on the operating conditions. When the time comes to replace one of these parts, be absolutely sure to ask your dealer to do the job.

p Precaution to be observed during production
This product's image switching and image effect functions can be used to produce images which flicker rapidly or images which change rapidly. However, bear in mind when using these functions in production that the kinds of images produced may have an adverse effect on the viewer's physical well-being.

Installation precautions

qpIn addition to heeding the points presented in the "Read this first!", observe the following precautions as well.

Connecting the power supply pp Be absolutely sure to use only the power
cable supplied with the unit. pp The power cable supplied with the
unit has a 3-pin plug with a grounding terminal. Connect to a 3-pin AC outlet which is equipped with a grounding terminal. pp Be absolutely sure to connect the ground terminal (SIGNAL GND) at the rear of the unit to the system ground. pp When the unit is not going to be used for a prolonged period of time, turn off its power, and disconnect the power plug from the AC outlet.

Handle carefully! pp Dropping the unit or subjecting it to strong impact or
vibration may cause trouble and/or malfunctioning.
Do not allow any foreign objects to enter inside the unit! pp Allowing water, metal items, scraps of food or other foreign
objects inside the unit may cause a fire and/or electric shocks.
Choosing the best installation location pp Install the unit on a sufficiently strong, stable and level
surface for use. pp Ensure a space of at least 100 mm (3-15/16 inches)
around the unit's vents to avoid obstructing ventilation. In particular, ensure sufficient space between ventilation and wiring when using mounted in a panel or table. pp Do not install the unit in a manner in which its cables and other accessories can be easily damaged. pp Avoid installing the unit where it will be exposed to direct sunlight or to the hot air that is blown out from other products. pp Installing the unit in a very humid, dusty or vibration-prone location may give rise to trouble.

Ventilation holes

Features

Compact design, abundant inputs and outputs pp Despite its compact size, it comes with eight SDI inputs,
two HDMI inputs, five SDI outputs and two HDMI outputs. pp Along with the background transitions using cuts, mixes,
and wipes, the unit is also equipped with five keyers including two channels for chroma keys and two channels of PinP. pp The two multi view display functions enable a single monitor to be divided so that it can display a maximum of 16 videos. pp Input/output accommodates 4K, 3G, and HD-SDI as standards, and each input is equipped with a frame synchronizer (FS). pp There are two option slots that combine input and output functionality, and the addition of optional input units expands input capabilities to a maximum of 16 inputs, and the addition of optional output units expands output capabilities to a maximum of 13 outputs.
Supports multiple formats pp The following signal formats are supported:
4K formats: 2160 × 59.94p, 2160 × 50p, 2160 × 29.97p, 2160 × 25p, 2160 × 24p, 2160 × 23.98p
2K formats: 1080×59.94P, 1080×50P, 1080×29.97Psf, 1080×25Psf, 1080×24Psf, 1080×23.98Psf, 1080×59.94i, 1080×50i, 1080×29.97p, 1080×25p, 1080×24p, 1080×23.98p
HD formats: 720×59.94P, 720×50P
pp Supports a multiple number of 4K, 2K and HD formats. pp Compatible with a variety of interfaces, such as 12G-SDI,
3G-SDI, 1.5G-SDI and HDMI. pp There are three option slots (with one of these planned to
be available in the future) in the compact chassis of this all-in-one unit. pp The standard eight SDI inputs can be expanded to a maximum of 16 inputs; the standard two HDMI inputs can be expanded to a maximum of eight inputs. pp The standard five SDI outputs can be expanded to a maximum of 13 outputs; the standard two HDMI outputs can be expanded to a maximum of eight outputs. pp Equipped with five keyers to enable an abundance of video effects. pp Equipped with features such as up/down converters, HDR/ SDR converters, and ITU-R BT.2020/BT.709 converters. pp Equipped with four AUX BUS. The AUX1 and AUX2 both have MIX transition functions, and additionally DSK1 and 2 can be assigned. pp Fitted with a remote camera controller function that is able to control a maximum of 16 Panasonic 4K/HD integrated cameras. pp High-quality chroma keys enabled with the Primatte® algorithm. pp Video memory (2 systems each for still images and videos (1 system only in 4K mode, however)) can be recorded and played back with key signals attached. pp Equipped with a shot memory and event memory function. pp Compatible with SD memory cards, SDHC memory cards, and SDXC memory cards. pp Built-in 7-inch color display.

Optional units that make possible a variety of expansion
functions to suit any application pp SDI Input Unit AV-UHS5M1
Has four 3G or 12G-SDI inputs supporting frame synchronizers, up-conversion, color correction, SDR/HDR conversion, and ITU-R BT.2020/BT.709 conversion. pp SDI Output Unit AV-UHS5M2 Has four 3G or 12G-SDI outputs supporting downconversion, HDR/SDR conversion, and ITU-R BT.2020/ BT.709 conversion. pp HDMI Input Unit AV-UHS5M3 Three HDMI2.0 inputs There is a scaler function in each of the channels. pp HDMI Output Unit AV-UHS5M4 Three HDMI2.0 outputs There is a scaler function in each of the channels. pp 4K DVE Unit AV-UHS5M5 Equipped with DVE function for the 4K mode. (one BKGD and one keyer)

Accessories
Check that the following accessories are present and accounted for. pp After removing the product from its container, dispose of the power cable cap (if supplied) and packing materials in an
appropriate manner. Power cable for AV-UHS500P ............................................... 1
Power cable for AV-UHS500E ............................................... 3 pp For U.K. and Saudi Arabia pp For Continental Europe, etc. pp For India only

pp This product is equipped with 3 types of AC mains cable. Appropriate mains cable must be used in each local area, since the other type of mains cable is not suitable.

wSold separately
Optional units

Model number

Unit

AV-UHS5M1 AV-UHS5M2 AV-UHS5M3 AV-UHS5M4 AV-UHS5M5

SDI Input Unit SDI Output Unit HDMI Input Unit HDMI Output Unit 4K DVE Unit

Function
3G/12G-SDI input × 4 lines 3G/12G-SDI output × 4 lines HDMI input × 3 lines HDMI output × 3 lines BKGD output × 1 line, Keyer output × 1 line,

Supported slots

SLOT A SLOT B

: Supported

Installation and connections (Be sure to ask your dealer.)

wpHow to install the optional units
For details, refer to the operating instructions of the optional unit concerned.

AV-UHS5M1 AV-UHS5M2 AV-UHS5M3 AV-UHS5M4

SLOT A SLOT B
SLOT A SLOT B SLOT A SLOT B SLOT A SLOT B

IN-A1, IN-A2, IN-A3, IN-A4 IN-B1, IN-B2, IN-B3, IN-B4 OUT-A1, OUT-A2, OUT-A3, OUT-A4 OUT-B1, OUT-B2, OUT-B3, OUT-B4 IN-A1, IN-A2, IN-A3 IN-B1, IN-B2, IN-B3 OUT-A1, OUT-A2, OUT-A3 OUT-B1, OUT-B2, OUT-B3

Notes
pp Before installing or removing optional units, turn off the power, and disconnect the power plug. pp Before coming into physical contact with optional units, touch your hand to metal that has been grounded to discharge the
static electricity in your body. A safe way to proceed is to wear an anti-static wrist strap. Optional units may be damaged if you touch them with static still in your body. pp Avoid damage to optional units by not dropping or subjecting to strong shocks or vibrations. pp After removing optional units, be absolutely sure to attach the blank panel. pp When installing or removing optional units, take care not to hurt yourself on the edges or metal parts.

Installation and connections (Be sure to ask your dealer.)
1 Turn off the power of the unit, and disconnect the power cable. 2 Loosen the four screws of SLOT A or SLOT B at the back of the unit, and remove the blank panel.
SLOT B SLOT A Blank panel Screw Screw 3 Align the optional unit with the guide rails, and insert it slowly. Insert it until it will go no further. Take care not to exert excessive force while doing this since that may damage the connector inside. 4 Mount the optional unit in place using the four screws. Clamping torque: 0.7 N·m
Screw Screw 5 After connecting the necessary cables, plug the power cable into the power outlet, and turn on the power.
16

Parts and their functions
Control panel
Memory card area User button area

Positioner area

Display area

USER

MENU MODE

PICT

MENU OFF

WFM VECT

DISPLAY

BKGD CBGD VMEM MACRO

KEY1 CKEY SHOT EVENT

KEY2 KEY3

DSK1 DSK2

XPT

OUT

TIME CAM CONF SYS

PRJ SD Card MENU HOLD

SHOT MEM

STORE

7 NEW STILL 1

8 COPY STILL 2

9 PASTE TRIM IN

XPT DSBL REC

BKGD PATT

Memory/wipe pattern/ EVENT
MEM

RE CALL

-/+

INS

DEL

MOD

PAGE

KEY PATT

CLIP 1

CLIP 2 TRIM OUT STOP

number key area MACRO

DEL

REV

VMEM

REV

TAKE

ENTER

CAM PMEM

EDIT

0/10

UNDO

CAM CONT

TRIM OFF PLAY

MEMORY / WIPE PATTERN / 10 KEY

Z ZOOM

POWER ALARM LINK

X/Y PAN/TLT

KEY1 F/S

KEY2 F/S

KEY3 F/S

DSK1 F/S

AMBER : FILL / GREEN : SOURCE

DSK2 F/S

AUX1

AUX BUS DELEGATION

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

DISP CAM

AUX
Crosspoint area
PGM A

MV1

PGM

MV2

PVW

MACRO

N/R

FTB ON

AUX /DISP SOURCE

WIPE DIRECTION

SHIFT SHIFT

BKGD

KEY

KEY1 ON

KEY2 ON

Transition area MIX

MIX

WIPE

MIX

WIPE

KEY3 ON

DSK1 ON

1/13

2/14

3/15

4/16

5/17

6/18

7/19

8/20

9/21

10/22

11/23

12/24

PST B

SHIFT

CUT

AUTO

DSK2 ON

1 2
3

1 POWER indicator [POWER] This indicator lights when the power switch () on the rear panel is set to ON while power is supplied to the AC power input socket ().
2 ALARM indicator [ALARM] This indicator lights up when any of the following types of trouble has occurred. · When the cooling fan has stopped operating · When something is wrong with the power supply (a drop in the voltage) · When high temperatures are reached inside the unit
When any of these events has occurred, an alarm message is displayed on the built-in display. When an alarm has occurred, details of the trouble concerned can be checked by selecting the System menu followed by the Alarm sub menu. The alarm information can be output from the TALLY/GPI connector () on the rear panel to an external device.
For further details, refer to "Alarm message". When an alarm has occurred, stop using the unit immediately, and be absolutely sure to contact your dealer. Continuing to use the unit even after an alarm has occurred could damage the unit.

3 LINK indicator [LINK] Illuminates when this unit and an external device are linked. Refer to the operating instructions for the external device for settings on the external device.

Parts and their functions
Crosspoint area

KEY1 F/S AUX

KEY2 F/S

KEY3 F/S

DSK1 F/S

AMBER : FILL / GREEN : SOURCE

DSK2 F/S

AUX1

AUX BUS DELEGATION

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

DISP CAM

MV1

PGM

MV2

PVW

AUX /DISP SOURCE

SHIFT

4 5

PGM A

SHIFT

1/13

2/14

3/15

4/16

5/17

6/18

7/19

8/20

9/21

10/22

11/23

12/24

PST B

SHIFT

4 PGM/A bus crosspoint buttons
[PGM/A 1 to 12] These are used to select the PGM/A bus video signals. Buttons 1 to 24 can be selected using the [SHIFT] button. Refer to "Selecting the bus using the SHIFT function".

"A/B", "PGM-A/PST-B" or "PGM-B/PST-A" can be selected as the Bus Mode item by selecting the Config menu following by the Operate sub menu. Refer to "Selecting the bus mode".

When one of the crosspoint buttons (4, 5, 7) is held down, the name of the input material and the number of the crosspoint button are displayed.

5 PST/B bus crosspoint buttons
[PST/B 1 to 12] These are used to select the PST/B bus video signals. Buttons 1 to 24 can be selected using the [SHIFT] button. Refer to "Selecting the bus using the SHIFT function".

"A/B", "PGM-A/PST-B" or "PGM-B/PST-A" can be selected as the Bus Mode item by selecting the Config menu following by the Operate sub menu. Refer to "Selecting the bus mode".

6 AUX bus selector buttons (AUX BUS DELEGATION) Select the bus to be operated using the AUX bus crosspoint buttons (7). The selected button lights.

[KEY1 F/S], [KEY2 F/S], [KEY3 F/S]: This button is used to change the AUX bus crosspoint buttons (7) into the source selector buttons for the key fill buses or key source buses. Each time it is pressed, the selector button function is switched between the key fill buses and key source buses.

Amber Green

Key fill buses Key source buses

[DSK1 F/S], [DSK2 F/S]: This button is used to change the AUX bus crosspoint buttons (7) into the source selector buttons for the DSK fill buses or DSK source buses. Each time it is pressed, the selector button function is switched between the DSK fill buses and DSK source buses.

Amber Green

DSK fill buses DSK source buses

[AUX1] to [AUX4]: These buttons are used to change the AUX bus crosspoint buttons (7) into the selector buttons for the sources of the AUX buses.
[DISP/CAM] (built-in display/CAM): When the built-in display is selected, this switches the AUX crosspoint buttons (7) to DISP bus (the images displayed on the built-in display) source selector buttons. When CAM is selected this switches the AUX crosspoint buttons (7) to CAM source selector buttons. The selection switches between built-in display and CAM each time you press the button.

Amber Green

Built-in display selected CAM selected

7 AUX bus crosspoint buttons These buttons are used to select the source of the bus which was selected by the AUX bus selector button (6). Buttons 1 to 24 can be selected using the [SHIFT] button. Refer to "Selecting the bus using the SHIFT function".

8 Dedicated crosspoint buttons for the AUX/DISP bus (AUX/DISP SOURCE) While the [AUX1] to [AUX4] AUX bus selector buttons (6) are illuminated, these select AUX bus sources. While the [DISP/CAM] AUX bus selector button (6) is illuminated, it selects DISP bus sources. The buttons that are pressed turn amber.

[MV1/MV2]: Selects either multi view display signal 1 or signal 2 for the AUX bus or the DISP bus. Switching between multi view display signal 1 and 2 is done with the [SHIFT] button (7).
[PGM/PVW]: Selects either the PGM signal or the PVW signal for the AUX bus or the DISP bus. Switching between the PGM signal and the PVW signal is done with the [SHIFT] button (7).

Parts and their functions
Memory/wipe pattern/number key area

SHOT MEM EVENT MEM MACRO CAM PMEM

STORE RE
CALL DEL EDIT

7 NEW STILL 1

8 COPY STILL 2

9 PASTE TRIM IN

4 INS CLIP 1

5 DEL CLIP 2

6 MOD TRIM OUT

REV

0/10

UNDO

TRIM OFF

MEMORY / WIPE PATTERN / 10 KEY

XPT DSBL REC -/+ PAGE STOP
TAKE ENTER
PLAY

BKGD PATT KEY PATT

VMEM

CAM CONT

9 Number keys When the following buttons are pressed and lit, they serve as buttons for executing their corresponding functions.

BKGD, KEY pattern selector buttons
Memory operation buttons
Video memory operation button

[BKGD PATT] [KEY PATT]
[SHOT MEM] [EVENT MEM] [MACRO] [CAM PMEM]
[VMEM]

BKGD, KEY pattern selector buttons [BKGD PATT], [KEY PATT] When the [BKGD PATT] button is pressed and lit, the wipe patterns for the background transitions can be selected using the number keys. When the [KEY PATT] button is pressed and lit, the wipe patterns for the key transitions can be selected using the number keys. When both the [BKGD PATT] and [KEY PATT] buttons are lit, the pattern selection menu is displayed on the built-in display. When the [F1] () is rotated, the pattern page is changed. Refer to "Wipe".

Memory operation buttons [SHOT MEM], [EVENT MEM], [MACRO], [CAM PMEM]: These buttons are used to select the memory type. The number keys (1 to 10) are used to carry out operations and register and call settings. The [CAM PMEM] button is also used with the ROI PMEM function. Refer to "ROI function". [STORE]: Press this to register data in the memory. [RECALL]: Press this to recall data from the memory. [DEL]: Press this to delete data in the memory. [EDIT]: Press this to edit the event memory/macro memory. Refer to "Memory".
Video memory operation button [VMEM] When the [VMEM] button is pressed and lit, video memory operations such as recording and playback can be performed using the number keys. Refer to "Video memories". When the [VMEM] button has been pressed to turn it green, you can manage the internal storage for the video memory.
Camera control button [CAM CONT] Controls connected remote cameras. The positioner () and display mode buttons () are used to control. The [CAM CONT] button can also be used to control the extraction range for the ROI function. Refer to "ROI function".

Parts and their functions
User button area
User buttons (USER BUTTON) [U1 to U8] These are used to assign some functions of the menu settings to the [U1] to [U8] buttons on the Config menu. Refer to "Setting the user buttons".

USER

Transition area

MACRO

BKGD MIX WIPE
MIX

KEY MIX WIPE
WIPE

N/R

WIPE DIRECTION

FTB ON

KEY1 ON

KEY2 ON

KEY3 ON

DSK1 ON

CUT

AUTO

DSK2 ON

[MACRO] button This executes the Macro memory set in XPT with Macro Assign in the menus. The [AUX] button, in which Macro memory is set with Macro Assign in the menus, turns green when the [MACRO] button is selected and turns amber. The registered Macro memory is executed when the illuminated button is selected.
[KEY] button This executes the KEY1 transition when the [CUT] button (), [AUTO] button () or fader lever () has been operated. When the [KEY] button is pressed and it is selected, its indicator lights in amber. If the [BKGD] button () is now pressed, the indicator goes off, and the de-selected status is established. When the [BKGD] button () and [KEY] button are pressed at the same time, both buttons are set to the selected status.
[BKGD] button This executes the background transition when the [CUT] button (), [AUTO] button () or fader lever () has been operated. When the [BKGD] button is pressed and it is selected, its indicator lights in amber. If the [KEY] button () is now pressed, the indicator goes off, and the de-selected status is established. When the [BKGD] button and [KEY] button () are pressed at the same time, both buttons are set to the selected status.

MIX, WIPE selection status LEDs These light up to indicate whether MIX or WIPE has been selected when background transitions or key transitions are executed.
[MIX] button This is used to switch the A and B bus images while making them overlap. During the transition, the A and B bus output total is kept at 100%. When the [MIX] button is pressed and it is selected, its indicator lights in amber. If the [WIPE] button () is now pressed, it goes off, and the de-selected status is established.

Parts and their functions

[WIPE] button This is used to execute the transition using the pattern selected by the number key (9). When the [WIPE] button is pressed and it is selected, its indicator lights in amber. If the [MIX] button () is now pressed, it goes off, and the de-selected status is established.
[CUT] button This button is used to execute transitions instantly. Its indicator lights in amber during a transition, and it goes off when the transition is completed. Only KEY1 is enabled when KEY is set.
[AUTO] button This is used to automatically execute transitions (auto transition) using the transition time which has been set on the Time menu. During auto transition its indicator lights in amber. When the button is pressed again during auto transition, the auto transition operation is suspended, and the indicator lights in green. When it is pressed again while auto transition is suspended, the remaining transition is executed. The indicator goes off when auto transition is completed. When the [AUTO] button is pressed while the fader lever () is at an interim setting, the transition is executed in the time remaining from the interim setting. Only KEY1 is enabled when KEY is set.
[FTB ON] button This button is used to execute fade-out to a black screen/ white screen/Still/Clip/color background screen or fade-in from a black screen/white screen/Still/Clip/color background screen for the transition time which has been set on the Time menu.
[KEY1 ON], [KEY2 ON], [KEY3 ON] button This button is used to execute the key transition for the transition time which has been set on the Time menu.
[DSK1 ON], [DSK2 ON] button This button is used to execute fade-in or fade-out of downstream key for the transition time which has been set on the Time menu.

Bus tally LEDs These indicate the output statuses of the A bus and B bus. The LED corresponding to the bus whose program signals (PGM) are being output lights.
Wipe direction selection buttons (WIPE DIRECTION) [N/R], [R] These buttons are used to select the direction in which to wipe for executing background transitions. When the [R] indicator is off: Wiping proceeds in the normal direction. When the [R] indicator is lit: Wiping proceeds in the reverse direction. When the [N/R] indicator is lit: The normal direction is replaced with the reverse direction (or vice versa) when the transition is completed. (The lit and extinguished statuses of the [R] button are also switched in line with the direction of the wiping.)
Fader lever This is used to execute background or KEY1 transitions. When it is moved as far as it will go, the transition is completed. When it has been operated during auto transition, auto transition will be switched to manual operation as soon as the fader position overtakes the amount of the transition being executed.

Parts and their functions
Display area

Built-in display The images, waveforms and menus are displayed by operating the display mode buttons (), menu selection buttons () and [CAM CONT] button (). To display images on the built-in display, press the [DISP/ CAM] button of the AUX bus selector buttons (6) so it turns amber. The source images selected with the DISP bus can also be displayed. To check the camera input, select the [CAM CONT] button (), and while it is displayed in amber, select the [DISP/ CAM] button of the AUX bus selector buttons (6) to display it in green, and select the XPT of the AUX to which the camera you want to check is connected.

Display mode buttons (DISPLAY) These buttons are used to select what is to be displayed on the built-in display.

[MENU MODE]: Each time this button is pressed, the menu mode is switched.

p Menu-only display

USER

MENU MODE

PICT

BKGD CBGD

KEY1 CKEY

KEY2 KEY3

DSK1 DSK2

TIME CAM

PRJ SD Card

MENU OFF

WFM VECT

DISPLAY

SHOT MEM EVENT MEM

STORE RE
CALL

MACRO

DEL

CAM PMEM

EDIT

VMEM MACRO

SHOT EVENT

XPT

OUT

CONF SYS

7 NEW STILL 1

8 COPY STILL 2

9 PASTE TRIM IN

4 INS CLIP 1

5 DEL CLIP 2

6 MOD TRIM OUT

REV

0/10

UNDO

TRIM OFF

MEMORY / WIPE PATTERN / 10 KEY

XPT DSBL REC -/+ PAGE STOP
TAKE ENTER
PLAY

MENU HOLD

BKGD PATT KEY PATT
VMEM
CAM CONT

p 1 line of menu display and full-screen image display

p Menu display/Subscreen/Image display

Parts and their functions

p Menu display/WFM display (or VECTOR display)/Image display
The image display and the WFM display (or VECTOR display) displayed in the upper portion of the built-in display can be switched by pressing the [PICT] button or the [WFM/VECT] button. [MENU OFF]: This button clears the menu display and switches to the image-only display. [PICT]: When this button is pressed and lit, images are displayed on the built-in display. [WFM/VECT]: When this button is pressed and lit, waveforms (WFM: waveform monitor) or vectors (VECTOR: vectorscope) are displayed on the built-in display. Each time the button is pressed, the display switches between WFM and VECTOR. p WFM (waveform monitor) display

Menu selection buttons (MENU) Each time one of these buttons is pressed, the menu of the function indicated at the top or bottom of the button is selected. The button of a selected menu lights up in amber.
[MENU HOLD] button This button is used to keep a menu on the display. When it is pressed while a menu is displayed, the menu displayed will not be switched to another menu even when one of the menu selection buttons is pressed. While the [MENU HOLD] button is pressed, the [MENU HOLD] button lights up in amber.
Rotary encoders [F1] to [F5] These are used to set the parameters which are displayed on the built-in display. Refer to "Basic menu operations".

p VECTOR (vectorscope) display

Parts and their functions
Positioner area
Z ZOOM

X/Y PAN/TLT

Positioner (POSITIONER) [X/Y] [PAN/TILT] These are used when performing the settings below. p Key PinP, DSK PinP position settings p Wipe start position setting
Target patterns: WIPE1: 5 WIPE2: 4, 5, 6, 7 SQ1: 5 SQ2: 4, 5, 6, 7 Refer to "Wipe".
p Flying key position setting p Chroma key marker position setting p When entering characters p When making settings using the keyboard screen p Pan and tilt control for a remote camera
In each case, the settings take effect only when the following menu items have been selected.
Note
During the time it takes for the unit to start up after its power is turned on, the unit detects the positions of the positioners and sets them to their center positions. Do not touch the positioners until the unit has started up.

Rotary encoder [Z] [ZOOM] This is used to set the PinP size, flying key size or to select the chroma key area. Also used to control the zoom on a remote camera. In each case, the settings take effect only when the following menu items have been selected. It is also used for settings using the keyboard screen.

Key PinP, DSK PinP

Positioner X/Y
Position adjustments

WIPE (BKGD) WIPE (KEY) Chroma key

Start position adjustments
Start position adjustments
Selection position adjustments

Flying key Position adjustments

Rotary encoder

Switch

Size adjustments (size increased by rotating the encoder clockwise and reduced by rotating it counterclockwise)

Hold switch down to restore initial values (X/Y, Z).

Hold switch down to restore

initial values (X/Y).

Hold switch down to restore

initial values (X/Y).

Selected area size adjustments (size increased by rotating the encoder clockwise and reduced by rotating it counterclockwise)

Execute sampling Hold switch down to restore size to initial values.

Size adjustments (size increased by rotating the encoder clockwise and reduced by rotating it counterclockwise)

Hold switch down to restore initial values (X/Y, Z).

Valid menu PinP Position
Background/Position Key/Position Chroma Key
Key1: Flying Key

p These are available for PAN/TILT or ZOOM control of the camera that is registered in Camera Information when the [CAM CONT] button () turns amber or while the [CAM PMEM] screen is being displayed on the built-in display.
p In the ROI mode, while the [ROI PMEM] screen is displayed on the built-in display, these can be used to set the Pos-X, Pos-Y, Size, and Pos-Speed for the input selected with the CAM bus.

Parts and their functions
Memory card area

MENU MODE MENU OFF
DISPLAY SHOT MEM EVENT MEM MACRO CAM PMEM

Memory card slot Insert an SD memory card (purchased separately), an SDHC memory card (purchased separately) or an SDXC memory card (purchased separately) into this slot.
Memory card access LED This LED lights while the data on the memory card is being accessed. Do not turn off the unit's power or eject the memory card while the access LED is lit. Doing so can damage the data on the memory card.
qpConcerning memory cards
Memory cards used with the unit should conform to SD, SDHC or SDXC standards. Be sure to format cards using the unit. Use memory cards formatted with FAT (exFAT for SDXC memory cards). (NTFS formatted memory cards cannot be recognized.) Panasonic memory cards with the following capacities can be used with the unit:
SD (from 8 MB to 2 GB) SDHC (from 4 GB to 32 GB) SDXC (from 64 GB to 128 GB)
For the latest information not available in the Operating Instructions, visit the following Web sites.
https://pro-av.panasonic.net/
pp Memory cards must not be used or stored in an environment where they may be · Exposed to high temperatures/humidities; · Exposed to water droplets; or · Electrically charged.

Parts and their functions

Rear panel area

EXPANTION SLOT B

TALLY/GPI 2

TALLY/GPI 1

BOOT

REF

SV NM

EXPANTION SLOT A

HDMI IOUT

12G SDI OUT

HDMI IN

12G SDI IN

LAN

SIGNAL GND

POWER ON

OFF AC IN

Power switch [POWER] When the power switch is turned on, the POWER indicator (1) lights up, and the unit can be operated.
HDMI output connectors [HDMI OUT 1, 2] Connect to external devices with an HDMI cable.
SDI signal output connectors [12G SDI OUT 1 to 5] Assignable with menus
HDMI input connectors [HDMI IN 1, 2] Connect to external devices with an HDMI cable.
SDI signal input connectors [12G SDI IN 1 to 8] 12G SDI IN 5 to 12G SDI IN 8 can use the up-converter function.
LAN connector [LAN] (RJ-45) (1000Base-TX) Refer to "External interfaces".
Ground connector [SIGNAL GND] Connect to the system's earth ground.
AC power input socket [AC IN ] (AC 100 V to 240 V, 50/60 Hz) Connect one end of the supplied power cable to this socket and the other end to the AC outlet. The supplied power cable comes with a 3-pin power plug. Be absolutely sure to plug it into a 3-point power outlet as the power source in order to earth the unit securely. If a 3-point power outlet is not available for this connection, be absolutely sure to consult your dealer.
Option slot SLOT A [EXPANSION SLOT A]

Option slot SLOT B [EXPANSION SLOT B] Each of these is an input/output option slot. A SDI input unit, HDMI output unit or other optional unit can be installed in these slots. For details, refer to "How to install the optional units" and the operating instructions of the unit concerned.
TALLY/GPI input/output connectors [TALLY/GPI 1, TALLY/GPI 2] (D-sub 15-pin, female, inch screw) Refer to "External interfaces".
BOOT switch [BOOT SV NM] This switch is used for maintenance purposes. For normal operations, select the "NM" (normal) position.
Reference input connector/BB output connector [REF] Loop-through output in the external sync mode. If the loop-through output is not going to be used, provide a 75-ohm termination. BB signals output from both connectors in the internal sync mode.
Cooling fan

Preparations
Turning the unit's power on and off

qpTurning on the power
1 Set the power switch to the ON position.
When power is supplied to the unit, the POWER indicator lights. 1 After several seconds, the crosspoint buttons light up.
2 Several seconds after the crosspoint buttons have lit up, the opening screen appears on the built-in display.

qpTurning off the power
1 Set the power switch to the OFF position.
The unit's power is turned off, and the POWER indicator goes off.

3 Menu operations can be performed when the opening screen is cleared.

Preparations
Basic menu operations
This section describes the basic operations of the menus which are displayed on the built-in display. For the menu configuration, refer to "Setting menu table".
Menu configuration and operations
1 Press the [MENU MODE] button to show the menu on the built-in display.
Refer to "Display area".
2 Select the menu for each function using the menu selection buttons (MENU) that corresponds to the
function concerned. Each time the button is pressed, the menu of the function displayed at the top of the button and the menu of the function displayed at the bottom are switched. The button of a selected menu lights up in amber.

MENU MODE

PICT

MENU OFF

WFM VECT

DISPLAY

SHOT MEM EVENT MEM

STORE RE
CALL

MACRO

DEL

CAM PMEM

EDIT

2 USER

BKGD CBGD VMEM MACRO

KEY1 CKEY SHOT EVENT

KEY2 KEY3

DSK1 DSK2

XPT

OUT

TIME CAM CONF SYS

7 NEW STILL 1

8 COPY STILL 2

9 PASTE TRIM IN

4 INS CLIP 1

5 DEL CLIP 2

6 MOD TRIM OUT

REV

0/10

UNDO

TRIM OFF

MEMORY / WIPE PATTERN / 10 KEY

XPT DSBL REC -/+ PAGE STOP
TAKE ENTER
PLAY

U8
PRJ SD Card MENU HOLD
BKGD PATT KEY PATT VMEM CAM CONT

3 Use the rotary encoders [F1] to [F5] to select more detailed settings.

[F1]

: Turn this rotary encoder to select the sub menu.

[F2] to [F5] : Use (press or turn) these rotary encoders to set the parameters.

For further details, refer to the next page.

Sub menu

Parameter setting area

Operate here using [F1].

Operate here using [F2].

Operate here using [F3].

Operate here using [F4].

Operate here using [F5].

pp The Input and Output menus will differ depending on whether optional units have been installed in the unit.

Preparations
List box:

Numeric value input box:

1 Press [F2] to [F5] to display the list box. 2 Turn [F2] to [F5] clockwise or counterclockwise to select
the setting. p The setting of an item whose selected setting does not blink will be reflected in the unit as soon as it has been selected. p The setting of an item whose selected setting blinks is reflected in the unit by pressing [F2] to [F5].
3 Press [F2] to [F5] again to close the list box.
Selector button:
When a rotary encoder [F2] to [F5] is pressed, the setting is switched between "On" and "Off."
Execution buttons:
When a rotary encoder [F2] to [F5] is pressed, the corresponding function is executed.

Turn a rotary encoder [F2] to [F5] to change the numeric value. When a rotary encoder [F2] to [F5] is held down, the numeric value is returned to its initial value. A numeric value bar is displayed and its display is linked to the numeric value.

Inputting numeric values using the number keys

1 Press [F2] to [F5] to establish the mode in which numeric values can be input using the number keys.

p Use the

. >>

button to input the decimal point.

If a numeric value has a decimal point which is not

input, it will be treated as an integer, and its decimal

places will be set to zero ("0").

p Press the

-/+ PAGE

button to switch the numeric value

between a positive and negative value. Each time

this button is pressed, the numeric value is switched

from positive to negative (or vice versa).

p If the

C UNDO

button is pressed when a numeric value

has been input, the numeric value will be returned to

the value prior to the change.

2 Input the numeric values using the number keys, and press the [TAKE ENTER] button. The values which have been input are entered and reflected in the unit.
pp When a numeric value is input using the number keys and a rotary encoder from [F1] to [F5] is operated, the input value is cleared, and the numeric value prior to input is restored.
pp When a numeric value outside the setting range is input, the value is invalid and the numeric value prior to input is restored.

Character input box:

When a rotary encoder [F2] to [F5] is pressed, the keyboard screen is displayed. Use rotary encoders [F1] to [F5] or positioner to input the characters. Refer to "Keyboard screen operations".

Preparations

Keyboard screen operations
When a name such as the name of the input signal material, name of the memory or name of the data to be saved on an memory card is to be changed, display the keyboard screen, and input the characters. When the rotary encoder [F2] to [F5] that corresponds to the item (character input box) whose name is to be changed is pressed, the keyboard screen appears on the built-in display.
Character input area
When the keyboard screen is displayed, use positioner, [Z] or rotary encoders [F1] to [F5] to input the characters (alphanumerics and symbols). The character selected is reflected in the character input area. [F1]: CURSOR
Turn [F1] to move the cursor inside the character input area. [F2]: SHIFT When [F2] is pressed, the keyboard display is switched (between upper-case letters, lower-case letters and symbols). [F3]: CLEAR When [F3] is pressed, all of the characters in the input area are cleared. [F4]: OK When [F4] is pressed, the name which has been input is entered, and reflected in the unit. At this point, the keyboard screen is cleared, and the original screen is restored. [F5]: CANCEL When [F5] is pressed, the name which has been input is canceled. At this point, the keyboard screen is cleared, and the original screen is restored. Positioner: POSITION Move the positioner to move the cursor within the input area. [Z]: SELECT Text is selected when [Z] is pressed. pp It is possible to enter numbers with the number keys, delete characters with the [C] button, and confirm the name with the [Enter] button.

Menu delegation function
When the buttons listed below are double-clicked, the specified menu is selected. (The menu delegation function) The operation corresponding to the button pressed is also executed.

Button

Menu selected

Crosspoint area (AUX bus selector buttons)

KEY1 F/S Key menu/Adjust sub menu

When the chroma key is selected: Chroma Key menu/Adjust sub menu When PinP is selected: PinP menu/Position sub menu

KEY2 F/S Key menu/Adjust sub menu

KEY3 F/S Key menu/Adjust sub menu

DSK1 F/S DSK menu/Adjust sub menu

When the chroma key is selected: Chroma Key menu/Adjust sub menu When PinP is selected: PinP menu/Position sub menu

DSK2 F/S DSK menu/Adjust sub menu

Transition area

BKGD

Time menu/BKGD sub menu

KEY

Time menu/Key1 sub menu

WIPE

Background menu/Border sub menu

<Menu delegation setting> This setting is used to enable (turn on) or disable (turn off) the menu delegation function.

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display

the Config menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Operate sub menu.

3 Use [F4] to set enable or disable for the menu delegation function at the Delegation item.

Enable

Off

Disable

Preparations

Setting the system format

One system format (input/output signal) can be selected.

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display

the System menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Format sub menu.

3 Use [F3] to select 4K or 2K in the Switcher Mode item, then press [F3] to confirm the selection.
p When you switch the Switcher Mode of this unit between 4K and 2K, Initial and a restart are executed. Initial means that all of the current settings or video memory are cleared. The Still data saved in the internal storage is not deleted.
4 Use [F2] to select the format in the Format item, then press [F2] to confirm the selection.
p The video memory is cleared completely when the Format of this unit is switched. However, the still image memory (Still) is only cleared when switched to 1080 or 720. The Still data saved in the internal storage is not deleted.
5 [Use [F4] to select the color space in the Color Space item, then press [F4] to confirm the selection.
Setting the date and time
The user can set the date and time to be used as the memory card's time stamp. Be absolutely sure to set them when an memory card is to be used.

Setting the time
1 On the System menu, use [F1] to display the Time sub menu.
2 Use [F2] to set the hour using the Hour item. 3 Use [F3] to set the minutes using the Minute item. 4 Use [F4] to set the seconds using the Second item. 5 Press the [F5] to enter the hour/minutes/seconds. 6 Press [F1] (YES) to save. Press [F5] (NO) to disable.
The time counts up from when the power is turned on.
About the built-in battery for the date/time When the time display is "2014/01/01 00:00:00", the built-in battery for the date/time is exhausted. After recharging the built-in battery for the date/time, set the date and the time.
To recharge the built-in battery for the date/time Turn the power of the unit on and leave it for approximately 3 hours. It can keep the clock settings for approximately 6 months.

Setting the date

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display

the System menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Date sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to set the year using the Year item. 4 Use [F3] to set the month using the Month item. 5 Use [F4] to set the day using the Date item. 6 Press the [F5] to enter the year/month/day. 7 Press [F1] (YES) to save. Press [F5] (NO) to disable.

Basic operations

Background transition

Selecting the bus

Press one of the crosspoint buttons to select the material to be used for the background transition. Depending on the operating status, the button pressed will light in one of two colors.

Lighting in red
Lighting in green

When the selected input signals are output to PGM. (However, the indicator lights in amber during FTB operations.)
When the selected input signals are not output to PGM.

AUX

SHIFT

PGM A

SHIFT

1/13

2/14

3/15

4/16

5/17

6/18

7/19

8/20

9/21

10/22

11/23

12/24

PST B

SHIFT

Lighting in red Lighting in green
pp When the crosspoint buttons are held down, the button numbers and the names of the input materials assigned to the buttons are displayed on the built-in display in the form of a list for as long as the crosspoint buttons remain held down.

Selecting the bus using the SHIFT function
The SHIFT function enables two materials to be allocated -- the front material and the rear material -- to one button, and the materials to be selected using the [SHIFT] button. A total of 24 materials -- front materials (1 to 12) and rear materials (13 to 24) -- can be allocated to the three groups of 12 crosspoint buttons whether these buttons are the PGM/A bus crosspoint buttons, PST/B bus crosspoint buttons or AUX bus crosspoint buttons.
There are actually two SHIFT functions: "All SHIFT" for switching all the front materials to the rear materials or vice versa, and "Single SHIFT" for switching the front material of one crosspoint button with its rear material or vice versa. "All SHIFT" works once the SHIFT function has been allocated to one of the user buttons. "Single SHIFT" works once the SHIFT function has been allocated to the No.12 or No.1 crosspoint button of the crosspoint button group concerned by a menu operation.
All SHIFT
All SHIFT is used to switch all the materials of the PGM/A bus crosspoint buttons, PST/B bus crosspoint buttons or AUX bus crosspoint buttons from front materials to rear materials or vice versa. The user button to which the SHIFT function has been allocated is used to switch between the front materials and rear materials.
1 Allocate the SHIFT function to one of the user buttons. (For the method used to allocate this function to the user button, refer to "Setting the user buttons".)
2 Each time the [SHIFT] button (user button) is pressed, the front materials are switched to the rear materials or vice versa.

p When the rear materials (13 to 24) have been selected, the [SHIFT] button (user button) lights in amber.
p When the button is pressed again, it goes off, and the front materials (1 to 12) are now selected.

Basic operations

Single SHIFT

Single SHIFT is used to switch the individual material of a PGM/A bus crosspoint button, PST/B bus crosspoint button or AUX bus crosspoint button from a front material to a rear material or vice versa. Switching between the front material and rear material is done using the crosspoint button in which the SHIFT function is allocated. The SHIFT function can be allocated to button No.12 or No.1.

w Allocating the SHIFT function

1 Press the

XPT MV

button to light its indicator, and display

the XPT menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the XPT Setting sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to select the button to which the SHIFT function is to be allocated using the Shift item.

Right Left Off

Button No.12 Button No.1 Function is not allocated.

4 Use [F3] to select the operation to be performed when the [SHIFT] button is pressed using the Shift-Lock item.

Off

The rear material is selected only while the

[SHIFT] button is pressed.

The front material and rear material are

switched each time the [SHIFT] button is

pressed.

p To use the materials that have been set in the button to which the SHIFT function is allocated, either set the SHIFT function Off or allocate the SHIFT function to another button.
p If the [SHIFT] button for "Single SHIFT" is pressed when the rear materials (13 to 24) have been selected using "All SHIFT", the bus crosspoint buttons concerned will be switched to the front materials.
p When the crosspoint buttons are held down, the button numbers and the names of the input materials assigned to the buttons are displayed on the built-in display in the form of a list for as long as the crosspoint buttons remain held down.

Selecting the bus mode

Select the A/B bus system or flip-flop system (PGM/PST system) from the setting menu.

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display

the Config menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Operate sub menu.

3 Use [F2], and select the A/B or PGM/PST (flip-flop system) using the Bus Mode item.

A/B
PGM-A/ PST-B
PGM-B/ PST-A

When the fader lever is at side A, the signals selected by the A bus are replaced PGM bus materials. When the fader lever is at side B, the signals selected by the B bus are replaced PGM bus materials.
Using a flip-flop system, the signals selected by the A bus are always replaced PGM bus materials, and the signals selected by the B bus are always replaced PST bus materials.
Using a flip-flop system, the signals selected by the B bus are always replaced PGM bus materials, and the signals selected by the A bus are always replaced PST bus materials.

Selecting the transition mode
Select the transition mode using the [MIX] and [WIPE] buttons.
1 Press the [BKGD] button in the transition area so that its indicator lights in amber. When the [BKGD] button and [KEY] button are pressed at the same time, both buttons are selected.
2 Use the [MIX] and [WIPE] buttons in the transition area to select the background transition mode. The indicator of the selected button lights in amber.

Basic operations

Manual transition

Operate the fader lever to execute transitions manually. If the fader lever has been operated during auto transition, auto transition will be switched to manual operation as soon as the fader position overtakes the amount of the transition being executed. The bus tally LEDs on the left of the fader lever indicate the program bus output status.

Top LED only lights PGM/A bus output

Top and bottom LEDs light

During the transition

Bottom LED only lights

PST/B bus output

Cut transition
When the [CUT] button is pressed, the transition is executed instantly.

Auto transition

pp When the [AUTO] button is pressed, the transition is executed automatically using the transition time which has been set.
pp The transition is executed in the remaining time when the [AUTO] button is pressed while the fader lever is being operated.
pp The auto transition time is set using the Time menu.

1 Press the

TIME CAM

button to light its indicator, and display

the Time menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the BKGD sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to set the transition time in frames.

The display unit is set by selecting Config menu Operate sub menu Time Unit item.

Sec Frame

The time is displayed as a number of seconds.
The time is displayed as a number of frames.

Any time from 0 to 999f can be set. The time which can be set when seconds are used as the display unit differs depending on the system format.

59.94i: 50i: 29.97PsF: 25PsF: 24PsF: 23.98PsF:

max. 33s09f max. 39s24f max. 33s09f max. 39s24f max. 41s15f max. 41s15f

59.94p: 50p: 29.97p: 25p: 24p: 23.98p:

max. 16s39f max. 19s49f max. 33s09f max. 39s24f max. 41s15f max. 41s15f

Basic operations

Wipe

Selecting the wipe pattern

The wipe patterns are selected using the number keys.

1 Press the [BKGD PATT] button (or [KEY PATT] button). The [BKGD PATT] button (or [KEY PATT] button) indicator lights in amber, and the pattern table screen appears on the built-in display.

7 NEW STILL 1
4 INS CLIP 1

8 COPY STILL 2
5 DEL CLIP 2

9 PASTE TRIM IN
6 MOD TRIM OUT

XPT DSBL REC
-/+ PAGE STOP

BKGD PATT KEY PATT

2 Use [F1] to select the page. 3 Use one of the number keys to select the pattern.

REV

TAKE

ENTER

0/10

UNDO

VMEM CAM CONT

4 Use [F5] to close the table screen. p The table screen can also be closed by pressing the

TRIM OFF

MEMORY / WIPE PATTERN / 10 KEY

PLAY

[BKGD PATT] button or [KEY PATT] button and turning

off the button's indicator.

wpTable of wipe patterns

pp The "SQ2: 8" pattern takes effect when the [KEY PATT] button has been pressed. pp When in 4K mode, only WIPE 1 and WIPE 2 are available. The other patterns are available with the optional 4K DVE unit
(AV-UHS5M5).
35

Basic operations

Selecting the wipe direction
Operate the wipe direction selector buttons to select the wipe direction for the background transition. (The key transitions are set by the menu. The direction which is set here will not be reflected.) See "Key transitions".

N/R

When the [R] indicator is off: Wiping proceeds in the normal direction.
When the [R] indicator is lit: Wiping proceeds in the reverse direction.
When the [N/R] indicator is lit: The normal direction is replaced with the reverse direction (or vice versa) when the transition is completed. (The lit and extinguished statuses of the [R] button are also switched in line with the direction of the wiping.)

Wipe decorations (border, soft effect)
A border effect or soft effect can be added to the wiping of background transitions.

Setting the border and soft effect

1 Press the

BKGD CBGD

button to light its indicator, and display

the Background menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Border sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to set On (or Off) for the border using the Border item.
4 Use [F3] to set the width of the border using the Width item.
5 Use [F4] to set the amount of soft effect using the Soft item. When "On" has been selected as the Border item setting, the ratio of the soft effect to the border width is indicated as the amount of soft effect. When only the soft effect is to be added to wipe, select "Off" as the Border item setting.
Setting the border color
1 On the Background menu, use [F1] to display the Border Color sub menu.

2 Use [F2], [F3] and [F4] to adjust the Hue, Sat and Lum of the border color.
w To call the preset color Use [F5] to select the preset color using the Load item, and press the [F5]. p When [F5] is pressed, what has been set so far is
canceled and replaced with the preset color values. p To save the values that were set before calling the preset
color, refer to "Memory".

Basic operations

Setting the wipe start position

Wipe start can be set at any desired position.
Target patterns: WIPE1: 5 WIPE2: 4, 5, 6, 7 SQ1: 5 SQ2: 4, 5, 6, 7

The WIPE pattern is set using the Position sub menu of the Background menu (or Key menu).

1 Press the

BKGD CBGD

button (or

KEY1 CKEY

button) to light its

indicator, and display the Background menu (or Key

menu).

2 Use [F1] to display the Position sub menu.

Modifying wipe
Setting the 3D (page turning) effect
A lighting effect can be added to a wipe pattern. Alternatively, the page turning effect parameter can be set. These effects can be set for background transitions and key transitions.
Target patterns: 3D1: 1, 3, 7, 9

1 Press the

BKGD CBGD

button (or

KEY1 CKEY

button) to light its

indicator, and display the Background menu (or Key

menu).

2 Use [F1] to display the 3D Modify sub menu.

3 Either operate the positioners or use [F2] and [F3] to set the wipe start position using the X-Pos item and Y-Pos item. This setting is possible only if the target pattern has been selected for the background or key pattern.
4 Either operate the fader lever or press the [AUTO] button to check the wipe operation. (When, for instance, 50 has been set for X-Pos and 50 for Y-Pos, the following screen (or key) appears from the bottom left and wipe is performed while the screen (or key) moves to the screen center.)
<X-Pos, Y-Pos setting range>

3 Use [F2] to select whether the lighting effect is to be added using the Light item.

The lighting effect is added.

Off

The lighting effect is not added.

4 Use [F3] to set the size when images have been reduced using the Size item.
5 Use [F4] to set the radius of the page turning effect using the Radius item.
6 Use [F5] to set the direction of the page turning effect using the Angle item.

Inside screen area Outside screen area
5 To copy the start position setting, press [F5] (Copy To Key1 or Copy To BKGD). The background setting is copied to the key setting while the key setting is copied to the background setting.

Basic operations

Setting the trimming

The trimming at the time a background transition is executed can be set.
Target patterns: SQ1, SQ2, SL, 3D1, 3D2

1 Press the

BKGD CBGD

button (or

KEY1 CKEY

button) to light its

indicator, and display the Background menu (or Key

menu).

2 Use [F1] to display the Modify sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to set the trimming operation and transition operation using the Trim item.

Off 16:9
4:3
4:3 Smooth

No trimming
For trimming the edges around the material. This setting is used when a black border, for instance, can be seen around the material.
For trimming using the 4:3 aspect ratio and releasing the trimming when the transition is completed.
For trimming using the 4:3 aspect ratio and executing the transition to 16:9 images smoothly.

Setting the latency

A delay amount can be set for the background image or key image.

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display

the Config menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Latency sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to set the delay amount for the background image using the BKGD item. Alternatively, use [F3] to set the delay amount for the key image using the Key item. However, only Minimum is available when in the 4K mode.

1F Fix Minimum

The image is delayed by one frame (1F). p There will be no original image remaining
when wipe is completed (when SQ1, SQ2, SL, 3D1 or 3D2 has been selected as the wipe pattern).
The image is not delayed. p However, the image will be delayed by one
frame (1F) when SQ1, SQ2, SL, 3D1 or 3D2 has been selected as the wipe pattern or when the flying key has been selected.

w BKGD items

Delay amount At times other than

setting

during transitions

Minimum

No delay

1F Fix

1F delay

MIX/WIPE
No delay 1F delay

SQ/SL/3D
1F delay 1F delay

w Key items

Delay amount At times other than

setting

during transitions

Minimum

No delay

1F Fix

1F delay

MIX/WIPE
No delay 1F delay

SQ/SL/3D/ Flying key 1F delay 1F delay

Basic operations

Creating an animated wipe

You can create an animated wipe by linking a video (CLIP) registered in the video memory and an ME transition.

1 Press the

BKGD CBGD

button to light its indicator, and display

the Background menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Transition Time sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to set the BKGD transition time in the Trans Time item.
4 Use [F3] to set the time to wait before starting the BKGD transition time in the WaitTime item. Press [F4] to enable/disable the WaitTime. The WaitTime is disabled if the settings is Off, irrespective of the WaitTime setting.
5 Use [F1] to display the Transition Margin sub menu.

6 Press [F2] to enable/disable the function for adjusting BKGD AUTO transition start/end margin in the Margin item.
7 Use [F3] to adjust the BKGD AUTO transition start margin in the Start item. The End setting is automatically adjusted if the total when added with the End setting exceeds 10.0.
8 Use [F4] to adjust the BKGD AUTO transition end point margin in the End item. The Start setting is automatically adjusted if the total when added with the Start setting exceeds 10.0.
9 Use [F1] to display the Clip Trans Sync sub menu.

Key
This operation combines the background image with another image. The key definition can be adjusted, and an edge can be added to the combined image. Key1, Key2, Key3, DSK1 (downstream key), and DSK2 are available as materials to compose the background images. The default settings for priority (image positioning) are as shown in the figure below.
<Priority default settings> Background image
Key1 Key2 Key3 DSK1 DSK2
You can change the prioritization for Key1, Key2, and Key3, and the prioritization for DSK1 and DSK2. Refer to "Setting the priority". How key combinations work is shown in the figure below. <How key composition works>
Background
UHS500

Use [F2] to set the Clip1 trigger in the Clip1 item.
Triggers can be assigned to the following buttons: AUTO, KEY1 ON, KEY2 ON, KEY3 ON, DSK1 ON, DSK2 ON, FTB ON, Fader Also use [F3] to set the Clip2 trigger in the Clip2 item. However, only Clip1 is displayed when in the 4K mode.

Invert Key source
UHS500

Output image

Key fill

Basic operations

Selecting the key type

1 Press the

KEY1 CKEY

button to light its indicator, and display

the Key menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Key sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to select the Type item.

Lum (luminance key/ self key)

This is for creating the key signals from the luminance component or luminance and chroma component of the key fill signal.

Linear (linear key/ EXT key)

This is for creating the key signals from the luminance component of the key source signal. It is used when the key source signal and key fill signal are different.

Chroma (chroma key/ self key)

This is for creating the key signals using a specific hue of the key fill signal as the reference.

Full

This is for creating the key signals using

(full key/self key) the images on the full screen as the key

source signals.

PinP combinations are possible in

conjunction with the flying key.

See "Flying key".

Since the luminance and chroma keys are operated as self keys, the key fill signals are used as the key source signals. For the full key, the images on the full screen are used as the key source signals. When the luminance key, chroma key or full key has been selected as the key type, the key signals will remain unchanged even when the key source signals are switched.

When using the linear key, use material with a black background and white characters or shape to be combined by the key as the key source signal. Material which is not black and white may not be combined clearly. Material with a white background and black characters, etc. can be reversed using the key invert function for use.

4 When the luminance key has been selected, the chroma component can be included in the generation of the key signals in view of the self key application. (This does not apply to the linear key.) Use [F3], and select the setting using the Lum Key item.

Chroma On Chroma Off

In addition to the luminance component, the chroma component is also taken into account in the generation of the key signals. This is the setting for using a color with a low luminance component for the key signals (such as when defining blue characters).
The key signals are generated from only the luminance component.

5 Use [F4] to select the fill type using the Fill item.

Bus Matte

The bus signal is used for the key fill signal.
The internal fill matte is used for the key fill signal.

Basic operations

Selecting the key material

Selecting the key fill and key source signals

Press the [KEY] button in the AUX bus selection area, and switch the selection of the key fill signal (indicator lights in amber) and key source signal (indicator lights in green).

<Selecting the key fill signal> With the indicator of the [KEY] button lit in amber, press one of the AUX bus crosspoint buttons 1 to 12 to select the key fill signal. The indicator of the selected AUX bus crosspoint button lights in amber. (It will light in red if the selected signal is being output from the PGM connector.)

KEY1 F/S AUX

KEY2 F/S

KEY3 F/S

DSK1 F/S

AMBER : FILL / GREEN : SOURCE

DSK2 F/S

AUX1

AUX BUS DELEGATION

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

DISP CAM

MV1

PGM

MV2

PVW

AUX /DISP SOURCE

SHIFT

Lighting in amber

<Selecting the key source signal> With the indicator of the [KEY] button lit in green, press one of the AUX bus crosspoint buttons 1 to 12 to select the key source signal. The indicator of the selected AUX bus crosspoint button lights in green. (It will light in red if the selected signal is being output from the PGM connector.) Since the luminance and chroma keys are operated as self keys, the key fill signals are used as the key source signals. When the luminance key or chroma key has been selected as the key type, the key signals will remain unchanged even when the key source signals are switched.

KEY1 F/S

KEY2 F/S

KEY3 F/S

DSK1 F/S

DSK2 F/S

AUX1

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

DISP CAM

AMBER : FILL / GREEN : SOURCE AUX BUS DELEGATION

AUX

MV1

PGM

MV2

PVW

AUX /DISP SOURCE

SHIFT

Lighting in green

Linking the key fill signal and key source signal selection
1 Press the KEY button to be used to display the menu. (KEY1/KEY2/KEY3)
2 Use [F1] to display the Key Signal Coupling sub menu and set Independent.

3 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display

the Config menu.

4 Use [F1] to display the Key Signal Coupling1 sub menu and set Fill/Source.

5 Use [F1] to display the Key Signal Coupling2 to 8 sub menu.
p If Key Signal Coupling1 is Fill to Source, select what to use as the Source for the Fill.
p Alternatively, if it is Source to Fill, select what to use as the Fill for the selected Source.

<Independent> When the [KEY] button lights in amber, the key fill signal can be selected, and when it lights in green, the key source signal can be selected.

Independent

If Fill to Source, you can independently set

a Source that is linked to Fill and separate

from other KEYs.

If Source to Fill, you can independently set

a Fill that is linked to Source and separate

from other KEYs.

OFF

Settings accord with Key Signal Coupling2 to 8.

Basic operations

<Fill To Source> When the key fill signal is selected, the key source signal also switches automatically. Initially, the key source signal and the key fill signal will be the same signal. For example, when "SDI1" is selected for the key fill signal, the key source signal also becomes "SDI1". After that, when the [KEY] button is pressed and lights in green, "SDI2" is selected for the key source signal. At this time, combination data indicating that the key fill signal is "SDI1" and the key source signal is "SDI2" is recorded on the unit. After the key fill signal and key source signal have been switched to other signals to perform another operation, if the key fill signal is then selected and set to "SDI1", the saved combination data causes the key source signal to automatically switch to "SDI2". If the key source signal is changed while the key fill signal is set to "SDI1", the combination data is updated to reflect the change, and is recorded on the unit.
<Source To Fill> When the key source signal is selected, the key fill signal switches automatically. (The [KEY] button first lights amber.)
The initial values for the key source signal and the key fill signal are the same.

Setting the fill matte color

1 Press the

KEY1 CKEY

button to light its indicator, and display

the Key menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Fill Matte sub menu.

3 Use [F2], [F3] and [F4] to adjust the Hue, Sat and Lum of the fill matte.
w To call the preset color Use [F5] to select the preset color using the Load item, and press the [F5]. p When [F5] is pressed, what has been set so far is
canceled and replaced with the preset color values. p To save the values that were set before calling the preset
color, refer to "Memory".

Key transitions
1 Select the transition mode. Press the [KEY] button in the transition area to light its indicator. To execute a background transition and key transition at the same time, press the [BKGD] button and [KEY] button together to turn on both indicators.

MACRO

BKGD MIX WIPE
MIX

KEY MIX WIPE
WIPE

N/R

WIPE DIRECTION

FTB ON

KEY1 ON

KEY2 ON

KEY3 ON

DSK1 ON

CUT

AUTO

DSK2 ON

2 Select the transition type.
Use the [MIX] button or [WIPE] button in the transition
area to select the key transition mode.
The selected button lights in amber, and the MIX or
WIPE status indicator LED depending on the selected mode lights. If WIPE has been selected, press the [KEY PATT] button in the memory/wipe pattern/number key area to light its indicator, and select the wipe pattern.

7 NEW STILL 1

8 COPY STILL 2

9 PASTE TRIM IN

4 INS CLIP 1

5 DEL CLIP 2

6 MOD TRIM OUT

REV

0/10

UNDO

TRIM OFF

MEMORY / WIPE PATTERN / 10 KEY

XPT DSBL REC -/+ PAGE STOP
TAKE ENTER
PLAY

BKGD PATT KEY PATT VMEM CAM CONT

3 Set the time of the transition. On the Time menu, use [F1] to display the Key sub menu. As with a background transition, set the transition time.

Basic operations

1 Set the wipe direction. On the Key menu, use [F1] to display the Transition sub menu. Use [F1] to set "Normal" or "Reverse" using the Keyout Pattern item.

Normal Reverse

The key out pattern moves in the same direction as the key in pattern. The key out pattern moves in the opposite direction from the key in pattern.

Key in

Pattern example 1

Pattern example 2 SQ

Pattern example 3 p WIPE1: 5 p WIPE2: 1 to 7

Pattern example 4 p SQ1: 5 p SQ2: 1, 2, 4 to 7 p 3D1: 5 p 3D2: 1 to 3
SQ

Key out

(Normal)

Key out

(Reverse)

: This indicates the areas where keys are combined.
p The operations for pattern example 3 are performed for the "WIPE1: 5" and "WIPE2: 1 to 7" patterns. p The operations for pattern example 4 are performed for the "SQ1: 5", "SQ2: 1, 2, 4 to 7", "3D1: 5" and "3D2: 1 to 3"
patterns. The same operations are performed for normal and reverse.
2 Execute the transition. Press the [AUTO] button in the transition area to automatically execute the transition at the transition time that has been set. Alternatively, execute the transition manually by operating the fader lever.

Key auto transition
When the [KEY ON] button in the transition area is pressed, the transition is automatically executed at the transition time that has been set. During key in, the indicator of the [KEY ON] button blinks in red, and it lights in red when the transition is completed. If the [KEY ON] button is pressed with the picture completely keyed in, the Key image transition (key out) is executed. During key out, the indicator of the [KEY ON] button lights in red, and it goes off when the transition is completed. If the [KEY ON] button is pressed during the transition, the transition direction is reversed.

Basic operations

Key preview
Key preview images can be output to the preview output, and the keys can be adjusted and checked.
1 From the Key menus and the DSK menus, use [F1] to display the Key1/Key2/Key3/DSK1/DSK2 menus.
Key1 menu
Key2/Key3/DSK1/DSK2 menu

Linking of Menus
The PVW settings of Key2, Key3, DSK1, and DSK2 are linked as shown below. Key1, which can be set so that it can be operated with AUTO, CUT, and fader when the panel KEY button is ON, can be operated independently because it is different from the other Keys and DSKs.

PVW On
Key1 Off On
Key2 Off
On Key3
Off On DSK1 Off On DSK2 Off

Key1

Key2
Off Off Off

Key3 Off
Off Off

DSK1 Off Off
Off

DSK2 Off Off Off

Off: Setting is changed to forced Off. ---: No change

PVW images: When PVW is OFF:
The PGM status is displayed in the PVW. This is not reflected in the transition status, however.
When PVW is ON: When PVW is set to "On", the PGM images are displayed after the PVW. You can set PVW to "On" for only one of Key2, Key3, DSK1, or DSK2. Key1 is independent, so a maximum of 2 Keyers can be put on the PVW.
When PVW is Auto: PVW can be set to "Auto" only for Key1. When you press a KEY button in the transition area, the following two statuses are switched: · When the KEY button is lit, the operation is with PVW "On". · When the KEY button is off, the operation is with PVW "Off".
Background of the PVW: The BKGD image for PVW is modified by the PVW setting and the setting status of the BKGD and KEY buttons in the transition area. Basically there will be PGM images when either Key PVW or DSK PVW is "On". However, these will become PST when both the BKGD and KEY buttons in the transition area are "On".
When a user button to which the On/Off settings have been allocated is pressed, the setting is switched alternately between On (button indicator lights) and Off (button indicator extinguished), and the "Auto" setting is not selected. (The relevant user button items are KEY1_PVW/KEY2_PVW/ KEY3_PVW/DSK1_PVW/DSK2_PVW.)

Menu On Off Auto

User button Lights Extinguished Extinguished

When the user button is pressed Off: Extinguished On: Lights On: Lights

When "Auto" is selected using a menu operation, the user button indicator is turned off (extinguished).

Basic operations

Adjusting the luminance key and linear key

These steps are taken to adjust the luminance key and linear key definition.

1 Press the

KEY1 CKEY

button to light its indicator, and display

the Key menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Adjust sub menu.

w To execute the sampling manually This changes the manual adjustment mode to the sample mode.

1 Press the

KEY1 CKEY

button to light its indicator, and display

the Chroma Key menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Adjusting Mode sub menu.

3 Use [F2], [F3] and [F4] to adjust the key definition.

4 Use [F5] to set key invert. When "On" is selected, the key signals to be generated internally are inverted.

Operation/ Parameter
F2/ Clip
F3/ Gain
F4/ Density
F5/ Invert

Description of setting Reference level for generating key signals Key amplitude
Key density
Key signal inversion

Setting range 0.0 to 108.0 0.0 to 200.0 0.0 to 100.0 On, Off

Adjusting the chroma key
Sampling is executed for the selected key materials to adjust those aspects of the key that are to be compensated.

Step 1

w To execute the sampling automatically

1 Press the

KEY1 CKEY

button to light its indicator, and display

the Chroma Key menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Auto Compute sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to select Sample Mode. 4 Use [F1] to display the Sample sub menu.

5 Use [F2] to select "Composite" (composite image that combines the background image and key) using the View item.

6 Use [F3] to select "Select BG" using the Mode item.

Select BG

A color for the background of the foreground image is specified. Normally, either a blue or green background is specified.

7 Use the positioner to move the position of the sample marker. To change the size of the sample marker, turn the rotary encoder [Z].
8 If the sample area that has been set is acceptable, press the rotary encoder [Z]. The area that has been set is now sampled.
9 To return to the pre-sampling status after sampling has been executed, press [F5].

3 Press [F2] to execute the sampling automatically. To undo what has been sampled, press [F5].

Basic operations

Step 2
The objective of this step is to remove the noise in the background image. The noise is removed by carrying out this step several times.
1 On the Chroma Key menu, use [F1] to display the Sample sub menu.

Step 3
The objective of this step is to remove the noise in the foreground image. The noise is removed by carrying out this step several times.
1 Use [F2] to select "Matte" (Matte image) using the View item.

2 Use [F2] to select "Matte" (Matte image) using the View item.

3 Use [F3] to select "Clean BG" using the Mode item.

Clean BG

The noise in the background image is removed.

4 Using the positioner, move the position of the sample marker to the position of the noise (white dots) in the background image. To change the size of the sample marker, turn the rotary encoder [Z].
5 If the sample area that has been set is acceptable, press the rotary encoder [Z]. The noise in the area that has been set is now removed.
6 To return to the pre-sampling status after sampling has been executed, press [F5].

2 Use [F3] to select "Clean FG" using the Mode item.

Clean FG

The noise in the foreground image is removed.

3 Using the positioner, move the position of the sample marker to the position of the noise (black dots) in the foreground image. To change the size of the sample marker, turn the rotary encoder [Z].
4 If the sample area that has been set is acceptable, press the rotary encoder [Z]. The noise in the area that has been set is now removed.
5 To return to the pre-sampling status after sampling has been executed, press [F5].

Before the noise is removed

After the noise is removed

Before the noise is removed

After the noise is removed

Basic operations

Step 4

Step 5

After steps 1 to 3 have been carried out, noise will still remain in the detail areas such as the subject's hair as shown in the image below. Noise remaining in the detail areas is also removed in "step 4". If there are many areas with noise, the noise is removed by carrying out this step several times.

The objective of this step is to finely adjust the image by adjusting the noise and transparency, for example.
1 On the Chroma Key menu, use [F1] to display the Sample sub menu.

2 Use [F2] to select the image to be adjusted using the View item.

Composite
Matte Proc.FG FG

Composite image that combines the background image and key Matte image Process foreground image Foreground image

1 Use [F2] to select "Composite" (composite image that combines the background image and key) using the View item.

2 Use [F3] to select "Sponge" using the Mode item.

Sponge

The noise remaining in the detailed areas is removed.

3 Using the positioner, move the position of the sample marker to the position of the remaining noise. To change the size of the sample marker, turn the rotary encoder [Z].
4 If the sample area that has been set is acceptable, press the rotary encoder [Z]. The noise in the area that has been set is now removed, and the colors become more natural.
5 To return to the pre-sampling status after sampling has been executed, press [F5].
p Execute sampling in both the light and dark areas as the sample area.
p If the noise in the foreground image is not completely removed by carrying out the steps above, proceed with the FineTuning sub menu operation.

3 Use [F3] to select the adjustment function using the Mode item. For details on the items, refer to "[FineTuning]".
4 Using the positioner, move the position of the sample marker to the position to be sampled. To change the size of the sample marker, turn the rotary encoder [Z].
5 If the sample area that has been set is acceptable, press the rotary encoder [Z]. The area that has been set is now sampled.
6 To return to the condition of a step earlier after an adjustment has been made, press [F5].

Basic operations

[FineTuning] In this mode, detailed images can be adjusted.
1 On the Chroma Key menu, use [F1] to display the Sample sub menu.
2 Use [F2] to select "Composite" using the View item.
3 Use [F3] to select "FineTuning" using the Mode item.
4 Using the positioner, move the position of the sample marker to the position to be sampled. To change the size of the sample marker, turn the rotary encoder [Z].
5 If the sample area that has been set is acceptable, press the rotary encoder [Z].
6 On the Chroma Key menu, use [F1] to display the Fine Tuning sub menu.

Step 6
Finely adjust the chroma key signals which have been generated.
1 On the Chroma Key menu, use [F1] to display the Adjust sub menu.
2 Use [F2], and adjust the width of the chroma key signals using the Narrow item. The key signal width can be adjusted horizontally in 0.5 (half-pixel) increments.
3 Use [F3], and adjust the horizontal phase of the chroma key signals using the Phase item. The key signal position can be moved horizontally in 0.5 (half-pixel) increments.

7 Use [F2] to remove or restore the noise using the Spill item. Increase the value in the minus direction to remove a large amount of noise from the foreground image, and to make the image colors approach the complementary color (opposite color) of the blue screen. Increase the value in the plus direction to make the image colors approach the original foreground image.
8 By turning [F3] clockwise, the matte of the colors closely resembling the colors of the foreground image can be adjusted using the Trans item. This is useful when, for instance, areas covered with dark smoke or clouds in a foreground image are to be made semi-transparent.
9 By turning [F4] clockwise, the matte information for the colors closely resembling the colors of the background image can be adjusted using the Detail item. This is useful when, for instance, restoring the details of an image (such as an image with a subject who has loose hair or an image with smoke), which have been lost in the foreground image as a result of sampling, to what they were in the original image.

Basic operations
w When manually adjusting the 3 border surfaces This changes the manual adjustment mode to the Value mode. The Value mode is a mode that enables adjustment of the 3 border surfaces as whole by changing values. In the chroma key algorithm adopted by this unit, color signals are divided into 4 regions by polyhedra with 128 faces.
The color signal in the RGB space is split by 3 polyhedra with 128 faces

Region (1) Region (2)
Region (3) Region (4)

100% background Transparent or translucent parts such as glass or water Foreground with Spill removed 100% foreground

The below illustration is an overview of the Value mode.

Border surface

Region (1)
BG Clean

Region (2)

FG Trans

Region (3)

Region (4)

Key = 0
Completely removed

0 < Key < 1
Transparency

Key = 1
Opacity

Color Cancel

Color correction made

In the Value mode, each border surface can be adjusted with the following 3 parameters.

BG Clean

Border surface between regions (1) and (2)

By adjusting the values to the + side, the noise in the blue background can be reduced.

FG Trans

Border surface between regions (2) and (3)

By adjusting the values to the + side, the subject is made more transparent.

Color Cancel

Border surface between regions (3) and (4)

By adjusting the values to the + side, the color of the subject part is shifted to a deeper skin tone.

Basic operations

1 Press the

KEY1 CKEY

button to light its indicator, and display

the Chroma Key menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Adjusting Mode sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to select Value Mode.
4 Use [F1] to display the Value sub menu.
5 Use [F2] to adjust the border surfaces between regions (3) and (4) in the Color Cancel item. By adjusting the values to the + side, the color of the subject part is shifted to a deeper skin tone.
6 Use [F3] to adjust the border surfaces between regions (2) and (3) in the FG Trans item. By adjusting the values to the + side, the subject is made more transparent.
7 Use [F4] to adjust the border surfaces between regions (1) and (2) in the BG Clean item. By adjusting the values to the + side, the noise in the blue background can be reduced.

Basic operations

Key decorations
A border, shadow or other edge can be added to the key.

Setting the key edge

1 Press the

KEY1 CKEY

button to light its indicator, and display

the Key menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Edge1 sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to select the edge type.

Off Border Drop Shadow Outline

An edge is not added. A border is added around the entire edge. A diagonal border is added. A shadow is added. An outline (only a border with no fill) is added.

Border

Drop

Selecting the Edge Fill settings
Materials to be inserted as edges can be set.
1 On the Key menu, use [F1] to display the Edge2 sub menu.

2 Use [F2] to select the edge material using the Edge Fill items.

Color CBGD1 CBGD2 Still1 Still2 Clip1
Clip2

The color set using Edge Color is used.
The color background is used.
The still image video memory (Still1) is used. The still image video memory (Still2) is used. The moving image video memory (Clip1) is used. The moving image video memory (Clip2) is used.

p Still2 and Clip2 cannot be selected in 4K mode.

Setting the edge color

1 On the Key menu, use [F1] to display the Edge Color sub menu.

Shadow

Outline

4 Use [F3] to set the edge width. 5 Use [F4] to set the direction (in 45-degree increments)
in which "Drop" and "Shadow" will be added.
(Top)
180 225 270

(Left) 135

315 (Right)

(Bottom)

6 Use [F5] to set the darkness (Density) of the edges.

2 Use [F2], [F3] and [F4] to adjust the Hue, Sat and Lum of the edge color.
w To call the preset color Use [F5] to select the preset color using the Load item, and press the [F5]. p When [F5] is pressed, what has been set so far is
canceled and replaced with the preset color values. p To save the values that were set before calling the preset
color, refer to "Memory".

Basic operations

Masking the key signals

These steps are taken to mask the key signals using the mask signal of the box pattern.

1 Press the

KEY1 CKEY

button to light its indicator, and display

the Key menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Mask sub menu.

3 Use [F2], and select the masking method using the Mask item.

Off Manual
4:3

The key signals are not masked.
The area that is set using the Mask Adjust sub menu is masked.
The signals are masked to the 4:3 aspect ratio.

4 Use [F3] to set whether to invert the mask signal using the Invert item.

The mask signal is inverted.

Off

The mask signal is not inverted.

5 Use [F1] to display the Mask Adjust sub menu.

6 Use [F2] to [F5] to set the area to be masked.

Operation/ Parameter
F2/ Left
F3/ Top
F4/ Bottom
F5/ Right

Description of setting
Key left position
Key top position
Key bottom position
Key right position

Setting range/ Initial value
-50.00 to 50.00/ -25.00
-50.00 to 50.00/ 25.00
-50.00 to 50.00/ -25.00
-50.00 to 50.00/ 25.00

The Left setting cannot exceed the Right setting (and vice versa) and, similarly, the Top setting cannot exceed the Bottom setting (and vice versa).

<Key mask setting> (figure shows the default values)

Video signal range

Flying key

Using DVE effects, this key enables the key signals that have been input to be moved, expanded or contracted. In order for the flying key to take effect, select "SQ2: 8" as the key transition. Refer to "Selecting the wipe pattern".

When the key transition is executed, the keys are combined by the key signals set using the flying key menu. (The transition effect is fixed at MIX.) Since the flying key uses DVE effects, the image is delayed by one frame.

ABC

Key signal

When combined using the flying key

In order to add the edge of the key before the DVE effect, the thickness of the edge is also changed when the size is changed.

Adjusting position and size

1 Press the

KEY1 CKEY

button to light its indicator, and display

the Key menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Flying Key Position/Size sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to set the X coordinate of the key signal using the X-Pos item.
4 Use [F3] to set the Y coordinate of the key signal using the Y-Pos item.
5 Use [F4] to set the key signal change size (max. 400: 400%) using the Size item.

Area where the key signal is effective Area masked

50
TOP (25)
0 BOTTOM (-25)
-50 -50 (-25) LEFT

0 (25) 50 RIGHT

Basic operations

Adjusting rotation

1 Press the

KEY1 CKEY

button to light its indicator, and display

the Key menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Flying Key Rotation sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to set the X rotation of the key signal in the X item.
4 Use [F3] to set the Y rotation of the key signal in the Y item.
5 Use [F4] to set the Z rotation of the key signal in the Z item.

Adjusting aspect ratio

1 Press the

KEY1 CKEY

button to light its indicator, and display

the Key menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Flying Key Aspect sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to set the horizontal ratio of the key signal in the X item.
4 Use [F3] to set the vertical ratio of the key signal in the Y item.

PinP combinations using the flying key
When "Full" is selected using the Type item in "Selecting the key type", PinP combinations can be performed using the flying key. (At this point in time, the Clip item and Gain item cannot be set on the Adjust sub menu.)
With the full key, the image on the full screen serves as the key source signal so an edge will not be added unless a further step is taken. To add an edge, mask the key signals so that the key source signals are made smaller than the entire screen. For details on masking, refer to "Masking the key signals".

Setting the priority

The relative positions of the images when Key1, Key2 and Key3 images are to be superimposed onto one another can be set.

1 Press the

KEY1 CKEY

button (or

KEY2 KEY3

button) to light its

indicator, and display the Key menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Key Priority sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to [F4] to set the relative positions using the 3rd item, 2nd item and 1st item.

1st

This is used to set the image to be placed at

the top.

2nd

This is used to set the image to be placed in

the middle.

3rd

This is used to set the image to be placed at

the bottom.

3rd: Key1

2nd: Key2

1st: Key3

Basic operations

PinP (picture in picture)
Another image can be combined with the background image. This unit supports PinP for 2 channels, DSK and Key.
Selecting the PinP channel and material
In 2K mode or HD mode: Press the [Key2] button among the AUX bus selector buttons. In 4K mode or when there is no 4K DVE unit: Press the [Key1] button among the AUX bus selector buttons.
When the [Key2] button (or [Key1] button) is lit, the PinP menu is displayed on the built-in display. The state in which the PinP materials are selected is now established for the AUX bus crosspoint buttons.
The selected AUX bus crosspoint button lights in amber. (It will light in red if the selected signal is a PGM output signal.)

KEY1 F/S

KEY2 F/S

KEY3 F/S

DSK1 F/S

DSK2 F/S

AUX1

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

DISP CAM

AMBER : FILL / GREEN : SOURCE AUX BUS DELEGATION

AUX

MV1

PGM

MV2

PVW

AUX /DISP SOURCE

SHIFT

Selecting Shape
Square, Circle, Heart, Flower or Star can be selected as the shape used for combining PinP images.
1 Press the [Key2] button (2K/HD mode) or [Key1] button (in 4K mode or when there is no 4K DVE unit) to light the button and display the PinP menu.
2 Use [F1] to display the PinP sub menu.

3 Use [F4] and, using the Shape item, select the shape used for combining images.
4 Use [F5] to adjust the transmissivity (darkness) applying when the images are combined using the Density item.

Full Key On/Off

1 In the PinP sub menu, use [F3] to enable (On)/disable (Off) Full Key.

Irrespective of the values set with the Key

sub menu, PinP images are composed with

Full Key.

Off

PinP images are composed according to the

values set with the Key sub menu.

Basic operations

PinP adjustments
Adjusting the PinP position and size
While the PinP menu is selected, adjust the X and Y coordinates using the positioner in the positioner area, and adjust the size using the rotary encoder [Z]. Alternatively, the settings can be performed on the menus.
1 Press the [Key2] button (2K/HD mode) or [Key1] button (in 4K mode or when there is no 4K DVE unit) to light the button and display the PinP menu.
2 Use [F1] to display the PinP Position sub menu.

Linking Key PinP and DSK PinP
The Key PinP and DSK PinP images perform a symmetrical operation for the axis whose coordinates and rotation angle have been set. The image serving as the reference is the PinP image of the menu being operated.
Linking Key PinP and DSK PinP
1 Press the [Key2] button (2K/HD mode) or [Key1] button (in 4K mode or when there is no 4K DVE unit) to light the button and display the PinP menu.
2 Use [F1] to display the PinP Sync sub menu.

3 Either operate the positioner and the rotary encoder [Z] or use [F2], [F3] and [F4] to set the X and Y coordinates and the size using the X-Pos, Y-Pos and Size items.

3 Use [F2] to select the position that will serve as the reference using the Sync item. The image serving as the reference is the PinP image of the menu being operated.
When "X" has been selected as the Symmetry setting
The coordinates and rotation angle are made symmetrical to the X axis.

When "Y" has been selected as the Symmetry setting
The coordinates and rotation angle are made symmetrical to the Y axis.

Basic operations
When "Center" has been selected as the Symmetry setting The coordinates and rotation angle are made symmetrical to the center.

PinP decorations
A border or soft effect can be added to PinP.
1 Press the [Key2] button (2K/HD mode) or [Key1] button (in 4K mode or when there is no 4K DVE unit) to light the button and display the PinP menu.
2 Use [F1] to display the PinP Border sub menu.

When "Same" has been selected as the Symmetry setting The coordinates are the same.
Copying the settings
The Key PinP settings can be copied to DSK PinP and, similarly, the DSK PinP settings can be copied to Key PinP.
1 On the PinP menu, use [F1] to display the PinP Sync sub menu.
2 Use [F2] to select "Off" using the Sync item. 3 When [F5] is pressed, the Key PinP (or DSK PinP)
settings are copied and set in DSK PinP (or Key PinP). Note The following settings are not copied. p PinP Trim sub menu items p PinP sub menu items

3 Use [F2] to set On (or Off) for the border using the Border item.

4 Use [F3] to set the width of the border using the Width item.

5 Use [F4] to set the amount of soft effect using the Soft item. The soft effect is OFF if 0.0 is set. When "On" has been selected as the Border item setting, the ratio of the soft effect to the border width is indicated as the amount of soft effect. When only the soft effect is to be added to PinP, select "Off" as the Border item setting.

6 Use [F5] to set the change in the border width using the Mode item.

Fix Variable

The border width is kept constant.
The border width changes to suit the PinP size.

Setting the border color
1 On the PinP menu, use [F1] to display the PinP Border Color sub menu.

Basic operations
Trimming settings
1 Press the [Key2] button (2K/HD mode) or [Key1] button (in 4K mode or when there is no 4K DVE unit) to light the button and display the PinP menu.
2 Use [F1] to display the Trim sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to set the trimming On/Off in the Trim item.

Trimming is performed.

Off

No trimming

4 Use [F3] to select the trimming type.

16:9 12:9 9:9

Automatic trimming so that the aspect ratio is 16:9.
Automatic trimming so that the aspect ratio is 12:9.
Automatic trimming so that the aspect ratio is 9:9.

7:9

Automatic trimming so that the aspect ratio

is 7:9.

6:9

Automatic trimming so that the aspect ratio

is 6:9.

Manual

Trimming using the value set on the Trim sub menu.

5 Use [F3] to set the Pair On/Off in the Pair item.

The settings are changed in such a way that

the Left and Right trimming amounts and the

Top and Bottom trimming amounts are the

same.

(This makes for a top-bottom and left-right

symmetry.)

Off

Pair settings not made.

6 Use [F1] to display the PinP Trim Adjust sub menu, and use [F2], [F3], [F4] and [F5] to set the trimming values.

Operation/ Parameter
F2/ Left
F3/ Top
F4/ Bottom
F5/ Right

Description of setting
Trimming value at left
Trimming value at top
Trimming value at bottom
Trimming value at right

Setting range/ Initial value
-50.00 to 50.00/ -50.00
-50.00 to 50.00/ 50.00
-50.00 to 50.00/ -50.00
-50.00 to 50.00/ 50.00

<Trimming settings> (figure shows the default values) Area trimmed Area where PinP is effective
Original size of PinP

TOP (50) 60

BOTTOM (-50) -60

-60

(-50) LEFT

(50) RIGHT

Basic operations
DSK (downstream key)
Characters or other images can be combined with the background image. There are 2 types of DSK; DSK1 and DSK2.
Selecting the DSK type

1 Press the

DSK1 DSK2

button to light its indicator, and display

the DSK menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the DSK sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to select the Type item.
DSK1: There are 4 options; Lum, Linear, Chroma, and Full. DSK2: There are 3 options; Lum, Linear, and Full.

Lum (luminance key/ self key) Linear (linear key/ EXT key)
Chroma (chroma key/ self key) Full (full key/ self key)

This is for creating the key signals from the luminance component of the key fill signal. This is for creating the key signals from the luminance component of the key source signal. It is used when the key source signal and key fill signal are different. This is for creating the key signals based on a particular hue of the key fill signal.
This is for creating the key signals using the images on the full screen as the key source signal.

Since the luminance key is operated as a self key, the key fill signals are used as the key source signals. When the luminance key has been selected as the downstream key type, the key signals will remain unchanged even when the key source signals are switched.
When using the linear key, use material with a black background and white characters or shape to be combined by the key as the key source signal. Material which is not black and white may not be combined clearly. Material with a white background and black characters, etc. can be reversed using the key invert function for use.

4 When the luminance key has been selected, the chroma components can be contained in the key signals generated in view of the fact that it is used as a self key. (This is not applied to the linear key.) Use [F3] to select the setting using the Lum Key item.

Chroma On Chroma Off

In addition to the luminance components, the chroma components are also factored in when generating the key signals. Use this setting if colors with low luminance components are used for the key signals (when, for instance, blue characters are to be removed).
The key signals are generated only from the luminance components.

5 Use [F4] to select the fill type using the Fill item.

Bus Matte

The bus signal is used for the key fill signal.
The internal fill matte is used for the key fill signal.

Setting the fill matte color
1 On the DSK menu, use [F1] to display the Fill Matte sub menu.

2 Use [F2], [F3] and [F4] to adjust the Hue, Sat and Lum of the fill matte.
w To call the preset color Use [F5] to select the preset color using the Load item, and press the [F5]. p When [F5] is pressed, what has been set so far is
canceled and replaced with the preset color values. p To save the values that were set before calling the preset
color, refer to "Memory".

Basic operations

Selecting the DSK material

Selecting the DSK fill signal and DSK source signal
Press the [DSK] button in the AUX bus selection area to switch the selection of the DSK fill signal (indicator lights in amber) and DSK source signal (indicator lights in green).

<Selecting the DSK fill signal>
While the indicator of the [DSK] button is lit in amber, press one of the AUX bus crosspoint buttons 1 to 12 to select the DSK fill signal. The indicator of the selected AUX bus crosspoint button lights in amber. (It lights in red if the selected signal is being output from the PGM connector.)

KEY1 F/S

KEY2 F/S

KEY3 F/S

DSK1 F/S

DSK2 F/S

AUX1

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

DISP CAM

AMBER : FILL / GREEN : SOURCE AUX BUS DELEGATION

AUX

MV1

PGM

MV2

PVW

AUX /DISP SOURCE

SHIFT

Lighting in amber

<Selecting the DSK source signal>
While the indicator of the [DSK] button is lit in green, press one of the AUX bus crosspoint buttons 1 to 12 to select the DSK source signal. The indicator of the selected AUX bus crosspoint button lights in green. (It lights in red if the selected signal is being output from the PGM connector.) Since the luminance key is operated as a self key, the key fill signals are used as the key source signals. When the luminance key has been selected as the downstream key type, the key signals will remain unchanged even when the key source signals are switched.

KEY1 F/S

KEY2 F/S

KEY3 F/S

DSK1 F/S

DSK2 F/S

AUX1

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

DISP CAM

AMBER : FILL / GREEN : SOURCE AUX BUS DELEGATION

AUX

MV1

PGM

MV2

PVW

AUX /DISP SOURCE

SHIFT

Lighting in green

Linking the DSK fill signal and DSK source signal selection

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light it, and display the Config

menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Key Signal Coupling1 sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to select the linking method for the DSK fill signal and DSK source signal by using the Fill/Source item.
Fill To Source When the DSK fill signal is selected, the DSK source signal changes automatically.
Source To Fill When the DSK source signal is selected, the DSK fill signal changes automatically.
<Fill To Source> When the DSK fill signal is selected, the DSK source signal also switches automatically. Initially, the DSK source signal and the DSK fill signal will be the same signal. For example, when "SDI1" is selected for the DSK fill signal, the DSK source signal also becomes "SDI1". After that, when the [DSK] button is pressed and lights in green, "SDI2" is selected for the DSK source signal. At this time, combination data indicating that the DSK fill signal is "SDI1" and the DSK source signal is "SDI2" is recorded on the unit. After the DSK fill signal and DSK source signal have been switched to other signals to perform another operation, if the DSK fill signal is then selected and set to "SDI1", the saved combination data causes the DSK source signal to automatically switch to "SDI2". If the DSK source signal is changed while the DSK fill signal is set to "SDI1", the combination data is updated to reflect the change, and is recorded on the unit.
<Source To Fill> When the DSK source signal is selected, the DSK fill signal switches automatically. However, be aware that if the [DSK] button is pressed when it is not lit, the [DSK] button will first light green, and the mode will be that for selecting the DSK source signal.

Basic operations

The recorded combination information can be set from combinations of Coupling1 to 8 in the Key Signal Coupling sub menu.
The initial values for the DSK source signal and the DSK fill signal are the same. Independently set the selection for the DSK fill signal and the DSK source signal 1 From the DSK menu, use [F1] to display the DSK Signal
Coupling sub menu.
2 Use [F2] to set On/Off in the Independent item. <Independent> When the [DSK] button lights in amber, the DSK fill signal can be selected, and when it lights in green, the DSK source signal can be selected.

DSK transitions

1 Set the transition time.

Press the

TIME CAM

button to light its indicator, and display

the Time menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the DSK sub menu. As with background transitions, set the transition time. Refer to "Auto transition".

3 When the [DSK1 ON] or [DSK2 ON] button in the transition area is pressed, the DSK image is combined (fades in) for the length of the transition time that has been set.
During fade-in, the [DSK1 ON] or [DSK2 ON] button blinks in red, and when the transition (fades in) is completed, it lights in red. When the [DSK1 ON] or [DSK2 ON] button is pressed after fade-in is completed, the DSK image transitions (fades out). During fade-out, the [DSK1 ON] or [DSK2 ON] button lights in red, and when the transition (fades out) is completed, it goes off. If the [DSK1 ON] or [DSK2 ON] button is pressed at any point during a transition, the direction of the transition is reversed.

Basic operations

DSK preview
Select whether to output the DSK preview image to the preview output.

1 Press the

DSK1 DSK2

button to light its indicator, and display

the DSK menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the DSK sub menu.

DSK adjustments

The DSK definition can be adjusted.

1 Press the

DSK1 DSK2

button to light its indicator, and display

the DSK menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Adjust sub menu.

3 Use [F5] to set the PVW item.

An image with the DSK effect added is output

to the preview output.

Off

An image without the DSK effect added is

output to the preview output.

The PVW On and Off settings can be allocated to the user buttons.
Refer to "Setting the user buttons".

3 Use [F2], [F3] and [F4] to adjust the DSK (downstream key) definition.

4 Use [F5] to set key invert. If "On" is set, the key signals generated internally are inverted.

Operation/ Parameter
F2/ Clip
F3/ Gain
F4/ Density
F5/ Invert

Description of setting Reference level for generating key signals Key amplitude
Key density
Key signal inversion

Setting range 0.0 to 108.0 0.0 to 200.0 0.0 to 100.0 On, Off

Basic operations

Masking the DSK signals

These steps are taken to mask the DSK signals using the mask signal of the box pattern.

1 Press the

DSK1 DSK2

button to light its indicator, and display

the DSK menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Mask sub menu.

3 Use [F2], and select the masking method using the Mask item.

Off Manual
4:3

The DSK signals are not masked.
The area that is set using the Mask Adjust sub menu is masked.
The signals are masked to the 4:3 aspect ratio.

4 Use [F3] to set whether to invert the mask signal using the Invert item.

The mask signal is inverted.

Off

The mask signal is not inverted.

5 Use [F1] to display the Mask Adjust sub menu.

<DSK mask setting> (figure shows the default values) Video signal range

Area where the DSK signal is effective Area masked

50
TOP (25)
0 BOTTOM (-25)
-50 -50 (-25) LEFT

0 (25) 50 RIGHT

6 Use [F2] to [F5] to set the area to be masked.

Operation/ Parameter
F2/ Left
F3/ Top
F4/ Bottom
F5/ Right

Description of Setting range/ Initial

setting

value

DSK left position

50.00 to 50.00/ 25.00

DSK top position

50.00 to 50.00/ 25.00

DSK bottom position

50.00 to 50.00/ 25.00

DSK right position

50.00 to 50.00/ 25.00

The Left setting cannot exceed the Right setting (and vice versa) and, similarly, the Top setting cannot exceed the Bottom setting (and vice versa).

Basic operations

Key Link

FTB (Fade to Black)

Key1, Key2, and Key3 and DSK1 and DSK2 can be linked in Group1 to 4.
This function makes it possible to link the "On" or "Off" setting of the [DSK ON] button (DSK1 ON, DSK2 ON) and [KEY ON] buttons ([KEY1 ON], [KEY2 ON] and [KEY3 ON]) with the "On" or "Off" (button indicator lights or off) of the [KEY ON] button.

MACRO

BKGD MIX WIPE
MIX

KEY MIX WIPE
WIPE

CUT

AUTO

N/R

WIPE DIRECTION

FTB ON

KEY1 ON

KEY2 ON

KEY3 ON

DSK1 ON

DSK2 ON

The user can fade out from a program image to the black screen/white screen/Still/Clip/color background screen or fade in to a program image from a black screen/white screen/Still/ Clip/color background.

1 Set the duration of the transition.

Press the

TIME CAM

button to light its indicator, and display

the Time menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the FTB sub menu. As with a background transition, set the transition time. Refer to "Auto transition".

MACRO

BKGD MIX WIPE
MIX

KEY MIX WIPE
WIPE

N/R

WIPE DIRECTION

FTB ON

KEY1 ON

KEY2 ON

KEY3 ON

DSK1 ON

1 Press the Config button to be used to display the menu. 2 Use [F1] to display the Key/DSK Link1 or 2 sub menu,
then use Group1 to 4 to set the button linked to each of the buttons. p There is no linking if OFF is selected. p The button color for each of the buttons is set in the Color Group KEY ON and Color Group DSK/FTB ON sub menus.
Example: When KEY1 of Key/DSK Link1 is set to Color Group 1, then whichever of the KEY2 ON/KEY3 ON/DSK1 ON/ DSK2 ON buttons is set to ON (illuminated), the KEY1 ON button will also be set to ON.

CUT

AUTO

DSK2 ON

3 The screen fades out to the setting screen at the set transition time when you press the [FTB ON] button in the transition area.
During fade-out, the indicator of the [FTB ON] button blinks in red, and it lights in red when the transition (fade-out) is completed, and the black screen is displayed.* When the [FTB ON] button is pressed with the black screen displayed, fade-in to the program image is initiated. During fade-in, the indicator of the [FTB ON] button lights in red, and it goes off when the transition (fade-in) is completed. If the [FTB ON] button is pressed at any point during a transition, the direction of the transition is reversed.
*: In the FTB status, the crosspoint button which is normally lit in red lights in amber.

Basic operations

Selecting the image

The image to be used for fading out can be selected.

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display

the Config menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Assign sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to select the image to appear when fading out using the FTB Source item.

Still1 Still2
Clip1
Clip2
CBGD1 CBGD2 White Black

The still image video memory (Still1) is used. The still image video memory (Still2) is used. pp Selectable only in 2K mode. The moving image video memory (Clip1) is used. The moving image video memory (Clip2) is used. pp Selectable only in 2K mode.
The color background is used.
White background Black background

Internal color signals
This unit supports two sets of internal color signals.

Setting the color background
The color background to be used by the bus can be set. Two methods are available: under one method the Hue (hue), Sat (color saturation) and Lum (luminance) are set, and under the other the 8 preset colors (white, yellow, cyan, green, magenta, red, blue and black) are called. The Hue, Sat and Lum of the called colors can also be adjusted.

Adjusting the colors

1 Press the

BKGD CBGD

button to light its indicator, and display

the Color Background menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the CBGD1 Main sub menu (or CBGD2 Main sub menu).

3 Use [F2], [F3] and [F4] to perform the color adjustments (Hue, Sat and Lum).
w To call the preset color Use [F5] to select the preset color using the Load item, and press the [F5]. p When [F5] is pressed, what has been set so far is
canceled and replaced with the preset color values. p To save the values that were set before calling the preset
color, refer to "Memory".

Basic operations

Setting the Wash effect
The gradation effect for color backgrounds can be set. Selecting the Wash effect and setting the colors

Setting the Wash movements
1 On the Color Background menu, use [F1] to display the CBGD1 Move sub menu (or CBGD2 Move sub menu).

1 Press the

BKGD CBGD

button to light its indicator, and display

the Color Background menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the CBGD1 Wash sub menu (or CBGD2 Wash sub menu).

2 Use [F2] to set the gradation movement using the Move item.

Off Roll Rotation

No movement is set. The gradations are scrolled. The gradations are rotated.

3 Use [F2] to set the Wash (gradation) effect using the Wash item.

The gradation effect is added.

Off

The gradation effect is not added.

3 Use [F3] to set the movement speed using the Speed item.
Internal color bar signal

4 Use [F3] to set the color of the Wash (gradation) effect using the Color item.

Dual Rainbow

A dual-color gradation effect is added. (This results in a gradation of two colors, namely, the CBGD1 Main color and the CBGD1 Sub color.)
The rainbow color gradation effect is added.

5 When "Dual" has been selected, use [F1] to display the CBGD1 Sub sub menu (or CBGD2 Sub sub menu), and set the sub color.

The unit supports 1 internal color bar signal.

Test tone settings

The settings related to the test tone signals (1 kHz) output with color bar signals can be set.

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display

the System menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Test Tone sub menu.

6 Use [F2], [F3] and [F4] to adjust the colors (Hue, Sat and Lum).
Adjusting the Wash waveforms
1 On the Color Background menu, use [F1] to display the CBGD1 Wave sub menu (or CBGD2 Wave sub menu).

3 Use [F2] to set the test tone function in the Color Bar item.

Nomal Low Off

Test tones are output at the normal volume (12 dB).
Test tones are output at lower volume (20 dB).
Test tones are not output.

2 Use [F2] to select the gradation waveforms using the Pattern item.

Sine Saw

Sine waves are selected. Sawtooth waves are selected.

3 Use [F3] to select the gradation cycle using the Cycle item.
4 Use [F4] to select the gradation phase using the Phase item.
5 Use [F5] to select the gradation angle using the Angle item.

Basic operations

Switching the AUX output

Selecting the AUX output materials
The output signals of the AUX buses (AUX1 to AUX4) can be selected.
1 Press one of the [AUX1] to [AUX4] buttons among the AUX bus selector buttons. The selected button lights in amber.
2 Press one of the AUX bus crosspoint buttons. The selected signal is output to the pressed [AUX1] to [AUX4] button.

KEY1 F/S

KEY2 F/S

KEY3 F/S

DSK1 F/S

DSK2 F/S

AUX1

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

DISP CAM

AMBER : FILL / GREEN : SOURCE AUX BUS DELEGATION

AUX

MV1

PGM

MV2

PVW

AUX /DISP SOURCE

SHIFT

The button with the signals selected by AUX1 lights in amber.

Name of signal IN1, IN2 SDI IN3 to SDI IN8 IN-A1 to 4, IN B1 to 4 PGM PVW CLN MV1, MV2 KeyOut BLACK CBGD1, CBGD2 CBAR Still1, Still2
Clip1, Clip2

Description of signal
SDI/HDMI input signal 1, 2
SDI input signal 3 to 8
Option slot input signal (SDI, HDMI) Program video signal Preview video signal Clean signal Multi view display output signal 1, 2 Key output signal Black signal
Color background 1, 2
Color bar
Video memory (still image) 1, 2 pp Still2 is selectable only in 2K mode. Video memory (moving image) 1, 2 pp Clip2 is selectable only in 2K mode.

p When the AUX bus for which "MV" has been selected is displayed on the sub screen of the multi view display, the images are looped as if two mirrors were facing each other.

AUX1/2 transitions
The MIX transition is executed when the output signal set for AUX1/2 is switched.
1 Press the [AUX1] or [AUX2] button of the AUX bus selector buttons. The selected button and its corresponding AUX bus crosspoint button light in amber.
2 Press the AUX bus crosspoint button for the output signal to be switched to. The MIX transition is now initiated for the length of the transition time that was set using the Time menu. While the transition is underway, the transition source AUX button lights in green, and the transition destination AUX button blinks in amber. As soon as the transition is completed, the transition source AUX button goes off, and the transition destination AUX button lights in amber. Furthermore, when another signal is selected at a midway point through a transition, the transition processing continues from that midway point.

KEY1 F/S AUX

KEY2 F/S

KEY3 F/S

DSK1 F/S

AMBER : FILL / GREEN : SOURCE

DSK2 F/S

AUX1

AUX BUS DELEGATION

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

DISP CAM

MV1

PGM

MV2

PVW

AUX /DISP SOURCE

SHIFT

Blinks in amber (while the transition is underway).
Lights in green. p The AUX bus transition when Shot Memory is recalled is
linked to the Shot Memory dissolve time.

Basic operations

Setting enable/disable for the AUX1/2 transition

The AUX1/2 transition time and transition enable/disable can be set.

1 Press the

TIME CAM

button to light its indicator, and display

the Time menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the AUX1 BUS Trans sub menu.

3 When the transition time is to be set in frame units, use [F2] for the setting.

4 When the transition time is to be set in second units, use [F3] to set the seconds and [F4] to set the frames.
Any time from 0 to 999f can be set. The time which can be set when seconds are used as the display unit differs depending on the system format.

59.94i: 50i: 29.97PsF: 25PsF: 24PsF: 23.98PsF:

max. 33s09f max. 39s24f max. 33s09f max. 39s24f max. 41s15f max. 41s15f

59.94p: 50p: 29.97p: 25p: 24p: 23.98p:

max. 16s39f max. 19s49f max. 33s09f max. 39s24f max. 41s15f max. 41s15f

5 Use [F4] to set enable or disable for the transition using the Transition item.

Enable

Off

Disable

When disable has been set for the transition, the output signals are switched with no transition when the output signals set in AUX1 is switched.

Basic operations

Memory

w Shot memories The background transition pattern, PinP size, border width and other video effects can be registered in the memory and recalled. The memory used for this is referred to as a shot memory. By setting effect dissolve, it is possible to ensure a smooth change of the switching from the current images to the images or operations registered in the shot memory.
w Event memories A multiple number of the video effects which can be registered in the shot memory can be registered and continuously played back while the current event and next event are interpolated to achieve the effect of a smooth transition. A group of these events are referred to as an event memory. Up to 64 events can be registered in one event memory. pp When operations such as playing are performed on event memories with a different system format to when the event
memories were recorded, the operations will not be performed correctly.

Event 1

Interpolation

Event 2

Interpolation

Event 3

Event memory

w Macro memories This is a function that records a series of operations by the unit and then replays them. You can record and replay across an extensive range of functions that are not covered by the shot memory and event memory (such as input and output settings, etc.). The recorded macros can be replayed by pressing the AUX bus crosspoint buttons or special buttons to which macros have been attached.
Up to a hundred shot memories, a hundred event memories and a hundred macro memories can be registered. The related operations are performed using the number keys. Page 1 to page 10 can be specified for the page numbers of the memories. Numbers 1 to 10 can be specified as the respective memory numbers for the specified page numbers.

Selecting the memory numbers

1 Press the [SHOT MEM], [EVENT MEM] or [MACRO] button of the memory to be selected.

2 Press the

-/+ PAGE

button.

The

-/+ PAGE

button indicator lights up, and the mode for specifying the memory page number is established.

The number key of the currently selected page lights in amber.

The number keys of the page numbers in which more than one memory is registered light in green.

The indicators of the number keys of page numbers in which no memories have been registered remain extinguished.

3 Press the number key (1 to 10) of the page number.

When the page number is determined, the

-/+ PAGE

button indicator goes off, and the mode for specifying the memory number

is established.

If the page number is not going to be changed, press the

-/+ PAGE

button to turn off its indicator instead of pressing the number

key. This establishes the mode for specifying the memory number.

4 Press the number key (1 to 10) corresponding to the memory number. (Hold down the number key when specifying a memory number to register or delete the memory.)

Basic operations

Memory registration

Applicable bus

Material selection

ME
DSK AUX

p PGM/A bus p PST/B bus p Key Fill bus p Key Source bus
p DSK Fill bus p DSK Source bus
p AUX bus

Transition
p Fader amount p Wipe direction

Pattern
p BKGD patterns (MIX, WIPE)
p KEY patterns (MIX, WIPE)

CBGD

CLIP

Menu p Background p Key p Chroma Key p DSK
p Color Background p Video Memory

Shot memory
target

Event memory
target

Menu operation

Each menu

XPT OTHER

XPT selection operation
p DISP bus

p XPT

pp The following operations cannot be registered in the MENU of the macro memory. Project File: Load, Save, Delete, Rename, Protect SD Card: Mount, Unmount, Format, Load, Delete, Rename, Save, Create Thumbnail (for both Still and Clip)

Macro memory
target

-- --

: Valid --: Invalid

Memory recall items

The targets for memory recall can be selected as On (recall target)/Off (not a recall target) in the Target Select 1 and 2 menus.

Target1, 2 ME DSK AUX CBGD CLIP

Recall target A/B XPT, BKGD, KEY1, KEY2, KEY3 DSK1, DSK2 AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, AUX4 CBGD1, CBGD2 CLIP1, CLIP2

pp CLIP is for the event memory only.

Basic operations

Storing the settings in the memory (Store)
Images and operations to be registered can be set and then registered in the memories.

SHOT MEM EVENT MEM MACRO CAM PMEM

STORE RE
CALL DEL EDIT

7 NEW STILL 1

8 COPY STILL 2

9 PASTE TRIM IN

4 INS CLIP 1

5 DEL CLIP 2

6 MOD TRIM OUT

REV

0/10

UNDO

TRIM OFF

MEMORY / WIPE PATTERN / 10 KEY

XPT DSBL REC -/+ PAGE STOP
TAKE ENTER
PLAY

BKGD PATT KEY PATT VMEM CAM CONT

1 Using the unit, set the images or operations to be kept in the memory. To register event memory, refer to "w Creating a new timeline" in "Editing event memory timelines".

2 Press the [SHOT MEM], [EVENT MEM] or [MACRO] button of the memory in which the images or operations are to be registered. Depending on the operation that was performed last, the [STORE] button, [RECALL] button, [DEL] button or [EDIT] button lights.

3 Select the bus (ME, DSK, AUX, CBGD, CLIP, MENU, XPT or OTHER) to be registered in the memory. From the Shot Memory menu (or Event Memory menu), select the Target Select1/2 sub menu, and then select "On". From the Macro menu, select the Store Select sub menu, and then select "On". Refer to "Memory registration" and "Selecting the buses whose settings are to be registered and or played back".

4 Press the [STORE] button. The [STORE] button turns red.

5 Press the

-/+ PAGE

button, and press the number key (1 to

10) corresponding to the page number.

6 Hold down (for 2 seconds or so) the number key (1 to 10) corresponding to the number of the memory to be registered. When the registration is completed, the number key corresponding to the memory number lights in green.
p The number keys whose indicators are lit in green have memories already registered in them. Delete the memory corresponding to the number key concerned, and register the new memory.
7 Repeat the above steps to register other kinds of settings in the memories.

Basic operations

Recalling the operations stored in the memory (Recall)

SHOT MEM EVENT MEM MACRO CAM PMEM

STORE RE
CALL DEL EDIT

7 NEW STILL 1

8 COPY STILL 2

9 PASTE TRIM IN

4 INS CLIP 1

5 DEL CLIP 2

6 MOD TRIM OUT

REV

0/10

UNDO

TRIM OFF

MEMORY / WIPE PATTERN / 10 KEY

XPT DSBL REC -/+ PAGE STOP
TAKE ENTER
PLAY

BKGD PATT KEY PATT VMEM CAM CONT

1 Press the [SHOT MEM] or [EVENT MEM] button of the memory whose operations are to be recalled. Depending on the operation that was performed last, the [STORE] button, [RECALL] button, [DEL] button or [EDIT] button lights.

2 Select the bus (ME, DSK, AUX, CBGD, CLIP, MENU, XPT or OTHER) to be recalled from the memory. From the Shot Memory menu (or Event Memory menu), select the Target Select sub menu, and then select "On". From the Macro menu, select the Store Select sub menu, and then select "On". Refer to "Selecting the buses whose settings are to be registered and or played back".

3 When selecting materials using the crosspoint buttons on the operation panel instead of using the registered "Material selection" item materials, press the [XPT DSBL] button to light its indicator in red. Refer to "Memory registration".

4 Press the [RECALL] button. The [RECALL] button turns amber.

5 Press the

-/+ PAGE

button, and press the number key (1 to

10) corresponding to the page number.

6 Press the number key (1 to 10) corresponding to the number for the memory whose operations are to be recalled.
p In the case of a shot memory, the video effects are recalled, and playback starts. During playback, the number key corresponding to the memory number blinks in green.
p In the case of an event memory, the events are recalled, and playback starts. During playback, the number key corresponding to the memory number blinks in green. If there is a PAUSE event, playback pauses at that event, and the number key corresponding to the memory number blinks in amber. Playback is started from the beginning each time the number key corresponding to the memory number is pressed. Playback starts or pauses each time the [TAKE/ ENTER] button is pressed.

7 When playback of the effects or events in the recalled

memory number starts, the

C UNDO

button is enabled, and

its indicator lights up. If this button is pressed during

playback, playback is terminated.

Basic operations

Deleting the operations stored in the memory (Delete)

SHOT MEM EVENT MEM MACRO CAM PMEM

STORE RE
CALL DEL EDIT

7 NEW STILL 1

8 COPY STILL 2

9 PASTE TRIM IN

4 INS CLIP 1

5 DEL CLIP 2

6 MOD TRIM OUT

REV

0/10

UNDO

TRIM OFF

MEMORY / WIPE PATTERN / 10 KEY

XPT DSBL REC -/+ PAGE STOP
TAKE ENTER
PLAY

BKGD PATT KEY PATT VMEM CAM CONT

1 Press the [SHOT MEM] or [EVENT MEM] button of the memory whose operations are to be deleted to select the memory. The selected button lights in amber. Depending on the operation that was performed last, the [STORE] button, [RECALL] button, [DEL] button or [EDIT] button lights.

2 Press the [DEL] button. The [DEL] button lights in red. The button of the number key containing the stored operations lights in green.

p To change a page number, press the

-/+ PAGE

button, and

press the number key (1 to 10) corresponding to the

page number.

Next, press the number key (1 to 10) corresponding

to the number of the memory whose operations are to

be deleted.

3 Hold down (for 2 seconds or so) the number key (1 to 10) corresponding to the number of the memory whose operations are to be deleted. The button of the pressed number key goes off.

Basic operations

Selecting the buses whose settings are to be registered and or played back

Bus selection when registering/playing back memories

Select the bus used for registering event memories, shot memories and macro memories.

1 Press the

SHOT EVENT

button to display the Event Memory menu (Shot Memory menu or Macro menu).

2 Use [F1] to display the Target Select1, 2 sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to [F5] to set the items to be saved to "On". Event Memory menu:

Shot Memory menu:

Macro menu:

The bus settings are registered in the memories.

Off

The bus settings are not registered in the memories.

<Example of memory information display> Page: 1 (1 to 10)

Registering the material selection items Set whether or not to register the "Material selection" items of the buses. Refer to "Memory registration".
73

Basic operations

Setting effect dissolve (shot memory)

Switching from the current image to the image or operation stored in the shot memory can be performed smoothly.

1 Press the

SHOT EVENT

button to display the Shot Memory menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Path sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to set the effect used for switching the images using the Effect item.

Cut Dissolve

The images are switched using the cut effect.
The images are switched using the dissolve effect.

p The dissolve effect duration is set in the Effect Dissolve sub menu which is selected in the Time menu.

4 Use [F3] to select the effect used for switching the colors using the Hue Path item. The following colors are targeted by Hue.
p Colors of the color background p Colors of the borders p Colors of the edges p Colors of the fill matte

Short Long CW CCW

The colors are changed toward less hue on the vectorscope.
The colors are changed toward more hue on the vectorscope.
The Hue is changed clockwise on the vectorscope.
The Hue is changed counterclockwise on the vectorscope.

p Pressed number keys blink in green while the operation switching is underway.
p When the operation switching has been completed, the pressed number key lights in amber.
p When the Effect item is changed from "Dissolve" to "Cut" while operation is being switched, the dissolve effect is released, and the images are switched to the images of the selected shot memory in an instant.
p During the operation switching, the operation of the fader lever is canceled.
p There are cases when it is not possible to recall other memory operations during operation switching: · Recalling another shot memory while a shot memory is operating · Recalling another event memory while an event memory is operating
p It is possible to recall a shot memory while an event memory is operating or to recall an event memory while a shot memory is operating, but if there is conflict with the buses or materials played back by the event memory and shot memory, playback occurs after switching to the memory recalled last.

Basic operations

Editing event memory timelines
Insertion or modification of the events can be edited on the timelines.
w Timeline A timeline is a succession of events in the event memories which have been joined together on the time axis.
w Event points and edit points On a timeline, the position where an event has been registered is called the event point, and the event currently being edited is called the current event memory. When there is an edit point between one event point and another, the event point before the edit point serves as the current event memory. (Event "n" in the figure below)
<Event points and edit points>
Edit point

Event "n"

Event "n"+1

Event "n"+2

w Event duration and total duration The length of time as far as the next event is called the event duration. The total of all the event durations is called the total duration. The present point in time on the timeline is called the current time.
<How times are referred to>
Total duration

Event duration

1s00f

Event 1

Event 2

The event progresses in this direction.
Current time

Event 3
The event stops.

Timeline editing flow
w Modifying registered event memories 1 Press the [EVENT MEM] button and light its indicator. [EVENT MEM] button

SHOT MEM EVENT MEM MACRO CAM PMEM

STORE RE
CALL DEL EDIT

7 NEW STILL 1

8 COPY STILL 2

9 PASTE TRIM IN

4 INS CLIP 1

5 DEL CLIP 2

6 MOD TRIM OUT

REV

0/10

UNDO

TRIM OFF

MEMORY / WIPE PATTERN / 10 KEY

XPT DSBL REC -/+ PAGE STOP
TAKE ENTER
PLAY

BKGD PATT KEY PATT VMEM CAM CONT

2 Press the [RECALL] button to light its indicator, and use

the

-/+ PAGE

button and number keys (1 to 10) to select the

event memory to be modified.

Refer to "Recalling the operations stored in the

memory (Recall)".

3 Press the [EDIT] button to establish the editing mode. (At this point, the timeline of the selected event memory is copied into the work area.) The timeline appears on the built-in display, and events can be inserted or modified.

4 Edit the timeline, and check what has been edited. Refer to the operations described later.

5 Register the event memory which has been modified. Refer to "Storing the settings in the memory (Store)".

w Creating a new timeline
When this operation is performed, the timeline currently in the work area is deleted. If it is required, register it in the event memory.
1 Press the [EVENT MEM] button and light its indicator.
2 Press the [EDIT] button to light its indicator, and press . 7
NEW
3 Create the new timeline. Refer to the operations described later.
4 Register the event memory which has just been created. Refer to "Storing the settings in the memory (Store)".
The timeline is edited in the work area. After editing is completed, be absolutely sure to register which has been edited.

Basic operations

Setting the playback method
w Setting the playback mode 1 Press the [EVENT MEM] button and light its indicator. [EVENT MEM] button

SHOT MEM EVENT MEM MACRO CAM PMEM

STORE RE
CALL DEL EDIT

7 NEW STILL 1

8 COPY STILL 2

9 PASTE TRIM IN

4 INS CLIP 1

5 DEL CLIP 2

6 MOD TRIM OUT

REV

0/10

UNDO

TRIM OFF

MEMORY / WIPE PATTERN / 10 KEY

XPT DSBL REC -/+ PAGE STOP
TAKE ENTER
PLAY

BKGD PATT KEY PATT VMEM CAM CONT

2 Press the [EDIT] button to establish the editing mode.

3 Press the

SHOT EVENT

button to display the Event Memory

menu.

4 Use [F1] to display the Play sub menu.

w Setting the display mode

1 Press the

SHOT EVENT

button to display the Event Memory

menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Timeline sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to set the timeline display mode using the View item.

Normal Wide

The timeline is displayed in a size which is one-half of the width of the built-in display screen.
The timeline is displayed in the full size (as large as the entire width) of the built-in display screen.

5 Use [F2] to set the playback mode using the Loop item.

Once Loop

During normal playback, playback stops at the last event, and if the [TAKE ENTER] button is now pressed, the images are played back in the same direction. During reverse playback, playback stops at the first event, and if the [TAKE ENTER] button is now pressed, the images are played back in the same direction.
During normal playback, playback returns instantly from the last event to the first event, and what has been played back is repeated. During reverse playback, playback returns instantly from the first event to the last event, and what has been played back is repeated.

Basic operations

w Number key operations

A green "" below the timeline indicates an event point.
A "||" indicates that "PAUSE" has been set for an event point.
If an edit point is over an event point, "" for the event point is indicated in amber.
When "CLIP" (Clip1, Clip2) has been registered in an event, " " appears above the event point.
Similarly, when "GPI-Out" (GPI-O1 to GPI-O19) has been registered in an event, " " appears above the event point.
The timeline axis is indicated in green from the start event to the end event.
During playback, the part from the beginning to the current position is indicated in yellow.
Similarly, during reverse playback, the part from the end to the current position is indicated in yellow.

7 NEW STILL 1

8 COPY STILL 2

9 PASTE TRIM IN

4 INS CLIP 1

5 DEL CLIP 2

6 MOD TRIM OUT

REV

0/10

UNDO

TRIM OFF

MEMORY / WIPE PATTERN / 10 KEY

XPT DSBL REC -/+ PAGE STOP
TAKE ENTER
PLAY

BKGD PATT KEY PATT VMEM CAM CONT

7 NEW STILL 1
8 COPY STILL 2
9 PASTE TRIM IN
4 INS CLIP 1
5 DEL CLIP 2 6 MOD TRIM OUT
0/10 << << . >> >> 2 > > 1 < < 3 REV REV C
UNDO TRIM OFF
TAKE ENTER PLAY

Creates a new timeline.
Copies events. An event is not copied if an edit point is not over the event.
Pastes the copied events. If the edit point is an event point, the event is inserted after the event point. If the edit point is at any midway position in an event, the event is inserted at the edit point. Inserts events. If the edit point is an event point, the event is inserted after the event point. If the edit point is at any midway position in an event, the event is inserted at the edit point. Deletes events.
Modifies events. This key cannot be operated if the edit point is not over the event point. Moves to the start event point.
Moves to the end event point.
Moves to the next event point.
Moves to the previous event point.
Reverses the playback direction (event numbers are put in their reverse sequence). Undoes the editing operation of the event. When the button is pressed, the operation performed last is canceled. Plays back events. When this button is operational, its indicator lights in amber. Each time it is pressed, operation is switched between playback and pause. During playback, its indicator blinks in green; during pause, it blinks in amber.

Basic operations

Inserting events (Insert)

Pasting events (Paste)

The current setting status can be inserted as an event after the current event memory. When an event is inserted, the numbers of the events after the current event memory are each moved up by one.

1 Use

, 0/10 <<

, 1
<

2 >

and

. >>

to select the event point

(current event memory) which is to be inserted.

To insert the event at a midway point of an event, play

back the event to the place where the event is to be

inserted, and stop the edit point.

2 Operate the panel, and create the event.

3 Press

4 INS

to insert the created event.

To cancel the event insertion, press the

C UNDO

button.

p When the number of events on the timeline has reached 64, no further events can be inserted.
p When the edit point is over the event point, the newly created event is inserted with the same duration as the current event memory.
p If the edit point is between one event point and another, the current event memory is split at the edit point position, and the newly created event is inserted.
p When registering "CLIP" (Clip1, Clip2) to event memory, place Current time for Clip1 (or Clip2) at the beginning (from the Video Memory2 sub menu, press [F2] (LEAD)). Some clips might not play back.

Modifying events (Modify)

Already registered events can be modified.

1 Use

, 0/10 <<

, 1
<

2 >

and

. >>

to select the event point of

the event to be modified.

2 Operate the panel, and modify the event.

3 Press

6 MOD

to set the modified details.

To cancel the event modification, press the

C UNDO

button.

Copied events can be pasted.

1 Use

, 0/10 <<

, 1
<

2 >

and

. >>

to select the event point

where the copied event is to be inserted.

To insert the copied event between one event point and

another, play back the event to the place where the

copied event is to be inserted, and stop the playback.

2 Press

9 PASTE

to paste the copied event.

To cancel the event pasting, press the

C UNDO

button.

p When the number of events on the timeline has reached 64, no further events can be inserted.
p When the edit point is over an event point, the copied event is inserted with the same duration as the current event memory.
p If the edit point is between one event point and another, the current event memory is split at the edit point position, and the copied event is inserted.

Deleting events (Delete)

Already registered events can be deleted.

1 Use

, 0/10 <<

, 1
<

2 >

and

. >>

to select the event point of

the event to be deleted.

2 Press

5 DEL

to delete the event.

To cancel the event deletion, press the

C UNDO

button.

p Even if the edit point is midway through an event, the current event memory will be deleted.

Undoing what has been edited (Undo)

When the

C UNDO

button is pressed, the operation performed last

is canceled.

Copying events (Copy)

Already registered events can be copied.

1 Use

, 0/10 <<

, 1
<

2 >

and

. >>

to select the event point of

the event to be copied.

2 Press

8 COPY

to copy the event.

Basic operations

Setting events using the menus

w Registering marks
Marks can be registered and events inserted at the event points.
p Pause p Clip playback p GPI-Out output

1 Use

, 0/10 <<

, 1
<

2 >

and

. >>

to select the event where

the mark is to be registered or the event inserted.

2 Press the

SHOT EVENT

button to display the Event Memory

menu.

3 Use [F1] to display the Mark sub menu.

4 Use [F2] (PAUSE item), [F3] (CLIP item) or [F4] (GPI-Out item) to select the item.

PAUSE CLIP GPI-Out

When "On" is selected and the mark is registered in the event point, playback is paused at the mark position during event playback. "||" appears above the timeline.
When "Clip1" or "Clip2" is selected and the mark is registered in the event point, the clip is played back at the mark position during event playback. " " appears above the timeline.
When a GPI output port from "GPI-O1" to "GPI-O19" is selected and the mark is registered in the event point, pulse signals are output from the GPI Output port at the mark position during event playback. " " appears above the timeline. p For the Config menu GPI-Out Port 1/5
sub menu to GPI-Out Port 5/5 sub menu Assign item, check that the selected GPI output port is set to "Event MEM".

5 Press

6 MOD

to register the mark.

In addition, press

4 INS

to insert the event.

To cancel the mark registration or event insertion, press

the

C UNDO

button.

w Setting the event duration

The lengths of the events can be set.

1 Use

, 0/10 <<

, 1
<

2 >

and

. >>

to select the event to be

modified.

2 Press the

SHOT EVENT

button to display the Event Memory

menu.

3 Use [F1] to display the Event Duration sub menu.

4 Use [F2] to set the event length.

5 Press [F3] to enter the duration.

To cancel what has been modified, press the

C UNDO

button.

w Setting the total duration
The total length of all the events from start to end can be set. When the total duration is changed, the durations of the events contained in the event memories are re-calculated using the duration ratio prior to the change. However, the shortest duration of an event cannot be shorter than one frame.

1 Press the [EVENT MEM] button and light its indicator.

2 Press the [RECALL] button to light its indicator, and use

the

-/+ PAGE

button and number keys (1 to 10) to select the

event memory to be modified.

Refer to "Recalling the operations stored in the

memory (Recall)".

3 Press the

SHOT EVENT

button to display the Event Memory

menu.

4 Use [F1] to display the Total Duration sub menu.

5 Use [F2] to set the event length.
6 Press [F3] to enter the duration.
p If no more events can be contained in the total duration which already has many events and which has been changed, the number of frames will be forcibly adjusted.

Basic operations

w Setting the event switching effect (Path)
Switching from one event to another (bus switching) can be accomplished smoothly.

1 Press the

SHOT EVENT

button to light its indicator, and display

the Event Memory menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Path sub menu.

Macro memory settings

Recording non-operation periods

1 Press the

VMEM MACRO

button to light its indicator, and display

the Macro menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Insert Delay sub menu.

3 Use [F2] and the Trans Path item to set how transitions to the next event are performed. The following transitions are available:
p Width of the borders p Soft effect of the borders p Positions of the images p Trimming values

Linear Spline
Step

The switching from one image to another is interpolated linearly.
The switching from one image to another is interpolated over a smooth curve (a cubic function curve).
The parameters are updated when the events are passed through.

4 Use [F3] to select the effect when the colors are switched using the Hue Path item. The following hues are targeted.
p Colors of the color background p Colors of the borders p Colors of the edges p Colors of the fill matte

Short Long CW CCW Step

3 Use [F2] to set the time of the non-operation period in the Time item.
4 Use [F3] to save the time set in Step 3.

Assigning macro memories

You can assign registered macro memories to the AUX bus crosspoint buttons.

1 Press the

VMEM MACRO

button to light its indicator, and display

the Macro menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Macro Assign1/6 to 6/6 sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to [F5] in each of the sub menus to set the macro memories assigned to each crosspoint in the XPT1 to 24 items.

Basic operations

Changing macro memory file names

1 Press the

VMEM MACRO

button to light its indicator, and display

the Macro menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Register sub menu.

3 Use [F2] and [F3] to select the macro memory whose file name is to be changed.
4 Use [F4] and press [F4] in the Rename item. The keyboard screen is displayed, so use it to change the file name of the macro memory.
Timeline display
This displays the number of events, used capacity, and remaining capacity on a macro memory timeline.

Number key operations

7 NEW STILL 1

8 COPY STILL 2

9 PASTE TRIM IN

4 INS CLIP 1

5 DEL CLIP 2

6 MOD TRIM OUT

REV

0/10

UNDO

TRIM OFF

MEMORY / WIPE PATTERN / 10 KEY

XPT DSBL REC -/+ PAGE STOP
TAKE ENTER
PLAY

BKGD PATT KEY PATT VMEM CAM CONT

Creates a new timeline.
7 NEW STILL 1

4 Adds a non-operation time at the end of an event.
INS CLIP 1

5 Deletes the last event.
DEL CLIP 2

XPT Plays back/stops macro recording.
DSBL
REC The button turns red when recording.

-/+ Stops macro playback.
PAGE STOP

Plays back macro.

TAKE ENTER

The button turns amber when it is enabled.

PLAY

Current Event Total Event Used Remain

This displays the number of current events in the work memory.
This displays the total number of events recorded in the work memory.
This displays the capacity used in the work memory. (Units: bytes)
This displays the capacity remaining in the work memory. (Units: bytes)

Basic operations

Macro attach function

The macro registered memories can be assigned to the following playback trigger buttons: PGM/A bus, PST/B bus, KEY1/KEY2/KEY3 bus, DSK1/DSK2 bus, AUX1 to AUX4 bus crosspoint buttons, <KEY1 ON>/<KEY2 ON>/<KEY3 ON>/<DSK1 ON>/<DSK2 ON> button

1 Press the

VMEM MACRO

button to light its indicator, and display the Macro menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Attach sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to enable/disable the macro attach function. The macro attach function is enabled when ON is set.
4 Press [F3] to select the Attach Setting item and assign the playback trigger button.

Select Macro Cancel Bus/Button XPT Button Timing
Operation

Use [F1] to select the macro memory.
Press [F1] to exit the assigning screen.
Use [F2] to select the bus button. Select the bus to have the macro attach setting from [PGM/A], [PST/B], [KEY1], [KEY2], [KEY3], [DSK1], [DSK2], [AUX1] to [AUX4], [KEY1 ON] to [KEY3 ON], [DSK1 ON], and [DSK2 ON].
Use [F3] to select the XPT button. Select between [XPT1] to [XPT24]. These cannot be selected when the bus button is [KEY1 ON] to [KEY3 ON], [DSK1 ON], or [DSK2 ON].
Use [F4] to specify the timing for playback of the macro when the macro attached button is pressed.

[Post] [Pre] [Replace]

Macro registered memory is played back once the button function has worked. Button function works once playback of the macro registered memory is finished. Macro registered memory is played back without the button function working.

Use [F5] to select whether to assign or clear the set information. Press [F5] to assign or clear.

[Assign]

The information for a button to which a macro was attached is assigned.

[Clear]

The information for a button to which a macro was attached is cleared.

Basic operations

Registering memories (Register)

Shot memories and event memories can be registered. Information on the memories is displayed in the status area of the built-in display, and names can be changed.

1 Press the

SHOT EVENT

button to light its indicator, and display

the Shot Memory menu (or Event Memory menu).

The information of the memories is now displayed in the

status area of the built-in display.

2 Use [F1] to display the Register sub menu.

Changing the names of the memories
The names (up to 32 characters) of the memories can be changed.
1 On the Register sub menu, use [F2] to select the page number of the registered memories using the Page item.
2 Use [F3] to select the memory number using the No. item.
3 Use [F4] to display the keyboard screen.
4 Use the positioner, the number keys, and [F1] to [F3] to enter a name, then press [F4]. To cancel the name which has been input and close the keyboard screen, press [F5]. Refer to "Keyboard screen operations".

Basic operations

Video memories

This unit can be used to store still image memories (Still) and moving image memories (Clip), each in two channels.
1 channel at a time is saved in 4K mode. pp Images with key signals can be stored in the video memories (still images and moving images). pp The number of seconds that can be saved in the moving image memory depends on the system format. pp The size of the images (number of seconds) which can be stored depends on the system format (frame rate). pp The video memory data can be stored onto, and read out from, memory cards. pp Video memory data can be saved to and read from the internal storage. pp It is possible to load to the video memory from the internal storage by creating playlists.

Video memory operation

Still1 Still2 Clip1
Clip2

Recording Recording Recording Playback
Stop Recording Playback
Stop

Recording -- --
--

Clip1 Playback

Current status

Stop

Recording -- -- --

Clip2 Playback

Stop

: Valid --: Invalid

w Video memory input/output The image input materials can be selected from the output signals of the AUX buses (AUX1 to AUX4).

AUX1 to AUX4: Selected using the menu

Video Key

Clip1

Clip2

AUX1 to AUX4: Selected using the menu

Still1

Video Key

Still2

Basic operations

Recording still images (Still)

1 Press the

VMEM MACRO

button to light its indicator, and display

the Video Memory menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Video Memory1 sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to select "Still1" or "Still2" using the Select item. p Only Still1 can be selected in the 4K mode.
4 Use [F1] to display the Rec2 sub menu.

5 Use [F2] to set the images to appear on the built-in display using the Preview item.

The image appearing on the built-in display is

forcibly switched to the image to be recorded

(AUX1 to AUX4 selected using the VMEM

Video item) instead of the material selected

by the DISP bus.

Off

The image source selected by the DISP bus

is displayed as a preview.

When "On" is selected for the Preview item, be aware that the following operations will occur: p The DISP button will link with the AUX bus selection
button (AUX BUS DELEGATION) of AUX1 to AUX4 selected in the VMEM Video item, which will light or turn off the buttons. p If the material of the DISP bus is changed, the materials of the DISP bus and the selected AUX bus change at the same time. Similarly, if the material of the selected AUX bus is changed, the material of the DISP bus changes at the same time.
6 Use [F2] and [F3] of Rec1 to set the images to be recorded in the video memory in the VMEM Video item.

7 Use [F4] of Rec2 to set the review display in the Review item.

After the images have been recorded, the

images of the video memory recorded in the

AUX bus are displayed (for 2 seconds or so).

Off

The review display is not shown.

8 Use [F1] to display the Video Memory1 sub menu.

9 As soon as [F3] (Rec) is pressed, the still images are recorded.
p If the [VMEM] button on the right of the number keys is pressed and the video memory operation mode has been established, the operation of this button is linked with the [XPT/DSBL] button among the number keys.
p When the recording of the still images is completed, thumbnails of the still images are displayed in the thumbnail screen.

AUX1 to AUX4

The output signals of the AUX buses (AUX1 to AUX4) are recorded as the material.

Basic operations

Recording moving images (Clip)

1 Press the

VMEM MACRO

button to light its indicator, and display

the Video Memory menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Video Memory1 sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to select "Clip1" or "Clip2" using the Select item. p Only Clip1 can be selected in the 4K mode.
4 Use [F1] to display the Rec2 sub menu.

5 Use [F2] to set the images to appear on the built-in display using the Preview item.

The image appearing on the built-in display is

forcibly switched to the image to be recorded

(AUX1 to AUX4 selected using the VMEM

Video item) instead of the material selected

by the DISP bus.

Off

The image source selected by the DISP bus

is displayed as a preview.

6 Use [F2] and [F3] of Rec1 to set the images to be recorded in the video memory in the VMEM Video item.

AUX1 to AUX4

The output signals of the AUX buses (AUX1 to AUX4) are recorded as the material.

7 Use [F4] of Rec2 to set the review display in the Review item.

After the images have been recorded, the

images of the video memory recorded in the

AUX bus are displayed (up to 4 seconds).

Off

The review display is not shown.

8 Use [F1] to display the Rec3 sub menu.

9 Use [F2] to select the recording repeat setting using the Loop item.

The recording of the images is continued until

the stop operation is performed.

If either of the following operations is

performed while recording is in progress, the

images are recorded up to the last frame,

after which recording stops.

p When "Off" is selected as the Loop item

setting.

p When [Stop] ([F5] of Video Memory sub

menu) is pressed.

Off

Images are recorded up to the maximum

recording time (set using the Limit items),

after which recording stops automatically.

Use [F3] to set the quality of the images to be recorded using the Quality item.

Standard High

Standard image quality High image quality

The maximum recording time depends on the video format.

Standard

High

2160/59.94p 2160/50p 2160/29.97p

15 seconds 18 seconds 30 seconds

High mode will be half the Standard mode.

2160/25p

36 seconds

2160/23.98p, 24p 1080/59.94p

37.5 seconds 60 seconds

1080/50p

72 seconds

1080/29.97psf

120 seconds

1080/25psf

144 seconds

1080/23.98psf, 24psf 1080/59.94i

150 seconds 120 seconds

1080/50i

144 seconds

720/59.94p

120 seconds

720/50p

144 seconds

1080×29.97p 1080×25p 1080×24p 1080×23.98p

120 seconds 144 seconds 150 seconds 150 seconds

Basic operations

Use [F1] to set the maximum recording time using the Limit item.
Use [F1] to display the Play Mode2 sub menu.
Use [F4] to set the sound to be recorded with the Audio item.
> Use [F1] to display the Video Memory1 sub menu.

As soon as [F3] (Rec) is pressed, the recording of the moving images starts.

When [F5] (Stop) is pressed, the recording of the moving images is stopped.

p If the [VMEM] button on the right of the number keys

is pressed and the video memory operation mode has

been established, the operation of this button is linked

with the

-/+ PAGE

button among the number keys.

p Thumbnails of moving images are displayed on the

thumbnail screen.

While the thumbnails are displayed, the following

information is also displayed on the thumbnail screen.

Current playback position (time), IN point position, OUT point position

p With the moving images on which the key signals are recorded, a white "" mark is displayed for the thumbnail icons.
p The recording time is displayed in the Total Time item of the Video Memory3 sub menu. However, if trimming has been performed, the time from the IN point to the OUT point after trimming is displayed. Also, "On" is displayed for the Key item when the key signals have been recorded.

Saving to the internal storage
Data for images stored in the video memory can be retained even when the power is turned off, by saving them in the internal storage area. Whether to automatically save the image data stored in the video memory when the data is transferred from the AUX bus or to manually save them must be set.
Notes pp If power to the unit is turned off when the saving of
data has not finished, video memory data will be lost. pp Video memory data that has been saved is always
restored when the power is turned on.

1 Press the

VMEM MACRO

button to light its indicator, and display

the Video Memory menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Memory sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to select the saving method using the Mode item.

Auto Manual

Automatic saving Manual saving

4 Use [F3] to select the video memory for saving data in the internal storage area using the Select item. If "All" is selected, all video memory will be saved. Video memory that has finished being recorded is saved to the internal storage area.
5 Press the [F5] (Save) to save data in the internal storage area.
p [F3] (Select) and [F5] (Save) are enabled when "Manual" is selected for the Mode item.
p When "Auto" is selected for the Mode item, if video memory recording is stopped, the video memory is saved to the internal storage area immediately after recording stops. However, if the power is cut off during recording, the video memories will not be saved in the internal storage area.

Basic operations

Playing back moving images (Clip)

Establishing the playback mode

1 Press the

VMEM MACRO

button to light its indicator, and display

the Video Memory menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Play Mode1 sub menu (or Play Mode2 sub menu).

3 Use [F2] to select the playback mode using the Mode item.

Lead Last Loop

Operation returns to the start frame after playback.
Operation stops at the end frame after playback.
The end frame and start frame are joined together and played back repeatedly.

4 Use [F3] to select reverse playback using the Reverse item.

The moving images are played back in the

reverse direction.

Off

The moving images are played back in the

forward direction.

p When the [VMEM] button on the right of the number

key is pressed and the video memory operation mode

has been established, the operation of this button is

linked with the

3 REV

button among the number keys.

5 Use [F4] to select the speed for variable speed playback using the Variable item.

Speeds which can be selected: 1, 2, 4, 8, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8

6 Use [F5] to select the image when operation is stopped using the Freeze item.

Frame Field

Stops at the frame image. Stops at the field image.

p Depending on the video format, some formats cannot be selected.

7 Use [F1] to display the Play Mode2 sub menu.

8 Use [F2] to set the control button used for playing back moving images in tandem with the transition operation. Use [F2] to set the Clip playback start button.

Off AUTO KEY1 ON KEY2 ON KEY3 ON DSK1 ON DSK2 ON FTB ON Fader

Playback is not performed in tandem with the transition operation.
The playback of the moving images is started in tandem with the operation of the [AUTO] button.
The playback of the moving images is started in tandem with the operation of the [KEY1 ON] button.
The playback of the moving images is started in tandem with the operation of the [KEY2 ON] button.
The playback of the moving images is started in tandem with the operation of the [KEY3 ON] button.
The playback of the moving images is started in tandem with the operation of the [DSK1 ON] button.
The playback of the moving images is started in tandem with the operation of the [DSK2 ON] button.
The playback of the moving images is started in tandem with the operation of the [FTB ON] button.
Playback of the moving images is started in tandem with the operation of the fader.

Playing back the moving images

1 Press the

VMEM MACRO

button to light its indicator, and display

the Video Memory menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Video Memory1 sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to select Clip1 or Clip2 using the Select item.
4 When [F4] (Play) is pressed, playback of the moving images is started.
p When the [VMEM] button on the right of the number key is pressed and the video memory operation mode has been established, the operation of this button is linked with the [TAKE/ENTER] button among the number keys.
p The current playback position (time) is displayed for the Current Time item on the Video Memory3 sub menu.

Basic operations

Moving to the first frame or last frame

1 Press the

VMEM MACRO

button to light its indicator, and display

the Video Memory menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Video Memory2 sub menu.

3 When [F2] (LEAD) is pressed, the current position is moved to the first (head) frame; conversely, when [F3] (LAST) is pressed, the current position is moved to the last frame.

Trimming moving images

The position where the playback of the moving images is to start (IN point) and the position when it is to end (OUT point) can be set.

1 Press the [VMEM] button on the right of the number keys to establish the video memory operation mode.

2 Use [F1] (SELECT) to select Clip1 or Clip2.

3 Use the number keys to stop the moving images at the position where the images are to be trimmed (IN point or OUT point).

4 Trim the moving images by operating the buttons below.

Sets the trimming IN point.

PASTE

TRIM IN

6 MOD TRIM OUT

Sets the trimming OUT point.

C UNDO TRIM OFF

Releases the trimming settings.

p Moving images that have been trimmed are played back from the IN point to the OUT point.
p When moving images are saved to a memory card, only the trimmed portion is saved.
p The same position cannot be specified for the IN point and the OUT point. The smallest unit available when
trimming is performed is 2 frames.

w Operations performed using the number keys

7 NEW STILL 1

8 COPY STILL 2

9 PASTE TRIM IN

4 INS CLIP 1

5 DEL CLIP 2

6 MOD TRIM OUT

REV

0/10

UNDO

TRIM OFF

MEMORY / WIPE PATTERN / 10 KEY

XPT DSBL REC -/+ PAGE STOP
TAKE ENTER
PLAY

BKGD PATT KEY PATT VMEM CAM CONT

7 NEW STILL 1
8 COPY STILL 2
4 INS CLIP 1
5 DEL CLIP 2
9 PASTE TRIM IN
6 MOD TRIM OUT
C UNDO TRIM OFF
1 < <
2 > >
3 REV REV
0/10 << <<
. >> >>
TAKE ENTER
PLAY
XPT DSBL REC
-/+ PAGE STOP

Selects Still1 as the operation target.
Selects Still2 as the operation target.
Selects Clip1 as the operation target.
Selects Clip2 as the operation target.
Sets the trimming IN point.
Sets the trimming OUT point.
Releases the trimming settings.
Plays back the moving images one frame at a time in the reverse direction. Plays back the moving images one frame at a time in the forward direction. Sets the playback direction to reverse.
Transfers to the start frame of the moving images, and stops. Transfers to the end frame of the moving images, and stops. Plays back the moving images.
Starts recording the moving images.
Stops the recording or playback of the moving images.

Basic operations
Displaying thumbnails pp When the [VMEM] button located on the right of the
number keys is pressed and the video memory operation mode has been established, thumbnails of the images registered in the video memories (Still1, Still2, Clip1, Clip2) can be shown on the built-in display.
Thumbnail layout w Still (still images)
Still image

Key signal indicator The "" icon is displayed when there is a key signal.

w Clip (moving images)

Key signal indicator The "" icon is displayed when there is a key signal.

Duration of the recorded clip

Image in the first frame of the clip

Duration of the range specified with trimming

Current playback position
Trimming IN point

Trimming OUT point

Audio signal indicator

The "

" icon is displayed

when there is audio.

Basic operations

Internal storage management

This unit enables you to manage multiple video memories in the internal storage.

The maximum number of files that can be saved is as follows:

Still

50 files

Clip

50 files, but up to a maximum size of 20 GB

pp If the internal storage does not have enough capacity to save, saving is not possible. Try deleting some existing files to free capacity in the internal storage.
pp In the Clip file list screen, you can see the data size for each Clip and the used capacity and available capacity allocated for Clips in the internal storage.

Use the following operation to display the management screen used for saving and reading multiple video memory data items with the internal storage.

1 Press the VMEM button to make it turn green. Internal storage file management screen (list view)

ABCDE

A [F1]
B [F2] C [F3] D [F4] E [F5]

SELECT
CURSOR LIST VIEW OPERATION SORT

Selects the current video memory. The selection switches to Still1 Still2 Clip1 Clip2 when you turn it. When the switcher mode is 4K on this unit, Still2 and Clip2 are not displayed. When Clip1/2 is selected, the maximum capacity (20 GB) and remaining capacity of the internal storage are displayed.
Selects the items in the list. Turning it moves the cursor to the items.
You can switch the screen view to "List" (a list of files) or "Thumbnail" (thumbnail view).
Selects the operations that are performed in the internal storage management screen. The selection switches to "Save", "Load", "Delete", "Rename", and "Protect" when you turn it.
The files in the list can be resorted by name, descending order by date, or ascending order by date. The selection switches to "Newest", "Oldest", and "Name" when you turn it.

Internal storage file management screen (thumbnail view) You can switch between the list view and the thumbnail view by turning [F3].

Basic operations

Saving files
Saves the Still and Clip data that has been loaded into the video memory to the internal storage.
1 Turn [F1] to select the video memory to save.
2 Turn [F4] to select Save and press [F4].
3 The keyboard screen is displayed, so use it to enter the name of the file to be saved and press [F4]. Refer to "Keyboard screen operations" (page 30).
4 A progress bar is displayed while saving, and saving is complete when it reaches the rightmost end.
p If the internal storage does not have enough capacity, saving is not possible.
Recalling files
Loads the Still and Clip data that has been saved to the internal storage into the video memory.
1 Turn [F1] to select the video memory to load.
2 Turn [F4] to select Load.
3 Turn [F2] to select the Still or Clip data that you want to load from the file list. When you select a list that cannot be loaded, [F4] is grayed out and cannot be pressed.
4 Press [F4] to load the target file. A progress bar is displayed while loading, and loading is complete when it reaches the rightmost end.
Deleting files
Deletes the Still and Clip data that has been saved in the internal storage.
1 Turn [F4] to select Delete.
2 Turn [F2] to select the Still or Clip data that you want to delete from the file list.
3 Press [F4] to delete the target file.
4 A confirmation screen is displayed before deletion. The file is deleted when [F1] is pressed. Deleting is canceled when [F5] is pressed.
p You cannot restore a file once you delete it. When there is no file list or you select a protected file, [F4] Delete is grayed out and cannot be selected.

Changing filenames
The filenames of the Still and Clip data saved in the internal storage can be changed.
1 Turn [F4] to select Rename.
2 Turn [F2] to select the Still or Clip data for which you want to change the name from the file list.
3 Press [F4] to change the name of the target file.
4 The keyboard screen is displayed, so use it to enter the new name and press [F4]. Refer to "Keyboard screen operations" (page 30).
p You cannot restore a name once you have changed it. Do the renaming procedure again if necessary. When there is no file list or you select a protected file, [F4] Rename is grayed out and cannot be selected.
Protecting files
The Still and Clip data saved in the internal storage can be protected so that the data cannot be overwritten, deleted, or the filenames changed.
1 Turn [F4] to select Protect.
2 Turn [F2] to select the Still or Clip data that you want to protect in the file list.
3 Press [F4] to protect the target file. p When protected, a lock symbol is displayed in front of
filenames to indicate that the files are protected. When there is no file list, [F4] Protect is grayed out and cannot be selected. p Operations to save, recall, delete, change the filenames, or protect files are not possible during Rec of Still or Clip.

Basic operations

Thumbnail display

Still playlists

Internal storage file management screen

It is possible with this unit to set a maximum of 10 sequences for the loading of Still data saved in the internal storage to the video memory, and have the Still data loaded to the video memory accordingly.

w Still (still images)
Image
Filename, protection (lock symbol indicates protected)

pp When a Still data file that has been set in a Still playlist is deleted from the internal storage, it is also deleted from the associated playlist.
pp When a Still data file that has been set in a Still playlist has its name changed, the name in the associated playlist is also changed.
pp When this unit is initialized, all Still playlists are also initialized so that all item fields will be blank.
pp The playlist that is created can be saved in the project file. It is also possible to load from the project file.
pp The Still playlist editing procedure can be recorded using the macro function of this unit.
pp When Still data is loaded according to the playlist, the procedure that loaded the Still data selected from the internal storage is recorded in the macro.
Frame count (fixed at 1), Key signal indicator ()

Image size

File date

w Clip (moving images)
Still image
Filename, protection (lock symbol indicates protected)

Frame count, Key signal indicator ()

Image size, Audio signal indicator

File date

Basic operations
Creating and editing Still playlists Display the video memory operation screen to create and edit Still playlists.
1 Press the VMEM button to make it turn amber. Video memory operation screen (Still playlist editing screen)

A [F1] SELECT

B [F2] CURSOR

C [F3] D [F4]

SELECT STILL

E [F5] F

EXIT

CDE

Selects the current video memory. The selection switches to Still1 Still2 Clip1 Clip2 when you turn it. When the switcher mode is 4K on this unit, Still2 and Clip2 are not displayed. When Clip1/2 is selected, F playlist is grayed out.
Select the Still data in the playlist. You can also switch the mode between Normal and Swap by pressing [F2].
pp Normal (cursor moving mode) In the Normal mode, the cursor turns yellow. By turning, the cursor for selecting Still data in the F playlist moves up and down.
pp Swap (list swapping mode) In the Swap mode, the cursor turns turquoise. By turning, while moving up and down, the selected list is swapped.
Not used in this screen.
Selects the Still file data in the internal storage. By turning, the Still file data in the internal storage is displayed in filename order and is set in the Still playlist. Only Still data that is compatible with the switcher formats of this unit is displayed. By pressing [F4], the playlist in the cursor position is cleared.
Closes the video memory operation screen and returns the screen to the menu that was displayed immediately prior to the [VMEM] button being pressed.
A Still playlist. 10 Still data items can be registered. The list shows, in order from the left, the playback order, the thumbnail, the filename of the Still, whether there is a Key, and the image size.

Basic operations

Loading from the Still playlist to the video memory
Loads Still data from the Still playlist to the video memory (Still1/2).
1 Press the VMEM button to make it turn amber.
2 Turn [F1] to select the video memory to load to. p Select Still1 or Still2. Loading of the Still data is not possible when Clip1/2 is selected. p Still2 is not displayed when the switcher mode is 4K.
3 Press number key [1] or [2] to execute load. [1] loads in descending order according to the playlist. ([Prev.] move backward between the items of the playlist.)
[2] loads in ascending order according to the playlist. ([Next] move forward between the items of the playlist.)

7 NEW STILL 1

8 COPY STILL 2

9 PASTE TRIM IN

4 INS CLIP 1

5 DEL CLIP 2

6 MOD TRIM OUT

REV

0/10

UNDO

TRIM OFF

MEMORY / WIPE PATTERN / 10 KEY

XPT DSBL REC -/+ PAGE STOP
TAKE ENTER
PLAY

BKGD PATT KEY PATT VMEM CAM CONT

pp You cannot move to No.10 when you press the [1] button when the cursor is on No.1 in the playlist.
pp You cannot move to No.1 when you press the [2] button when the cursor is on No.10 in the playlist.
pp Lists that cannot be played back are skipped and cannot be played back.
pp Unregistered lists are skipped, the next Still list is loaded, and the cursor moves.

It is also possible to load the Still data selected in the playlist from the internal storage to the video memory.
4 Press [F2] to switch to Normal mode.
5 Turn [F2] to select the Still data that you want to load from the playlist.
6 Press the [TAKE/ENTER] button in the number key area to load the Still data to the video memory.

Basic operations

Memory card

You can save the video memory data and setup data of this unit to a memory card as a project file. Conversely, this data can be loaded from the memory card to the unit. Furthermore, it is possible to upgrade the unit's software. pp It may take a while to store a moving image of a long
recording time with high image quality or a still image file with high image quality on the memory card.

Video memory (still image data: Still1, Still2): <File formats supported>
Bitmap (bmp), JPEG (jpg), TARGA (tga), TIFF (tif), GIF (gif), PNG (png)

p This unit supports 24-bit uncompressed or 32-bit uncompressed TARGA files. If any other types of TARGA files are loaded into the unit, black images will be displayed as the thumbnails, and the unit cannot recognize the files.
p Be aware that saving video memory still images on the memory card in GIF format will cause the picture quality to deteriorate.

4K:

38402160

HD/1080i: 19201080

HD/1080PsF: 19201080

HD/720p: 1280720

p The size of images is converted automatically if it does not match any of the "applicable sizes".

Video memories (moving image data: Clip1, Clip2): This is the original format of the unit. Data is stored in and read from these memories.
Setup data (Set Up): The "setup data" refers to all the data stored in the unit with the exception of the following data. Project files can be saved.
Date, time, network settings, video memory data, shot memory data, event memory data, macro memory data, Still playlist
Software for upgrading (Upgrade): The software for upgrading is loaded. This software can be obtained from "Service and Support" on the Web site whose address is provided below: https://pro-av.panasonic.net/ For the upgrade procedure, follow the steps in the directions which are contained in the download file.
Log file (Log): Log files stored in the unit can be saved.
qpConcerning memory cards
Memory cards used with the unit should conform to SD, SDHC or SDXC standards. Be sure to format cards using the unit. Use memory cards formatted with FAT (exFAT for SDXC memory cards). (NTFS formatted memory cards cannot be recognized.) Panasonic memory cards with the following capacities can be used with the unit:
SD (from 8 MB to 2 GB) SDHC (from 4 GB to 32 GB) SDXC (from 64 GB to 128 GB)
For the latest information not available in the Operating Instructions, visit the following Web sites.
https://pro-av.panasonic.net/
pp Memory cards must not be used or stored in an environment where they may be · Exposed to high temperatures/humidities; · Exposed to water droplets; or · Electrically charged.

Basic operations

The data is stored in the following folders on the memory card. When data is to be loaded, first store the data in the respective folders, and then load the files.

<Data folder configuration>
Data type Project file (project) Video memory (Still file) Thumbnail image for video memory (Still file) Video memory (Clip file) Thumbnail image for video memory (Clip file) Update file Log file

Save Type item Project (*2) Still1, Still2 (*1) Still1, Still2 (*1)

Storage folder "HS\COMM\PROJECT" "HS\COMM\IMAGE" "HS\COMM\IMAGE_THUMBNAIL"

Extension 001, 002, ... (*3) bmp, tga, png, jpg (jpeg), tif (tiff), gif tbm, tpn, tjp, ttg, ttif, tgi

Clip1, Clip2 (*1)

"HS\COMM\CLIP"

clp

Clip1, Clip2 (*1)

"HS\COMM\CLIP_THUMBNAIL"

png

"HS\UHS500\UPDATE"

50d

Log

"HS\UHS500\LOG"

log

*1: When the still image data with key signals attached is stored into the video memory, select "tga" or "png" as the file format. The still image data of any other file format cannot be stored with attaching the key signals. In 4K mode, only Still1 and Clip1 are available.
*2: The setup data, shot memory data, event memory data, macro memory data, still image data, video data, and still image playlists selected in the Target Select item are saved as a collection in the project file.
*3: The project file is saved in a folder created as File Name folder created under the HS\COMM\PROJECT folder. When the project file being stored is large, the file is divided and each file is appended with a serial number extension (001, 002, etc.).

Memory card handling precautions p Do NOT eject the memory card while the memory card access LED is lit.
When an memory card is ejected while the memory card access LED is lit, the transition may be temporarily suspended.
In addition, the data stored on the memory card may be lost. p The data stored on memory cards may be lost as a result of misplacing the cards or performing erroneous operations, for
instance. It is recommended that valuable data be stored on a computer or other device.

Basic operations

Formatting memory cards

Before using a memory card on this unit, the memory card must first be formatted on this unit. Executing the format means that the memory card is formatted (conforming to the SD standard) and a dedicated directory is created. (All files saved on the memory card will be erased.)

1 Insert the memory card into the unit's memory card slot.

2 Press the

PRJ SD Card

button to light its indicator, and display

the SD Card menu.

3 Use [F1] to display the Card Management sub menu.

4 Use [F5] to execute the Format item. The item is grayed out if a memory card is not inserted. p Press [F1] in the confirmation screen to format. p Press [F5] to cancel.
Format the memory card to use it in this unit.
This unit also supports SDHC/SDXC memory cards. You can format without distinguishing between SD memory cards, SDHC memory cards, and SDXC memory cards.

Saving data on memory cards

1 Insert a memory card that was formatted on this unit into the memory card slot.

2 Press the

PRJ SD Card

button to light its indicator, and display

the SD Card menu.

3 Use [F1] to display the File sub menu.

4 Use [F3] to select the data to save to the memory card in the Save Type item.
When saving still images: Use [F4] to select the saving file format of still images in the File Format item.
When saving project files: Use [F1] to select the item you want to save as the project file in the Target Select1/2 item. Use [F2] to [F5] to set each of the items be saved to ON.

5 If the [F5] (Save) is now pressed, the file is stored on the memory card.
For the destinations where the data is stored, refer to <Data folder configuration>.
p When storing video memory still images, the file format can be selected. On the SD Card menu, use [F1] to display the File2 sub menu, and select the format of the file to be used when storing the data on the memory card using the Format item.
p Be aware that saving video memory still images on the memory card in GIF format will cause the picture quality to deteriorate.

Basic operations

Loading data from memory cards
1 Insert the memory card on which the data is stored into the memory card slot. Load the file after its data has been stored in the each folder. Data stored in other folders will not be recognized by the unit. For the destinations where the data is stored, refer to <Data folder configuration>.
2 On the SD Card menu, use [F1] to display the Mode sub menu.
3 Use [F2], and then press the [F2] using the Load item. When [F2] is pressed, the file selection screen is displayed.
<Example of what appears on the file selection screen>

5 Use [F2] to select the name of the file to be loaded using the SELECT FILE item. A shortened file name may be displayed if the filename being loaded exceeds 23 characters. p The following alphanumerics and symbols can be used as the characters for filenames (see below). Files using other characters will not be displayed by the unit. p Periods are not available in the input screen. Characters that are not available in the keyboard screen are grayed out.
<Characters which can be used for filenames>
A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, ! # $ % & ' ( ) @ ^ _ ` { }
6 Use [F4] to load the file.
Thumbnail display

4 Use [F1] to select the type of file to be loaded using the SELECT item.

p Correlation between [F1] (for selecting a setting using the SELECT item) and [F3] on the file selection screen

[F1] Settings selected using SELECT item

[F3] Displays and function

Still1, Still2, Clip1, Clip2

F3: LIST VIEW Using the [F3], it is possible to switch the screen display between "List (list files)" and "Thumbnail (display thumbnails)". pp Only Still1 and Clip1 can be selected
in the 4K mode.

Upgrade

F3: The [F3] cannot be operated. On the screen, the list of files is displayed.

Project

F3: The [F3] cannot be operated. On the screen, the list of files is displayed.

For Still thumbnails, the image is displayed in the upper portion, and the file name, KEY indicator, image size, and file date are displayed in the lower portion. For Clip thumbnails, a still image is displayed in the upper portion, and the file name, KEY indicator, recorded time (number of frames), format, and file date are displayed in the lower portion. A maximum of up to 100 Still thumbnails and 100 Clip thumbnails can be displayed. On a single screen, 8 thumbnails are displayed in 2 rows of 4 thumbnails each. For more than 8 thumbnails, thumbnails are switched one row at a time. When moving the cursor with [F2] (the SELECT item), if the cursor is at the image in the lower-right corner (or upper-left corner), moving to the right (or left) switches pages. pp Never remove the memory card while thumbnail display is
in progress.

Basic operations

Changing the sort mode
The way in which the file list displayed on the file selection screen is arranged can be specified.
1 On the SD Card menu, use [F1] to display the Mode sub menu.

Deleting files on memory cards
1 Insert the memory card on which the data is stored into the memory card slot.
2 On the SD Card menu, use [F1] to display the Mode sub menu.

2 Use [F5] to select the sort mode for the file selection screen using the Sort item.

Newest Oldest Name

The files are arranged in sequence starting with the file having the most recent registration date and time.
The files are arranged in sequence starting with the file having the oldest registration date and time.
The files are arranged in filename sequence.

3 Use [F3] to select "Delete" using the Mode item, and then press the [F3]. When [F3] is pressed, the file selection screen is displayed.
<Example of what appears on the file selection screen>

4 Use [F1] to select the type of file to be deleted using the SELECT item. A shortened file name may be displayed if the filename being loaded exceeds 23 characters.
5 Use [F2] to select the name of the file to be deleted using the SELECT FILE item.
6 Use [F4] to delete the file.

100

Basic operations
Displaying the memory card information
1 Insert the memory card on which the data is stored into the memory card slot.
2 On the SD Card menu, use [F1] to display the Card Information sub menu.

Free Total

The memory card's remaining free space is displayed.
The memory card's capacity is displayed.

Creating thumbnail images
1 Insert the memory card on which the data is stored into the memory card slot.
2 On the SD Card menu, use [F1] to display the Create Thumbnail sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to create the thumbnail for still images in the Still item.
4 Use [F3] to create the thumbnail for moving images in the Clip item.

101

Basic operations

Internal storage
The setup data for this unit can be saved as a project file in the internal storage. Furthermore, you can also load the setup data from the internal storage to this unit. pp It may take some time when saving videos that are
recorded with high image quality and over long periods of time or still image files with high image quality to the internal storage. pp The following data can be selected and saved or loaded as a project file. Setup data, shot memory data, event memory data, macro memory data, Still video memory, Clip video memory, Still playlist pp The date, time, and network settings cannot be saved.

Saving project files to the internal storage

1 Press the

PRJ SD Card

button to light its indicator, and display

the Project File menu.

2 Use [F1] to select the item you want to save as the project file in the Target Select1/2 item. Use [F2] to [F5] to set each of the items to be saved to ON.

3 Use [F1] to display the Project File sub menu.

4 The project file selection screen is displayed when you press [F3] (Save).

Project file management screen

1 Press the

PRJ SD Card

button to light its indicator, and display

the Project File menu.

pp You can load, save, delete and rename project files in the internal storage using this menu screen. You can also view the information for the project file that was most recently loaded.
pp Select the following data to be loaded or saved as a project file. Setup data, shot memory data, event memory data, macro memory data, Still video memory, Clip video memory, Still playlist

5 You can operate [F1] to change the file sorting order.

Newest Oldest Name

In the order of date and time of registration from the most recent
In the order of date and time of registration from the oldest
In the order of the names of project files

6 Use [F2] to select the file to be saved.
p Select [New File] when saving a new one. p You can overwrite a project file that has already been
saved. p You cannot overwrite files that have the lock mark in front
of the filename.

102

Basic operations

7 The screen for entering text so that you can enter the filename is displayed when you press [F4] (SAVE). ("Keyboard screen operations" (page 30))
p Alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used for filenames. Files using other characters cannot be displayed on this unit.
p Periods are not available in the input screen. Furthermore, characters are grayed out if they are unavailable in the keyboard screen.
<Characters which can be used for filenames>
A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, ! # $ % & ' ( ) @ ^ _ ` { }
8 Project files are saved to the internal storage when [F4] OK is pressed.

Loading project files from the internal storage

1 Press the

PRJ SD Card

button to light its indicator, and display

the Project File menu.

2 Use [F1] to select the item you want to load as the project file in the Target Select1/2 item. Use [F2] to [F5] to turn ON the items to be loaded.

3 Use [F1] to display the Project File sub menu.

4 The project file selection screen is displayed when you press [F2] (Load).

5 In the file selection screen, use [F2] to select the file to be loaded.

6 Project files are loaded from the internal storage when [F4] (LOAD) is pressed.

7 You can protect the target file by pressing [F3] (PROTECT).
p A lock symbol is displayed in front of the filenames of protected files.
p Project files that are protected cannot be overwritten, deleted, or filenames changed.

Deleting project files from the internal storage

1 Press the

PRJ SD Card

button to light its indicator, and display

the Project File menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Project File sub menu.

3 The project file selection screen is displayed when you press [F4] (Delete).

4 Use [F2] in the file selection screen to select the file to be deleted.

5 The project file is deleted from the internal storage when [F4] (DELETE) is pressed.
p You cannot delete files that have the lock mark in front of the filename.
6 You can protect the target file by pressing [F3] (PROTECT).
p A lock symbol is displayed in front of the filenames of protected files.
p Project files that are protected cannot be overwritten, deleted, or filenames changed.

103

Basic operations

Changing the filenames of project files saved in the internal storage

1 Press the

PRJ SD Card

button to light its indicator, and display

the Project File menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Project File sub menu.

3 The project file selection screen is displayed when you press [F5] (Rename).

4 Use [F2] in the file selection screen to select the project file for which you want to change the name.

5 The screen for entering text so that you can enter the filename is displayed when you press [F4] (RENAME). ("Keyboard screen operations" (page 30))

6 The filename of the project file saved in the internal storage is changed when you press [F4] OK.

104

Basic operations
Waveform monitor settings
WFM (waveform monitor) settings

VECTOR (vectorscope) settings

1 Press the [WFM/VECT] button among the display mode buttons to display the waveform monitor on the built-in display.

2 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display

the Config menu.

3 Use [F1] to display the WFM sub menu.

4 Use [F2] to select the method to be used to display the signal waveforms using the Style item.

Parade Overlay

The signal waveforms are arranged and displayed.
The signal waveforms are superimposed onto each other and displayed.

5 Use [F3] to select the signals whose waveforms are to be displayed using the Mode item.

YPbPr RGB Y

Waveforms of the Y, PB and PR signals are displayed.
Waveforms of the R, G and B signals are displayed.
Waveforms of the Y signal only are displayed.

1 Press the [WFM/VECT] button among the display mode buttons to display the vectorscope on the built-in display.

2 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display

the Config menu.

3 Use [F1] to display the Vector sub menu.

4 Use [F2] to select the color bar reference marker using the Bar Target item.

75% 100%

The 75% color bar reference marker is displayed.
The 100% color bar reference marker is displayed.

105

Input/output signal settings

Input signal settings

IN1 and IN2 are exclusive input by SDI signals or HDMI signals. SDI IN3 to 8 are SDI signal inputs. IN-A1 to 4, IN-B1 to 4 can be set only when one of the following optional units has been connected.

AV-UHS5M1 (SDI Input Unit) AV-UHS5M3 (HDMI Input Unit)

IN-A1 to A4 and IN-B1 to B4 can be set. IN-A1 to A3 and IN-B1 to B3 can be set.

Before setting the input signals, first select the input signal to be set using the Input sub menu.

1 Press the

IN OUT

button to light its indicator, and display the Input menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Input sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to select the input signals using the Select item.
The menu display is switched in accordance with the input signals which have been selected. The menu title is set to "MENU: Input (signal type)/input connector (material name)".

Signal type Material name

SDI, HDMI Material name set in "Setting the material names".

106

Input/output signal settings

Input connector

Color Space

P 108

12G SDI IN1, 12G SDI IN2

Standard SDI input 2 lines

HDMI IN1,

HDMI IN2 Exclusionary input

Standard HDMI input 2 lines

12G SDI IN3, 12G SDI IN4

Standard SDI input 2 lines

12G SDI IN5 to 12G SDI IN8

Standard SDI input 4 lines

Option slot IN-A1 to IN-A4

AV-UHS5M1

IN-B1 to IN-B4

SDI input 4 lines

Option slot IN-A1 to IN-A3

AV-UHS5M3

IN-B1 to IN-B3 HDMI input 3 lines

Setting menu and page in this manual

Status

Freeze

Limited

P 109

P 110

Name P 111

Input connector

Up/Down Converter

P 111

12G SDI IN1, 12G SDI IN2

Standard SDI input 2 lines

HDMI IN1,

HDMI IN2 Exclusionary input

Standard HDMI input 2 lines

12G SDI IN3, 12G SDI IN4

Standard SDI input 2 lines

12G SDI IN5 to 12G SDI IN8

Standard SDI input 4 lines

Option slot IN-A1 to IN-A4

AV-UHS5M1

IN-B1 to IN-B4

SDI input 4 lines

Option slot

AV-UHS5M3

IN-A1 to IN-A3 IN-B1 to IN-B3

HDMI input 3 lines

C/C P 112

Setting menu and page in this manual

HDMI Status

HDMI Input

Scale

P 116

P 115

P 120

Camera Settings
P 141

ROI P 156

: Can be set. --: Cannot be set.

107

Input/output signal settings

Settings for the exclusionary input connectors

Set the exclusionary input for the SDI input connectors (12G SDI IN1, 12G SDI IN2)/HDMI input connectors (HDMI IN1, HDMI IN2). These settings are for IN1 and IN2 which can be selected in the Select item of the Input sub menu.

1 Press the

IN OUT

button to light its indicator, and display

the Input menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Input sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to select the input signals using the Select item.
4 Use [F5] to set the input signal type in the SDI/HDMI item.

SDI IN HDMI IN

Selects the SDI signal input to 12G SDI IN1/2 for IN1/2. Even if HDMI signals are input, they are not input to this unit.
Selects the HDMI signal input to HDMI IN1/2 for IN1/2. Even if SDI signals are input, they are not input to this unit.

Settings for the color range for input signals

Set the color range for input signals. You can set all input signals independently.

1 Press the

IN OUT

button to light its indicator, and display

the Input menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Input sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to select the input signals using the Select item.
4 Use [F4] to set the color range in the Color Space item.
HDR BT.2020 High dynamic range, color range entered is Rec.2020.
HDR BT.709 High dynamic range, color range entered is Rec.709.
SDR BT.709 Standard dynamic range, color range entered is Rec.709.

108

Input/output signal settings

Checking the input signal status
You can check the status of input signals. For SDI input signals 1 Use [F1] to display the Status sub menu.

The unit automatically determines the content of input signals and displays the following information.

Format Audio Color Space

Displays the image format information for the SDI signal being input.
Displays the audio information for the SDI signal being input.
Displays the color space information for the SDI signal being input.

For HDMI input signals 1 Use [F1] to display the HDMI Status sub menu.

The unit automatically determines the content of input signals and displays the following information.

Size Dot Clock H-Frequency V-Frequency

Displays the resolution information for the HDMI signal being input.
Displays the dot clock information for the HDMI signal being input.
Displays the horizontal frequency information for the HDMI signal being input.
Displays the vertical frequency information for the HDMI signal being input.

Setting the frame synchronizer
The frame synchronizer can be set to On or Off for each input. The HDMI input frame synchronizer is permanently On. It cannot be set from On to Off or vice versa.
1 On the Input sub menu, use [F2] to select the input to be set using the Select item. Refer to "Input signal settings".
2 Use [F1] to display the FS sub menu.

3 Use [F3] to set the frame synchronizer in the FS item.

Off
Normal Auto

Turns the frame synchronizer Off. The line synchronizer function operates in this case. The line synchronizer function automatically adjusts the phases of input video signals to match the phases of the horizontal sync signals.
Enables the frame synchronizer function. When a signal that is different from the system format is input, the screen turns black.
Enables the frame synchronizer function. Even when a signal that is different from the system format is input, the screen does not turn black. The video output in this case may be disrupted.

p If the output signal phase is set to [0H], Off cannot be selected as the FS item setting. If the FS item is set to Off, this changes to Normal.
p When inputting 3G-SDI Level B Mapping signals, set the frame synchronizer setting to [Auto].

109

Input/output signal settings

Setting the delay amount
The input signals can be delayed. pp This setting is for input signals to 12G SDI IN5 to 8 and the
optional SDI input unit (IN-A1 to 4 and IN-B1 to 4).
1 On the Input sub menu, use [F2] to select the input to be set using the Select item. Refer to "Input signal settings".
2 Use [F1] to display the FS sub menu.
3 Use [F3] to set the delay amount using the Delay item.

Freezing the input signals
The input signals can be frozen and used. While signals are frozen, the tally signals of the corresponding input will not be output.
Setting freeze
1 On the Input sub menu, use [F2] to select the input to be set using the Select item. Refer to "Input signal settings".
2 Use [F1] to display the Freeze sub menu.

Frame Field

The images are frozen frame by frame.
The images are frozen field by field. This is used to freeze moving images. With interlace signals, however, diagonal lines and moving parts appear jagged.

Frame or Field can also be selected while an image is frozen.

3 Press the [F3] to freeze the input image or cancel the freeze.
If the [F3] is pressed while the display is "Off", the video signal is frozen, and the display is set to "On". If the [F3] is pressed while the display is "On", the video signal freezing is canceled, and the display is set to "Off".
The "F" mark appears in front of the name of the material when the signals set for output of multi view displays are frozen.

p When the unit is used with the frame synchronizer function OFF, the output images may be disturbed when freezing is executed, but the frozen images will not be adversely affected.
p If, when the switcher is used with the frame synchronizer function at OFF, "On" is set as the freeze setting, the frame synchronizer function will be automatically switched to ON.

110

Input/output signal settings

Setting the material names
Material names can be given to the input signals. These names can be selected from the default settings or user settings.
1 On the Input sub menu, use [F2] to select the input to be set using the Select item. Refer to "Input signal settings".
2 Use [F1] to display the Name sub menu.

Setting the up-converter
Select the settings for SDI IN5 to SDI IN8, as well as for the up-converter that is built into the optional unit listed below:
p AV-UHS5M1 (SDI Input Unit)
1 On the Input sub menu, use [F2] to select the input to be set using the Select item. Refer to "Input signal settings".
2 Use [F1] to display the Up/Down Converter sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to select the type of material names using the Type item.

Default (default settings)
User (user settings)

Select the material names from the following: IN1, IN2, 12G SDI IN3 to 8, IN-A1 to 4, IN-B1 to 4
The material names are set using up to 32 characters.

3 Use [F2] to set the image movement detection sensitivity using the Move Detect item.

Toward still images

Standard

Toward moving images

4 Use [F3] to set the extent of the edge sharpness for the images using the Sharp item.

Not sharp edges

Standard

Very sharp edges

111

Input/output signal settings

Color Corrector
Make settings for the Color Correctors built in to SDI IN5 to SDI IN8 and the following optional units.
1 On the Input sub menu, use [F2] to select the input to be set using the Select item. Refer to "Input signal settings".
Color Corrector settings
1 Use [F1] to display the C/C Operation sub menu.

Tone curve
Corrects the tone of the input signal. Set the tone curve to adjust the brightness, contrast, etc., of images. You can adjust the white balance and the color tone by separately adjusting each of the R, G, and B colors.

2 Use [F2] to set the Color Corrector to enable (On)/ disable (Off).

3 Use [F3] to set the color range of the input signal in the Limit item.

Off

No limit on color range.

108

The amplitude level of each color (R, G, B) is

limited to between 0% and 108%.

104

The amplitude level of each color (R, G, B) is

limited to between 0% and 104%.

100

The amplitude level of each color (R, G, B) is

limited to between 0% and 100%.

Tone1 Black Tone2 Gray L Tone3 Gray H Tone4 White

Adjusts the black level. Adjusts the gray Low level. Adjusts the gray High level. Adjusts the white level.

1 Use [F1] to display the C/C Tone1 Black sub menu.

Process control
1 Use [F1] to display the C/C Process sub menu.
2 Use [F2] to set the gain value of the Y signal in the Y-Gain item.
3 Use [F3] to set the value of the pedestal level in the Pedestal item.
4 Use [F4] to set the gain value of the saturation in the C-Gain item.
5 Use [F5] to set the amount of change of the color hue in the Hue item.

2 Use [F2] to adjust the R signal of the black level in the Red item.

3 Use [F3] to adjust the G signal of the black level in the Green item.

4 Use [F4] to adjust the B signal of the black level in the Blue item.

5 Use [F5] to make the link settings for the adjustment value in the RGB Link item.

Off

RGB can be independently set in each of

the C/C Tone1 Black, C/C Tone2 Gray L, C/C

Tone3 Gray H, and C/C Tone4 White sub

menus.

The Red setting value is set in Green and

Blue in each of the C/C Tone1 Black, C/C

Tone2 Gray L, C/C Tone3 Gray H, and C/C

Tone4 White sub menus.

112

Input/output signal settings

6 Use [F1] to display the C/C Tone2 Gray L sub menu.
7 Use [F2] to adjust the R signal of the Gray Low level in the Red item.
8 Use [F3] to adjust the G signal of the Gray Low level in the Green item.
9 Use [F4] to adjust the B signal of the Gray Low level in the Blue item.
Use [F1] to display the C/C Tone3 Gray H sub menu.
Use [F2] to adjust the Gray High level of the R signal in the Red item.
Use [F3] to adjust the Gray High level of the G signal in the Green item.
Use [F4] to adjust the Gray High level of the B signal in the Blue item.
> Use [F1] to display the C/C Tone4 White sub menu.

Gain adjustments for the color matrix
1 Use [F1] to display the C/C Matrix R/G sub menu.
2 Use [F2] to set the gain value of the R-G axial direction in the R-G item.
3 Use [F3] to set the gain value of the R-B axial direction in the R-B item.
4 Use [F4] to set the gain value of the G-R axial direction in the G-R item.
5 Use [F5] to set the gain value of the G-B axial direction in the G-B item.
6 Use [F1] to display the C/C Matrix B sub menu.
7 Use [F2] to set the gain value of the B-R axial direction in the B-R item.
8 Use [F3] to set the gain value of the B-G axial direction in the B-G item.

Use [F2] to adjust the R signal of the white level in the Red item.
Use [F3] to adjust the G signal of the white level in the Green item.
Use [F4] to adjust the B signal of the white level in the Blue item.
Note pp The unit joins the set black level, gray Low level, gray
High level, and white level with a simplified curve to create a tone curve. The desired tone curve may not be achieved, depending on the setting values.

113

Input/output signal settings
Initializing the color corrector 1 Use [F1] to display the C/C Setting sub menu.

2 Use [F2] to select the initialization target in the Init Target item.

Process Tone
RGB Matrix All

The settings in the C/C Process sub menu are initialized.
The settings in the C/C Tone1 Black, C/C Tone2 Gray L, C/C Tone3 Gray H, and C/C Tone4 White sub menu are initialized.
The settings in the C/C Matrix R/G and C/C Matrix B sub menu are initialized.
All are initialized.

Copying settings
You can copy the Color Corrector setting information that was set for another input.
1 Use [F1] to display the C/C Setting sub menu.

2 Use [F4] to select the copy target in the Copy Target item.
3 When the Copy From item in [F5] is pressed, the settings selected as the Copy Target are copied.

114

Input/output signal settings

Setting the HDMI input signals
Set the HDMI input signals when the HDMI input unit (optional) or full-HD HDMI input unit (optional) has been connected. Signals with the following resolutions can be input.

HDMI input signals

Standard (Digital)

XGA

(1024×768)/60 Hz

WXGA

(1280×768)/60 Hz

SXGA

(1280×1024)/60 Hz

WSXGA+

(1680×1050)/60 Hz

UXGA

(1600×1200)/60 Hz

WUXGA

(1920×1200)/60 Hz

WQHD

(2560×1440)/60 Hz

720/59.94p

(1280×720)/59.94 Hz, 60 Hz

720/50p

(1280×720)/50 Hz

1080/59.94i

(1920×1080)/59.94Hz, 60 Hz

1080/50i

(1920×1080)/50 Hz

1080/23.98p

(1920×1080)/23.98 Hz

1080/24p

(1920×1080)/24 Hz

1080/25p

(1920×1080)/25 Hz

1080/29.97p

(1920×1080)/29.97 Hz

1080/59.94p

(1920×1080)/59.94Hz, 60 Hz

1080/50p

(1920×1080)/50 Hz

2160/23.98p

(3840×2160)/23.98 Hz

2160/24p

(3840×2160)/24 Hz

2160/25p

(3840×2160)/25 Hz

2160/29.97p

(3840×2160)/29.97 Hz

2160/59.94p

(3840×2160)/59.94Hz, 60 Hz

2160/50p

(3840×2160)/50 Hz

HDMI Input Unit (Digital)
AV-UHS5M3
: Can be set. --: Cannot be set.

pp If signals with any other resolutions or frequencies are input, the signals cannot be imported correctly. The images which are output at a time like this may be black or disturbed.
pp These units are incompatible with the HDCP (Highbandwidth Digital Content Protection).
1 On the Input sub menu, use [F2] to select the input to be set using the Select item. Refer to "Input signal settings".
2 Use [F1] to display the HDMI Input sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to select the scaling method.

Fit-V Fit-H Full

The aspect ratio of the input images is maintained, and the size of the images is increased or reduced in accordance with the vertical resolution.
The aspect ratio of the input images is maintained, and the size of the images is increased or reduced in accordance with the horizontal resolution.
The size of the input images is increased or reduced in accordance with the system resolution. (The aspect ratio of the input images is not kept the same. The rate at which the image size is increased or reduced in the vertical direction and in the horizontal direction differs.)

115

Input/output signal settings
Displaying the HDMI input signal information
These are used to display the information concerning the HDMI input signal images. The information cannot be changed.
1 On the Input sub menu, use [F2] to select the input to be set using the Select item. Refer to "Input signal settings".
2 Use [F1] to display the HDMI Status sub menu.

Size Dot Clock H-Frequency V-Frequency

This indicates the pixel count of the images. This indicates the dot clock frequency of the images. This indicates the horizontal frequency of the images. This indicates the vertical frequency of the images.

The formats supported are listed below. <HDMI formats supported>

HDMI input signal

XGA WXGA SXGA WSXGA+ UXGA WUXGA WQHD 720/59.94p 720/50p 1080/59.94i 1080/50i 1080/23.98p 1080/24p 1080/25p 1080/29.97p 1080/59.94p 1080/50p 2160/23.98p 2160/24p 2160/25p 2160/29.97p 2160/59.94p 2160/50p

1024×768 1280×768 1280×1024 1680×1050 1600×1200 1920×1200 2560×1440 1280×720 1280×720 1920×1080 1920×1080 1920×1080 1920×1080 1920×1080 1920×1080 1920×1080 1920×1080 3840×2160 3840×2160 3840×2160 3840×2160 3840×2160 3840×2160

Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital

Dot clock frequency
(MHz) 65.0 79.5 108.0 146.2 162.0 154.0 241.5 74.25/1.001 74.25 74.25/1.001 74.25 74.2 74.2 74.2 74.2 148.5/1.001 148.5 297.0/1.001 297.0 297.0 297.0/1.001 594.0/1.001 594.0

Frequency

Horizontal (kHz)
48.36

Vertical (Hz)
60.00

47.78

59.87

63.98

60.02

65.29

59.95

75.00

60.00

74.04

59.95

88.79

59.95

44.96

60.00/1.001

37.50

50.00

33.72

60.00/1.001

28.13

50.00

27.0

24.00/1.001

27.0

24.00

28.1

25.00

33.7

30.00

67.50/1.001

60.00/1.001

56.25

50.00

53.9

24.00/1.001

54.0

24.00

56.2

25.00

67.40

30.00

134.9

60.00/1.001

112.5

50.00

pp If the format of the input signals is not supported, it may not be possible to import the signals properly, and a black image or disturbed image may appear.

116

Input/output signal settings

Output signal settings

12G SDI OUT1 to 12G SDI OUT5 are SDI signal outputs. HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2 is HDMI signal output. OUT-A1 to OUT-A4, OUT-B1 to OUT-B4 can be set only when one of the following optional units has been connected.

AV-UHS5M2 (SDI Output Unit) AV-UHS5M4 (HDMI Output Unit)

OUT-A1 to A4 and OUT-B1 to B4 can be set. OUT-A1 to A3 and OUT-B1 to B3 can be set.

Before proceeding to set the output signals, first select the output signals to be set using the Output sub menu.

1 Press the

IN OUT

button to light its indicator, and display the Output menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Output sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to select the output signals using the Select item.
The menu display is switched depending on the selected output signals. The menu title is set to "MENU: Output (signal type)/output connector".
Signal type SDI, HDMI
<Example of menu (HDMI)>

Output connector

12G SDI OUT1 to 12G SDI OUT5 HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2
OUT-A1 to OUT-A4
OUT-A1 to OUT-A3
OUT-B1 to OUT-B4
OUT-B1 to OUT-B3

Standard SDI output 5 lines
Standard HDMI output 2 lines
AV-UHS5M2 SDI output 4 lines
AV-UHS5M4 HDMI output 3 lines
AV-UHS5M2 SDI output 4 lines
AV-UHS5M4 HDMI output 3 lines

Assign P 118

Setting menu and page in this manual

SDI Output HDMI Output

Down Converter

P 118

P 119

P 120

Simplified

Scale P 120

: Can be set. --: Cannot be set.

117

Input/output signal settings

Assigning the output signals
The output signals can be assigned to the 12G SDI OUT connector and HDMI OUT connector.
1 On the Output sub menu, use [F2] to select the output to be set using the Select item. Refer to "Output signal settings".
2 Use [F1] to display the Assign sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to set the type of output signal using the Source item.

PGM PVW CLN
ME PGM AUX1 to 4 MV1, MV2 KeyOut

An image provided with the wipe, mix, key, downstream key or other effect is output at the switcher's main line output.
This is the preview output that enables the next operation to be checked before it is executed.
The clean signal (the image resulting when the key, downstream key or other effect has been removed from the PGM signal) is output.
ME PGM signals (images without the downstream key effects) are output.
The signals selected by the 4 lines of AUX buses (AUX1 to AUX4) are output.
The multi view display signals are output. Multiple input signals and output signals are reduced in size and output to one screen.
The key signal is output.

4 Use [F3] to set the output mode using the Mode item.

Normal
Simplified downconverter Downconverter

The same signals as the system format signals are output.
When the system format is 2160/59.94p, the signals are output in the 1080/59.94p format.
This can be selected when the SDI output unit (optional: AV-UHS5M1) has been connected. When the system format is 2160/59.94p, the signals are output in the 1080/59.94p, 1080/59.94i or 720/59.94p format. When the system format is 1080/59.94p, the signals are output in the 1080/59.94i or 720/59.94p format. When the system format is 1080/59.94i, the signals are output in the 720/59.94p format. When the system format is 2160/29p, 25p, 24p, or 23p, they are output as 1080/29psf, 25psf, 24psf, and 23psf, respectively.

Setting the SDI output color range
The color range can be set for the SDI output signal images. pp You can set all output signals independently.
1 On the Output sub menu, use [F4] to set Color Space.
HDR BT.2020 High dynamic range, color range output is Rec.2020.
HDR BT.709 High dynamic range, color range output is Rec.709.
SDR BT.709 Standard dynamic range, color range output is Rec.709.

118

Input/output signal settings

Setting the HDMI output signals
Set the HDMI output signals of the standard output (HDMI OUT) and the HDMI output signals if the HDMI output unit (optional) has been connected.
1 On the Output sub menu, use [F2] to select the output to be set using the Select item. Refer to "Output signal settings".
2 From the Output sub menu, use [F4] to set the output color range in the Color Space item.
HDR BT.2020 High dynamic range, color range output is Rec.2020.
HDR BT.709 High dynamic range, color range output is Rec.709.
SDR BT.709 Standard dynamic range, color range output is Rec.709.
3 Use [F1] to display the Assign sub menu.

4 Use [F2] to set the type of output signal using the Source item.

PGM PVW CLN
ME PGM AUX1 to 4 MV1, MV2 KeyOut

The settings below are possible when an HDMI Output Unit (optional) is connected.

5 Use [F1] to display the HDMI Output sub menu.

6 Use [F2] to select the resolution of the images to be output using the Size item.

Auto
XGA WXGA SXGA WXGA+ UXGA WUXGA WQHD Native

The equipment information of the output destination is captured by the HDMI signals, and the images are output at the optimum resolution. (1024 × 768) / 60 Hz (1280 × 768) / 60 Hz (1280 × 1024) / 60 Hz (1680 × 1050) / 60 Hz (1600 × 1200) / 60 Hz (1920 × 1200) / 60 Hz (2560 × 1440) / 60 Hz Same format as the system format is output.

7 Use [F3] to set the output color space in the Color item.

Auto RGB YUV444
YUV422

Device information about the connection destination is obtained via the HDMI signal, and output uses the optimum color space accordingly.
The color space is set with the RGB format.
The color space is set with the Y, Cb, Cr at 4:4:4. (With this method, for each 4 horizontal pixels, 4 pixels each are sampled of the luminance component and 2 color difference components)
The color space is set with the Y, Cb, Cr at 4:2:2. (With this method, for each 2 horizontal pixels, 1 pixel each is sampled of the color difference components, and each pixel is sampled of the luminance component)

119

Input/output signal settings

8 Use [F4] to select the scaling method using the Scale item.

Fit-V
Fit-H
Full Fullx80% Fullx90%

The aspect ratio of the output images is maintained, and the size of the images is increased or reduced in accordance with the vertical resolution. (Black bands are inserted into the areas where there are no images. The protruding parts of the images are cropped.)
The aspect ratio of the output images is maintained, and the size of the images is increased or reduced in accordance with the horizontal resolution. (Black bands are inserted into the areas where there are no images. The protruding parts of the images are cropped.)
The size of the output images is increased or reduced in accordance with the system resolution.
The size of the output image is increased or reduced in accordance with the 80% size of the system resolution.
The size of the output image is increased or reduced in accordance with the 90% size of the system resolution.

p The aspect ratio is not maintained at the Full, Fullx80% or Fullx90% setting. The rate at which the image size is increased or reduced in the vertical direction and in the horizontal direction differs.

9 Use [F5] to set the image movement detection sensitivity using the Move Detect item.

Toward still images

Standard

Toward moving images

Setting the down-converter (optional)

Select the settings for the down-converter that is built into the SDI output unit (AV-UHS5M2).

1 On the Output sub menu, use [F2] to select the output to be set using the Select item. Refer to "Output signal settings".

2 Use [F1] to display the Down Converter sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to set the delay time of the output using the Delay item.

Minimum 1F Fix

Output is with the minimum delay of the system. Refer to "Adjusting the output signal phase" for the size of phase delays.
The image is output in-phase with a delay of 1 frame from the system image (HD).

4 Use [F3] to set the extent of the edge sharpness for the images using the Sharp item.

Standard

Very sharp edges

120

Input/output signal settings

Setting the sync signals

Adjusting the output signal phase

The sync signals to be used by the system can be selected. External sync: For synchronization with an external sync signal (gen-lock). The reference input signal is looped through and output.

Black burst signal (vertical phase of 0H)

BB Advanced

Black burst signal Vertical phase of 90H when the 59.94i or 59.94p format is selected; vertical phase of 75H when the 50i or 50p format is selected

Tri-level sync Tri-level sync signal (vertical phase of 0H)

Internal

For synchronization with an internal reference signal (INT). The REFOUT signal (black burst signal) is output from the two reference connectors. p This cannot be selected when the system
format is 1080/24PsF.

p When the format is 1080/24PsF, only Tri-level sync can be selected.
p This unit supports synchronization signals for field frequencies that are same as those of the system format. When the unit is set to the 1080/23.98PsF format, however, the unit also supports black burst signals with 10F-1D (compliant with the SMPTE318M standard).

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display

the System menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Reference sub menu.

The phase of the output video signals can be adjusted.

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display

the System menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Output Phase sub menu.

3 Use [F2], and select "0H" or "1H" using the System item.

The output video signals are output to the

system Reference signal with using in-phase.

The frame synchronizer function is ON for all

input signals.

The output video signals are output to the

system Reference signal with 1H delay.

When the frame synchronizer function is ON,

the output video signals are output with

1 frame + 1H delay.

4 Use [F3] to adjust H phase using the H-Phase item. H-Phase can be adjusted within a range of 0.50H to +0.49H.
p The setting displayed on the menu differs depending on the system format.
5 Use [F4] to adjust V phase using the V-Phase item. V-Phase can be adjusted within a range of 100H to +100H.

3 Use [F2], select the sync signal using the Sync item, and press the [F2] to enter the selection.

4 Use [F3] to select the setup level of the black burst signal in the internal synchronization mode using the BB Setup item. This setting takes effect when the video system is 59.94i or 59.94p. The setup level is fixed at 0 IRE when the system is 50i or 50p.

5 The genlock status is displayed in the Gen Lock item.

Locked UnLock

Synchronized with the external sync signal or internal reference signal.
Not synchronized with the external sync signal or internal reference signal.

121

Input/output signal settings

Reference (System standard)

Approx. 0.2H

·1HOutput (+1H)
Shortest Output(+0.5H)

Line Synchronizer Range

Approx. 0.2H

Approx. 0.2H to +0.8H

Internal Fixed DL

Line Synchronizer Range Approx. 0.7H to +0.3H

Internal Fixed DL

Approx. 0.3H
+0.5H

OutputPhaseVariableRange H Phase (0.5H to +0.5H) + V Phase (±100 lines)
OutputPhaseVariableRange H Phase (0.5H to +0.5H) + V Phase (±100 lines)

LongestOutput (+1.5H)

·0HOutput (1FdelayforReferenceandin-phaseoutput)
Approx. 0.2H

Approx. 0.3H +0.5H

FS Range

MAX less than approximately 1 frame Internal Fixed DL

Line Synchronizer Range Approx. +0.3H to +1.3H

Internal Fixed DL

OutputPhaseVariableRange
H Phase (0.5H to +0.5H) + V Phase (±100 lines)

OutputPhaseVariableRange H Phase (0.5H to +0.5H) + V Phase (±100 lines)
Reference (Phase Reference)
Line Synchronizer Range: Range for automatic phase adjustment.

122

Input/output signal settings

Frame synchronizer

Input signals

FS: On, Off
Mode: Normal, Auto

See "Setting the frame synchronizer".

Video effects

Output signals 1

Down-converter

Delay:

Minimun or 1F Fix

See "Setting the down-converter (optional)".

Output Phase
System

Input

Mode

Nonsynchronized
input

Output signal 1 Normal

Phase

Delay amount

Output signal 2 Down Converter
(Minimun)

Phase

Delay amount

Output signal 2 Down Converter
(1F Fix)

Phase

Delay amount

Sync signal (Reference): Black burst signal (BB), tri-level sync signal (Tri-level sync), internal reference signal (Internal)

Normal

Off

Not possible Reference+1H 1H

1+90H

1H+90H In-phase 1H+1F

with 1

Normal Auto

On
On (Forced)

Possible Possible

Reference+1H Max. 1F+1H

1+90H

Max. 1F+1H +90H

In-phase Max.

with 1

2F+1H

Normal/

(Example 1) Auto

Possible

(Forced)

In-phase with Max.

Reference

1+90H

Max. 1F+90H

In-phase Max.

with 1

Sync signal (Reference): Black burst signal (BB Advanced)

Normal

Off

Not possible Reference

1+90H

1H+90H In-phase 1F+1H

90H+1H

with 1

Normal Auto

On
On (Forced)

Possible Possible

Reference 90H+1H

Max. 1F90H +1H

1+90H

Max. 1F+1H

In-phase with 1

Max. 2F90H +1H

Normal/

(Example 2) Auto

Possible

(Forced)

Reference 90H

Max. 1F90H

1+90H

Max.

(In-phase with 1F

Reference)

In-phase Max.

with 1

2F90H

p For 1080/50i and 720/50p, the 90H indicated above becomes 75H. p Conversion based on the HD format applies for 1H. p When DVE effect and PinP effect have been used as the video effects, the output signal is delayed by +1F. p When images are output to a multi view display, they are delayed by +1F.

123

Input/output signal settings

<Phase relationship between input signals and output signals>
(for 1080/59.94i format)

(Example 1)

Input signals

(non-synchronized)

Sync signal (Reference)

1F (frame)

Output signal 1

Max. 1F

F1 F1

F2 F2

Output signal 2 (90H) Output signal 2 (1F)

Max. 1F+90H Max. 2F

(Example 2)

Input signals

(non-synchronized)

Sync signal (Reference)

1F (frame)

Output signal 1

Output signal 2 (90H) Output signal 2 (1F)

Max. 1F90H
Max. 1F

Max. 2F90H

124

Input/output signal settings

Setting the multi view display

Setting the screen layout

You can select one of the following 10 patterns for the screen layout. The multi view display of this unit supports MV1 and MV2. You can select one of these to display on the built-in display.

4Split 9Split

5-aSplit 10-aSplit

5-bSplit 10-bSplit

6-aSplit 12Split

6-bSplit 16Split

Display of the following signals can be assigned to sub scens 1 to 16.
Signals that can be assigned IN1, IN2, SDI IN3 to 8, IN-A1 to 4, IN-B1 to 4, Black, CBGD1, CBGD2, CBAR, Still1V, Still1K, Still2V, Still2K, Clip1V, Clip1K, Clip2V, Clip2K, PGM, PVW, CLN, ME PGM, Key Out, MV1, MV2, AUX1 to 4, Clock

1 Press the

XPT MV

button to light its indicator, and display the Multi View Display menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the MV Split sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to set the split-screen display mode using the Split item.

4 Use [F3] to set the size mode for the split screen in the Size item.

Fit

The sizes of the split frame and the split screen will be the same.

The sizes of the split frame and the split screen will be smaller, and the material name,

level meter, etc., are displayed on the outside of the split screen.

5 Use [F1] to display the MV Pattern 1/4 to MV Pattern 4/4 sub menus.
6 Use [F2] to [F5] to set the names of the signals to be displayed on the sub screens (1 to 16).
p When an input signal (IN1, IN2, SDI IN3 to 8, IN-A1 to 4, IN-B1 to 4) is selected, the display of the material name set in Input menu Name sub menu depends on the characters or symbols used.
p When AUX buses (AUX1 to 4) are selected as the input signal, the material name displayed inside [ ] depends on the characters and symbols.
p When the AUX bus for which "MV" has been selected is displayed on the sub screen of the multi view display, the images are looped as if two mirrors were facing each other.
p 12 split frames cannot be selected for 720p.
<Display modes>

4Split

9Split

5-aSplit

9 10

10-aSplit

5-bSplit

9 10

10-bSplit

6-aSplit

5 67

8 9 10 11 12
12Split

6-bSplit

9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16 16Split

125

Input/output signal settings

Setting the split frame and characters

Set the frame, character brightness and background of the split screens to be displayed on the multi view display.

1 Press the

XPT MV

button to light its indicator, and display

the Multi View Display menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the MV Frame sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to set the split frame brightness and split frame display using the Frame item.

LUM0%, LUM25%, LUM50%, LUM75%, LUM100%
Off

Select one of these settings for the brightness of the split frame (gray scale).
The split frame is not displayed.

4 Use [F3] to set the character brightness and character display using the Character item.

LUM0%, LUM25%, LUM50%, LUM75%, LUM100%
Off

Select one of these character (gray scale) brightness settings.
The characters are not displayed. Neither is the character background shown.

5 Use [F4] to set whether the character background (half-tone) is to be displayed using the Label item.

The character background is displayed.

Off

The character background is not displayed.

p This is enabled when Fit mode is on.

Setting the tally displays

Set the tally displays to be superimposed onto the split frame of the multi view display. You can set 4 tally groups on this unit, and you can set materials for each of the groups. Tally groups 1 and 2 can be displayed on the multi view display.

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display

the System menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Tally MV Color sub menu.

Group1 Group2

Fixed to Red. Fixed to Green.

3 Use [F1] to display the Tally Target sub menu.
4 Use [F2] to [F5] to select the material to allocate to Group1 to 4.

PGM PVW CLN ME PGM KeyOut AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4

Program video signal Preview video signal Clean signal ME program video signal Key output signal AUX1 bus output signal AUX2 bus output signal AUX3 bus output signal AUX4 bus output signal

5 Press the

XPT MV

button to light its indicator, and display

the Multi View Display menu.

6 Use [F1] to display the Tally Group 1 / 2 sub menu.
p Groups 1 and 2 set in 1 to 4 above can be set to display on the multi view display.

126

Input/output signal settings

7 Use [F2] to [F4] to set the tally displays to overlay on the split frame of the multi view display.

User type setting procedure

Box

Label Left

IN1

Label Right

Tally displays are displayed.

Off

No tally displays are shown.

Changing the material names

The material names of the input signals (IN1, IN2, SDI IN3 to SDI IN8, IN-A1 to IN-A4, IN-B1 to IN-B4) to be set on the multi view display can be changed. These names can be selected from the default settings or user settings.

1 Press the

IN OUT

button to light its indicator, and display

the Input menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Input sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to select the input to be set using the Select item. Refer to "Input signal settings".

4 Use [F1] to display the Name sub menu.

1 On the Name sub menu, use [F2] to select "User" using the Type item.
2 Press [F3] to display the keyboard screen.
3 Use [F1] to [F3], the positioner, the rotary encoders, and the number keys to enter a name, then press [F4]. To clear the name which has been input and close the keyboard screen, press [F5]. Refer to "Keyboard screen operations".

Setting the level meters

You can display at the top of each split screen the level meters for the embedded audio signals transmitted together with SDI/HDMI input and output.
Left display: Channel 1 of group 1
Right display: Channel 2 of group 1

1 Press the

XPT MV

button to light its indicator, and display

the Multi View Display menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Display sub menu.

5 Use [F2] to select the type of material names using the Type item.

Default (default settings)
User (user settings)

The following material names are selected automatically. IN1, IN2, SDI IN3 to SDI IN8, IN-A1 to IN-A4, IN-B1 to IN-B4
The material names are set using up to 32 characters.

3 Use [F2] to set the level meter display using the Level Meter item.

OFF IN ON
OUT ON
IN/OUT ON

The level meters are not displayed.
The level meters for the input signal, Clip, and color bar are displayed.
The level meters for PGM/PVW/ME PGM/ CLN/AUX are displayed.
The level meters for the input signal, Clip, color bar, and PGM/PVW/ME PGM/CLN/AUX are displayed.

127

Input/output signal settings
Setting the input signal marks
The status of the input signals can be displayed in front of the material names displayed on the split screens.
"F" mark: This appears when the input signals are frozen.
" ! " mark: This appears when no signals are input or when signals with different formats are input.
p When the "F" mark is displayed, the "!" mark is not displayed.
1 On the Display sub menu, use [F3] to set the input signal status display using the Input Status item.

The input signal status is displayed.

Off

The input signal status is not displayed.

Setting the markers
Safety markers can be displayed for the multi view materials.
1 On the Display sub menu, use [F4] to set the marker display using the Marker item.

4:3 16:9 Off

The markers are displayed using the 4:3 aspect ratio.
The markers are displayed using the 16:9 aspect ratio.
The markers are not displayed.

2 Use [F5] to set the size of the markers using the Marker Size item.

128

Input/output signal settings

Ancillary settings for the AUX bus, PGM, and PVW

Set the function that passes through the V ancillary data and embedded audio data of the SDI/HDMI input signal.

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display

the System menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Ancillary1 sub menu.

Setting for clean output signals

6 Use [F5] to select "ON" or "OFF" using the CLN item.

OFF ON

The ancillary data and embedded audio of the CLN outputs are not passed through.
The ancillary data and embedded audio of the CLN outputs are passed through.

Setting for the output signals of the multi view display 7 Use [F1] to display the Ancillary2 sub menu.

Setting for the output signals of the AUX buses (AUX1 to AUX4)

3 Use [F2] to select "ON" or "OFF" using the AUX item.

OFF ON

The ancillary data and embedded audio of the AUX bus (AUX1 to 4) outputs are not passed through.
The ancillary data and embedded audio of the AUX bus (AUX1 to 4) outputs are passed through.

Setting for the program output signals

4 Use [F3] to select "ON" or "OFF" using the PGM item.

OFF ON

The ancillary data and embedded audio of the PGM/ME PGM outputs are not passed through.
The ancillary data and embedded audio of the PGM/ME PGM outputs are passed through.

Setting for the preview output signals

5 Use [F4] to select "ON" or "OFF" using the PVW item.

OFF ON

The ancillary data and embedded audio of the PVW outputs are not passed through.
The ancillary data and embedded audio of the PVW outputs are passed through.

8 Use [F1] to select "PGM", "PVW" or "OFF" using the MV item.

PGM PVW OFF

The ancillary data and embedded audio of the PGM are passed through to all MV outputs.
The ancillary data and embedded audio of the PVW are passed through to all MV outputs.
The ancillary data and the embedded audio are not passed through any MV outputs.

Notes
pp If Key and DSK are combined, the audio from them are also superimposed.
pp When the AUX setting is ON, the DSK1 audio that is superimposed on AUX1 is simultaneously superimposed on AUX1 for output. Similarly, the DSK2 audio that is superimposed on AUX2 is simultaneously superimposed on AUX2 for output.
pp VANC data is not passed if the format of the input signal is different to the system format.

129

Input/output signal settings

Audio settings for the AUX bus, PGM, and PVW

Select one item of SDI/HDMI input signal embedded audio data and make settings for the function for the passing through of each of the output signals. For each output signal, you can select only 1 input signal from the following.

IN1, IN2

The embedded audio in SDI or HDMI input signals is passed through.

SDI IN3 to 8

The embedded audio in SDI input signals is passed through.

IN-A1 to 4 IN-B1 to 4 Follow Video OFF

When option slot A is used, the embedded audio in SDI or HDMI input signals is passed through.
When option slot B is used, the embedded audio in SDI or HDMI input signals is passed through.
The embedded audio in input signals selected by a bus is passed through.
The embedded audio is not passed through.

The ancillary settings for each bus should be switched ON to enable this function.

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display

the System menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Audio1 sub menu.

Audio setting for the program output signals 4 Use [F1] to display the Audio2 sub menu.
5 Use [F2] to set the input signals that will pass through embedded audio in the PGM item.
Audio setting for the preview output signals 6 Use [F3] to set the input signals that will pass through embedded audio in the PVW item.
Audio setting for clean output signals 7 Use [F4] to set the input signals that will pass through embedded audio in the CLN item.
Audio setting for the output signals of the multi view display
8 Use [F5] to set the input signals that will pass through embedded audio in the MV item.

Audio setting for the output signals of the AUX buses (AUX1 to AUX4)
3 Use [F2] to [F5] to set the input signals that will pass through embedded audio in the AUX1 to 4 items.

130

System settings

Setting the system format

One system format (input/output signal) can be selected.
Do not change the format during any of the following operations: ppWhen reading from a memory card or saving to a memory
card ppWhen restoring data from video memory or saving data to
internal storage ppWhen recording moving images or still images ppWhen moving images are playing

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display

the System menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Format sub menu.

3 Use [F2], select the format using the Format item, and press the [F2] to enter the selection.
Switcher mode settings
1 From the Format sub menu, use [F3] to select either 2K or 4K in the Switcher item, then press [F3] to confirm the selection.
p When the Switcher mode is changed from either 2K to 4K or from 4K to 2K, a dialog is displayed, so press [F1] to restart the unit. The menu values are initialized after restart.
Dynamic range and color range settings
1 From the Format sub menu, use [F4] to select the dynamic range and color range of the image signals handled by this unit in the Color Space item, then press [F4] to confirm the selection.
HDR BT.2020 The dynamic range is HDR and color range operates as BT.2020.
HDR BT.709 The dynamic range is HDR and color range operates as BT.709.
SDR BT.709 The dynamic range is SDR and color range operates as BT.709.

131

System settings

Setting the crosspoints

Assigning signals to the crosspoints

External video input signals and internally generated signals can be assigned to crosspoint buttons 1 to 24. When one of the crosspoint buttons 1 to 24 is held down, the status of the signal assigned is displayed on the built-in display while the button is held down.

Changing the current assignment of the signals selected by the crosspoint buttons will cause the positions of the lit crosspoint buttons to change to correspond with the assignment change. The images output at this time will remain unchanged.

The table below lists the materials which can be assigned.

Signal

What appears on the display

Description

IN1, IN2

SDI/HDMI input 1, 2

SDI IN3 to SDI IN8 SDI IN3 to SDI IN8

SDI input 3 to 8

IN-A1 to 4, IN-B1 to 4

Option slot (SDI, HDMI)

Black

BLK

Internally generated signal (black)

CBGD1, CBGD2

Internally generated signal (color background)

CBAR

Internally generated signal (color bar)

Still1V, Still1K, Still2V, Still2K

Still image video memory

Clip1V, Clip1K, Clip2V, Clip2K

Moving image video memory

CLN

CLN (AUX bus and built-in display images only)

KeyOut

KeyOut (AUX bus and built-in display images only)

Shift

SHIFT

SHIFT function

None

No assignment

p The image will not be changed by pressing any button to which "None" is assigned.

The table below lists the default settings.

Button

What appears on the display

XPT1

IN1

XPT2

IN2

XPT3

SDI IN 3

XPT4

SDI IN 4

XPT5

SDI IN 5

XPT6

SDI IN 6

XPT7

SDI IN 7

XPT8

SDI IN 8

Button
XPT9 XPT10 XPT11 XPT12 XPT13 XPT14 XPT15 XPT16

What appears on the display CBAR CBGD1 CBGD2 None None None None None

Button
XPT17 XPT18 XPT19 XPT20 XPT21 XPT22 XPT23 XPT24

What appears on the display None None None None None None None None

132

System settings

Setting the crosspoint switching

The timing at which the crosspoints are to be switched can be set. This switching involves the operations of the crosspoint buttons and [Cut] button.

1 Press the

XPT MV

button to light its indicator, and display

the XPT menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the XPT Switch sub menu.

3 Use [F2], and select the switching timing using the Timing item.

Any Field1 Field2

The crosspoints are switched in the nearest field. This is suited to live applications.
The crosspoints are switched in field 1. This is suited to editing applications.
The crosspoints are switched in field 2. This is suited to editing applications.

133

System settings

Button assignments

Setting the user buttons

The user can assign several functions which can be set using the menu items into eight user buttons (U1 to U8). The user buttons light in amber when the assigned function is ON and are off when the assigned function is OFF. Each time the user button is pressed, the function setting alternates between ON and OFF.

The table below lists the functions which can be assigned to the user buttons (U1 to U8).

Function name

Description of function

KEY1 PVW Output the KEY1 image to the preview output.

KEY2 PVW Output the KEY2 image to the preview output.

KEY3 PVW Output the KEY3 image to the preview output.

DSK1 PVW Output the DSK1 image to the preview output.

DSK2 PVW Output the DSK2 image to the preview output.

GPII-EN

Enables or disables GPI-In.

GPIO-EN Enables or disables GPI-Out.

SHIFT

Switches all the A/B bus and AUX bus crosspoints between front and rear.

AUX TRANS Enables or disables the AUX bus transitions.

AUX1 TRANS Enables or disables the AUX1 bus transitions.

AUX2 TRANS Enables or disables the AUX2 bus transitions.

DSK1 on AUX1 Adds DSK to the AUX1 output.

DSK2 on AUX2 Adds DSK to the AUX2 output.

Effect Dissolve Switches effect dissolve between ON and OFF.

Macro Attach Switches macro attach between ON and OFF.

Dissolve Nothing is assigned.

w Default settings

Button U1 U2 U3 U4

Function name KEY1 PVW KEY2 PVW KEY3 PVW DSK1 PVW

Button U5 U6 U7 U8

Function name DSK2 PVW AUX Trans
Effect Dissolve SHIFT

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display

the Config menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the User Button1 sub menu and User Button2 sub menu.

p User Button1 to 4 sub menu

3 Use [F2] to select the function to be assigned to the [U1] button using the User1 item.
4 Use [F3] to select the function to be assigned to the [U2] button using the User2 item.
5 Use [F4] to select the function to be assigned to the [U3] button using the User3 item.
6 Use [F5] to select the function to be assigned to the [U4] button using the User4 item.
p User Button5 to 8 sub menu

7 Use [F2] to select the function to be assigned to the [U5] button using the User5 item.
8 Use [F3] to select the function to be assigned to the [U6] button using the User6 item.
9 Use [F4] to select the function to be assigned to the [U7] button using the User7 item.
Use [F5] to select the function to be assigned to the [U8] button using the User8 item.

134

System settings

Setting the date and time

Network settings

The user can set the date and time to be used as the memory card's time stamp. Be absolutely sure to set them when an memory card is to be used.

Setting the date

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display

the System menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Date sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to set the year using the Year item. 4 Use [F3] to set the month using the Month item. 5 Use [F4] to set the day using the Date item. 6 Press the [F5] to enter the year/month/day.

Proceed with the network settings to perform such tasks as updating the software version via LAN. The network initial setup is: IP address: 192.168.0.8, subnet mask: 255.255.255.0. When using the host computer with settings matching the initial setup, it is not necessary to setup via the menu.
For the setting to take effect, the system must be rebooted. Turn the system's power off and then back on.

Entering the IP address

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display

the System menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Network1 sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to [F5] to input the IP address, and press the [F5] (Save) to enter the address.

Setting the time
1 On the System menu, use [F1] to display the Time sub menu.

Entering the subnet mask
1 On the System menu, use [F1] to display the Network2 sub menu.

2 Use [F2] to set the hour using the Hour item. 3 Use [F3] to set the minutes using the Minute item. 4 Use [F4] to set the seconds using the Second item. 5 Press the [F5] to enter the hour/minutes/seconds.
Loading the date and time 1 On the System menu, use [F1] to display the Now sub menu.
2 Press [F2] to load the date currently set. 3 Press [F3] to load the current time.

2 Use [F2] to [F5] to input the subnet mask, and press the [F5] (Save) to enter the mask.
Setting the gateway
1 On the System menu, use [F1] to display the Network3 sub menu.
2 Use [F2] to [F5] to set the gateway, and then press [F5] (Save) to enter the setting. p This will be blank if it is not set.
Display the MAC address
1 On the System menu, use [F1] to display the Network4 sub menu. The MAC address now appears.

135

System settings

Setting the built-in display backlight and button illumination

Setting the built-in display backlight

The built-in display backlight can be set to ON or OFF. It is also possible to automatically turn off the built-in display backlight when no control panel operation is performed within a set time interval.

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display

the Config menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the LCD Backlight sub menu.

Setting the button illumination

The button indicators in the areas listed below can be kept
illuminated all the time.
It is then easier to read the characters displayed on the
buttons even when the unit is operated in dark places. p Memory/wipe pattern/number key area p User button area p Display area p Crosspoint area p Transition area

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display

the Config menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Button Illumination sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to select the setting for the backlight using the Light item.

On Off
60, 120, 180

Backlight is turned on all the time.
The backlight turns off as soon as "Off" is selected as the setting. It lights up when the control panel is operated. (The "On" status is selected as the setting.)
When no control panel operation is performed within a set time interval (60 minutes, 120 minutes, 180 minutes), the built-in display backlight is turned off automatically. Even when the set time interval elapses and the display backlight is turned off, the backlight comes back on when a control panel operation is performed.

4 Use [F3] to set the brightness of the backlight using the Adjust item.

3 Use [F2] to make settings for the memory/wipe pattern/ number key area, the user button area, and the display area in the Dimmer item.

Off

The button illumination does not light.

80% to 150% The button illumination lights. Brightness can be adjusted between 80% and 150%.

4 Use [F3] to make settings for the button selected in the Lighting item.
80% to 150% The button illumination lights. Brightness can be adjusted between 80% and 150%.

5 Use [F4] to make settings for the button when off in the XPT Color item.

Input Color Group1 to 8

Make the button illumination light white. 8 different colors can be set.

6 Use [F5] to make settings for the button when off in the Transition Color item.

Input Color Group1 to 8

Make the button illumination light white. 8 different colors can be set.

7 Use [F1] to display the Button Color Group1 sub menu.

8 Use [F2] to [F4] to set the [R], [G], and [B] for button illumination.

136

System settings

Status displays

Alarm status displays

The alert status (alarms) for this unit's power supply and cooling fan are displayed on the built-in display.

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display the System menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Alarm sub menu.

The alert status of the power supplies is displayed in the Power item. The alert status of the cooling fan is displayed in the Fan item. The alert status of the internal temperature is displayed in the Temperature item.

No Alarm Alarm

No irregularity Irregularity

Alarm message

A message is displayed on the built-in display when an alarm has occurred.

Alarm message displayed ALARM ! Fan Stop ALARM ! Power Failure ALARM ! Temperature

Type of trouble Shutdown of the cooling fan Drop in the supply voltage Rise in the temperature inside the unit

Operation
When OK is pressed, the alarm message is cleared. p Contact your dealer immediately.

137

System settings

Displaying information about the version and optional units
Display information about the versions of software and hardware in the unit and the versions of the optional units that are connected.

Displaying the version information

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display

the System menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the System Version sub menu.

p The unit's system version information is displayed in the System Version item.
Displaying information for optional units
3 Use [F1] to display the Option sub menu.

4 Use [F2] to select the option slot using the Select item.

SLOT A SLOT B

Option slot A Option slot B

5 The types of the optional units connected are displayed in the Slot A/Slot B item.
p "None" is displayed when there is no connection.

138

System settings

Initialization

Initializing setting data

Initialization returns the set data to the factory shipment status. When setting data is initialized, the video memory is deleted, but the Still data saved in the internal storage is not deleted.
<Items and data which are not initialized> p The items of the System menu listed below: Network1, Network2, Network3, Date, Time

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator and display

the System menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Initial sub menu.

Initializing fader
The range for executing a transition can be initialized by operating the fader lever. Initialization should be performed when transitions are not completed to the end even when the fader lever has been moved as far as it will go.
1 Press [F3] in the Initial sub menu to perform initialization.
2 When initializing, use [F1] to select "Yes" and press the [F1]. When not initializing, use [F5] to select "No" and press the [F5].

3 Press [F2] to proceed with the initializing.
4 When initializing, use [F1] to select "Yes" and press the [F1]. When not initializing, use [F5] to select "No" and press the [F5].

139

Remote camera link functions

It is possible to connect a maximum of 16 remote cameras to this unit via LAN and remote control them. The remote cameras that can be connected are as follows (as of October 2020):

ppAW-UE150 series ppAW-HR140 series ppAW-HE130 series ppAW-UE100 series

ppAW-HN130 series ppAW-UE70 series ppAW-UN70 series

Refer to the following Web site for details. https://pro-av.panasonic.net/

ppAW-HE40 series ppAW-HN40 series ppAW-HE42 series

wpExamples of connections

Remote camera (maximum 16)

LAN connector
External DC power supply

SDI/HDMI video signals

Monitor 1

Monitor 2

LAN cables Switching hub LAN cables

Live Switcher AV-UHS500

Monitor

Monitor
External DC power supply

Remote camera controller
ppUse a GbE compatible switching hub and Cat5e or better STP LAN cables for the connection between the unit and the remote cameras.
ppFurthermore, use a network design so that the IP addresses for the unit and the remote cameras are within the same subnet.

140

Remote camera link functions

The control functions for the remote cameras connected to
this unit are as follows: ppIP address automatic detection ppA maximum of 100 preset memories can be played back
and registered ppPan and tilt of each connected remote camera can be
controlled with the positioner on this unit ppZoom of each connected remote camera can be controlled
with the encoders on this unit ppFocus and iris of each connected remote camera can be
controlled with the encoders on this unit ppControl of pan, tilt, zoom, focus, and iris can be individually
disabled ppImages of remote cameras connected to this unit can be
adjusted
White balance/AWB/ABB/Gain/R Gain/B Gain/Pedestal ppOn-screen menus of remote cameras connected to this unit
can be displayed and operated ppThe remote cameras connected to this unit can be switched
between ON and standby as a group or individually ppIt is possible to tally control connected remote cameras
linked to the tally status of this unit ppErrors on remote cameras connected to this unit can be
detected

Settings for connections to remote cameras

Selecting the terminals for remote camera connection

1 Press the

IN OUT

button to light its indicator and display

the Input menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Input sub menu.

3 Press [F2] and select the input signal to which the remote camera is connected in the Select item.
p The following remote camera settings are possible according to the input to IN1 and 2, SDI IN 3 to 8, IN-A1 to 4, and IN-B1 to 4.
IP address settings
To set automatically
You can scan for the IP addresses set in the connected remote cameras and set them in this unit.
1 Use [F1] to display the Camera Settings1 sub menu.

2 Use [F5] to execute the Scan IP Address item to scan for the IP addresses of connected remote cameras.
p The scan results are displayed in the list of the IP address item.
p When "Select From List" is displayed, use [F2] and select the IP address of the connected remote camera in the IP address item.

p "Not Detected" is displayed if the IP address of the remote camera could not be detected.
p Modify the IP address of the unit or the remote camera and set so that there is no duplication.
p The "Duplicate IP Address Detected. (ErrNo = 650)" error message is displayed if the IP address of the
remote camera is duplicated.

141

Remote camera link functions

To set manually
You can directly set the IP addresses set in the connected remote cameras in this unit.
1 Use [F1] to display the Camera Settings1 sub menu.

Checking the remote camera connection status
1 Use [F1] to display the Camera Settings2 sub menu.

2 Use [F4] to execute the Edit IP Address item, then enter the IP addresses of connected remote cameras.
Remote camera port settings
3 From the Camera Settings1 sub menu, use [F3] to set the port to which the remote camera is connected in the Port item.
Remote camera authentication settings
1 Use [F1] to display the Camera Settings2 sub menu.

2 The camera name set on the remote camera is displayed in the Name item.

3 The IP connection status of the unit and the remote cameras is displayed in the Network Status item.

No IP Address Now Checking... Connected
Unauthorized
Not Connected

The IP address of the camera has not been entered in the Input menu.
The unit and the remote camera are communicating.
The unit and the remote camera are connected. Authentication information has not been entered or is incorrect. There is a communication error.

2 Use [F2] to execute the Edit User Name item and set the user name used for authentication with the remote camera.

3 Use [F3] to execute the Edit Password item, then set the password used for authentication with the remote camera.
142

Remote camera link functions

Remote camera operation direction settings
You can use the positioner and encoders of this unit to control the pan, tilt, zoom, focus, and iris of remote cameras connected to this unit. The settings for the operation direction are made as follows:
1 Use [F1] to display the Camera Settings3 sub menu.

2 The pan control direction for the remote camera using the positioner of this unit is set in the Pan Direction item.

Normal Reverse

The operation direction of the positioner and the direction of image movement are the same.
The operation direction of the positioner and the direction of image movement are the opposite.

6 The focus control direction for the remote camera using [F4] operations of this unit is set in the Focus Direction item.

Normal Reverse

Focus moves to the far side with a clockwise turn. Focus moves to the near side with a counterclockwise turn.
Focus moves to the near side with a clockwise turn. Focus moves to the far side with a counterclockwise turn.

7 The iris control direction for the remote camera using [F5] operations of this unit is set in the Iris Direction item.

Normal Reverse

The iris opens with a clockwise turn. The iris closes with a counterclockwise turn.
The iris closes with a clockwise turn. The iris opens with a counterclockwise turn.

3 The tilt control direction for the remote camera using the positioner of this unit is set in the Tilt Direction item.

Normal Reverse

The operation direction of the positioner and the direction of image movement are the same.
The operation direction of the positioner and the direction of image movement are the opposite.

Remote camera tally control settings
You can link the red tally control of remote cameras connected to this unit to the red tally control of this unit.
1 Use [F1] to display the Camera Settings3 sub menu.

4 Use [F1] to display the Camera Settings4 sub menu.

5 The zoom control direction for the remote camera using [F1]/[F2]/[F3]/[Z] operations of this unit is set in the Zoom Direction item.

Normal Reverse

Zoom moves to the telephoto end when [F1] is pressed. Zoom moves to the wide end when [F2] is pressed. Zoom moves to the telephoto end when [F3]/ [Z] is turned clockwise. Zoom moves to the wide end when [F3]/[Z] is turned counterclockwise.
Zoom moves to the wide end when [F1] is pressed. Zoom moves to the telephoto end when [F2] is pressed. Zoom moves to the wide end when [F3]/[Z] is turned clockwise. Zoom moves to the telephoto end when [F3]/ [Z] is turned counterclockwise.

2 Set the link between the red tally control on this unit and the red tally control on the remote camera in the Tally (Group1) item.

Enable Disable

Linked. Not linked.

143

Remote camera link functions

Selecting the cameras to be operated

By connecting remote cameras to this unit, you can control remote cameras using the positioner and encoders of this unit.
1 Assign the remote cameras connected to XPT. Refer to "Selecting the terminals for remote camera connection" for information on how to assign.
2 Press the [DISP/CAM] button to make it turn green.

KEY1 F/S

KEY2 F/S

KEY3 F/S

DSK1 F/S

AMBER : FILL / GREEN : SOURCE

DSK2 F/S

AUX1

AUX BUS DELEGATION

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

DISP CAM

AUX

XPT2

MV1

PGM

MV2

PVW

AUX /DISP SOURCE

SHIFT

3 Select the remote cameras assigned in Step 1 as the CAM bus sources.
p The selected buses turn green.
The inputs that can be selected as the CAM bus sources are the following inputs. XPTs other than these cannot be selected.
· IN1 to IN2 · SDI IN3 to SDI IN8 · IN-A1 to IN-A4 · IN-B1 to IN-B4
p Control of remote cameras is available only when either the [CAM PMEM] screen or [CAM CONT] screen is being displayed.

4 The pan and tilt on the remote camera connected to this unit are controlled by moving the positioner up, down, left, and right.

PRJ SD Card MENU HOLD

Z ZOOM

ALARM LINK

BKGD PATT KEY PATT VMEM CAM CONT
Lights

X/Y PAN/TLT

5 Turning [Z] left and right adjusts the control speed for pan/tilt and operates the zoom.
You can switch the control speed and zoom operation by pressing [Z].

144

Remote camera link functions

Controlling in the camera control screen

When remote cameras are connected to this unit, you can control them in the camera control screen while displaying the input images from the selected camera on the built-in LCD.

1 While the unit is connected to the remote camera, press the

CAM CONT

button.

2 The display on the built-in display of this unit changes, and the [CAM CONT] button turns amber.

CDEFG

A Input source information display
Camera status Power On Pan & Tilt Alarm Fan Alarm Other Alarm Camera IP Connection Error No IP Address for Camera Now Connecting to Camera... Standby
B Z-Dial
P-T Speed
Zoom Focus
Iris
C [F1] D [F2] E [F3]
F [F4]
G [F5]

The following information is displayed: The CAM bus source material name/camera name/(camera model name)/camera status The name set on the remote camera is displayed as the camera name.
Normal situation When a problem is detected with the pan/tilt of the camera When a problem is detected with the fan of the camera When a problem is detected with something other than the pan/tilt or fan of the camera
When the camera failed to connect via IP
When the IP address has not been set for the camera corresponding to the input signal
When connecting to the camera for the first time after switching the input signal
When the camera is on standby Indicates the application for [Z]. Each time you press [Z], operation switches between P-T Speed and Zoom. Indicates the status of the control speed of pan/tilt. "Fast" indicates fast operation and "Slow" indicates slow operation. Indicates the zoom position. "Tele" indicates the telephoto side and "Wide" indicates the wide side. Indicates the focus position. "Far" indicates the far side and "Near" indicates the near side. "Auto" is displayed when auto focus is on. Indicates the iris status. "Open" indicates that the iris is open and "Close" indicates that the iris is closed. "Auto" is displayed when the auto iris is on. Zoom moves to the telephoto end at a constant speed when the button is pressed. An explanation is also displayed on the Menu screen. Zoom moves to the wide end at a constant speed when the button is pressed. An explanation is also displayed on the Menu screen. Turn left and right to operate the zoom. Zoom to the wide end with a counterclockwise turn and to the telephoto end with a clockwise turn. An explanation is also displayed on the Menu screen. Turn left and right to operate the focus. Focus moves to the near side with a counterclockwise turn and to the far side with a clockwise turn. Focus switches between auto and manual when the button is pressed. An explanation is also displayed on the Menu screen. Turn left and right to operate the iris. The iris closes with a counterclockwise turn and the iris opens with a clockwise turn. Iris switches between auto and manual when the button is pressed. An explanation is also displayed on the Menu screen.

p If control of the remote cameras is disabled, explanations for F1 to F5 are not displayed.

145

Remote camera link functions

Remote camera settings

When the unit is connected to the remote camera, you can make settings on the camera from this unit.
Selecting the remote camera, checking information, and controlling power

1 Press the

TIME CAM

button to display the Camera menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Camera Information sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to select the input source of the remote camera you want to set in Input Selection.

You can check the following information.

Name

The name of the remote camera connected to the unit is displayed. The name set on the remote camera is displayed.

Model

The model names of the remote cameras connected to the unit are displayed.

Status

The IP connection status of the unit and the remote cameras is displayed.

No IP Address

The IP address of the camera has not been entered in the Input menu

Now Checking...

The unit and the remote camera are communicating and are not yet finished

Connected

The unit and the remote camera are communicating normally

Unauthorized

Authentication information for the unit and the remote camera has not been entered or is incorrect

Not Connected

There is a communication error between the unit and the remote camera

Please Wait...

Remote camera currently switching between power ON and standby

Pan & Tilt Alarm

A problem has been detected with the pan/tilt of the remote camera

Fan Alarm

A problem has been detected with the fan of the remote camera

Other Alarm

A problem has been detected with something other than the pan/tilt or fan of the remote camera

4 Use [F1] to display the Camera Control sub menu.

5 Use [F2] and switch between power ON and standby for the remote camera corresponding to the input signal selected in the Power item.

6 Use [F3] to turn ON all of the remote cameras connected to this unit in the All Power On item.

7 Use [F4] to set to standby all of the remote cameras connected to this unit in the All Standby item.

8 Use [F5] to switch the use for [Z] in the Z-Dial Usage item.

P-T Sp. & Zoom P-T Speed Only

Either adjust the control speed for pan/tilt or set the zoom control. Press and you can switch the control speed and zoom control.
Set only the pan/tilt control speed adjustments.

146

Remote camera link functions

Remote camera control speed settings

You can set the pan/tilt control, zoom control speed, focus control speed, and iris control speed for remote cameras connected to this unit. The adjustments can be made in 32 steps, with the control speed increasing the higher the number.

1 Press the

TIME CAM

button to display the Camera menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Control Speed sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to set the pan/tilt control speed in the Pan & Tilt item.
4 Use [F3] to set the zoom control speed in the Zoom item.
5 Use [F4] to set the focus control speed in the Focus item.
6 Use [F5] to set the iris control speed in the Iris item.

Remote camera on-screen menu and color bar settings

1 Press the

TIME CAM

button to display the Camera menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the OSD Menu & Color Bars sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to set the display of the on-screen menu of the remote camera in the OSD Menu item.

Displayed.

Off

Not displayed.

4 You can use [F3] to operate the on-screen menus of the remote camera in the Menu Operation item.

Counterclockwise Moves the cursor up.

turn

Clockwise turn Moves the cursor down.

Press

Confirmed.

5 Use [F4] to set the output images from the remote camera in the color bar in the Color Bars item.

The color bar is set.

Set the type of color bar on the camera.

Off

Normal image is set.

147

Remote camera link functions

Remote camera lens control settings

1 Press the

TIME CAM

button to display the Camera menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Lens Control sub menu.

Remote camera image adjustment settings

1 Press the

TIME CAM

button to display the Camera menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the AWB sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to set the auto focus of the remote camera in the Auto Focus item.

Auto Focus

Off

Manual Focus

4 Use [F3] to set the auto iris of the remote camera in the Auto Iris item.

Auto Iris

Off

Manual Iris

p The operation explanation on the camera control screen is as follows.

3 Use [F4] to set the automatic white balance adjustment mode in the AWB Mode item.

4 Use [F2] to execute the automatic white balance adjustments.

5 The result of the adjustment is displayed in the Last AWB Result item.

Successful Failed --

Successful. Failed. When this unit is starting up or the input signal has been changed

6 Use [F1] to display the ABB sub menu.

When Auto Focus/Auto Iris is "Off": When Auto Focus/Auto Iris is "On":

7 Use [F2] to execute the automatic black balance adjustments.

8 The result of the adjustment is displayed in the Last ABB Result item.

Successful Failed --

Successful. Failed. When this unit is starting up or the input signal has been changed

9 Use [F1] to display the Gain1/Gain2/Pedestal sub menus.

Use [F2] to [F5] to set each of the items.
p Refer to the operating instructions for the connected remote camera for details about the setting values.

148

Remote camera link functions

Remote camera preset memory playback settings

1 Press the

TIME CAM

button to display the Camera menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Preset Settings sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to [F5] to set each of the items. p Refer to the operating instructions for the connected
remote camera for details about the setting values.
Disabling remote camera control

You can individually disable the control of the pan/tilt, zoom, focus, and iris for remote cameras connected to this unit.

1 Press the

TIME CAM

button to display the Camera menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Lock sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to set the pan/tilt control and speed adjustment control enable/disable of the remote camera in the Pan & Tilt Lock item.

Disable

Off

Enable

p When Lock is engaged and you press either the

CAM PMEM

button or the

CAM CONT

button, "

" is displayed above

"P-T Speed" at the right of the built-in display.

4 Use [F3] to set the zoom control and speed adjustment control enable/disable of the remote camera in the Zoom Lock item.

Disable

Off

Enable

p When Lock is engaged and you press either the

CAM PMEM

button or the

CAM CONT

button, "

" is displayed above

"Zoom" at the right of the built-in display.

p The [F1]/[F2] operation descriptions will be blank.

p "ZOOM LOCKED" is displayed in the [F3] operation

description.

5 Use [F4] to set the focus control and speed adjustment control enable/disable of the remote camera in the Focus Lock item.

Disable

Off

Enable

p When Lock is engaged and you press either the

CAM PMEM

button or the

CAM CONT

button, "

" is displayed above

"Focus" at the right of the built-in display.

p "FOCUS LOCKED" is displayed in the [F4] operation

description.

6 Use [F5] to set the iris control and speed adjustment control enable/disable of the remote camera in the Iris Lock item.

Disable

Off

Enable

p When Lock is engaged and you press either the

CAM PMEM

button or the

CAM CONT

button, "

" is displayed above

"Iris" at the right of the built-in display.

p "IRIS LOCKED" is displayed in the [F5] operation

description.

149

Remote camera link functions

Controlling in the camera preset memory screen

When remote cameras are connected to this unit, you can control them in the camera preset screen while displaying the thumbnail image of the selected camera preset memory on the built-in LCD.

1 Press the

CAM PMEM

button.

2 The display on the built-in LCD of the unit switches.

p It is possible to save, play back, and delete preset memories using the number keys. p Zoom control is possible using [F1] to [F3]. p It is possible to change the preset scope/preset speed using [F4]/[F5].

You can store up to a maximum of 100 preset memories in the remote cameras connected to this unit. ppThey are not stored in this unit.

100 preset memories are divided between 10 pages, so 10 preset memories can be saved in 1 page. If there is a preset memory that corresponds to the number key, the LED of the number key lights. The number key that corresponds to the preset memory that was recalled last on this unit turns amber and all others turn green.

You can select the operation for the preset memory each time you press the [STORE]/[RECALL]/[DEL] buttons.
ppWhile the [STORE] button is lit red, you can store preset memories by holding down the number keys. ppWhile the [RECALL] button is lit amber, you can execute preset memories by pressing the number keys. ppWhile the [DEL] button is lit red, you can delete preset memories by holding down the number keys.

ppPMEM operation selection

ppExecute operations corresponding to PMEM

ppChanging the preset scope/preset speed
ppZoom control

DISPLAY

SHOT MEM EVENT MEM

STORE RE
CALL

MACRO

DEL

CAM PMEM

EDIT

7 NEW STILL 1

8 COPY STILL 2

9 PASTE TRIM IN

4 INS CLIP 1

5 DEL CLIP 2

6 MOD TRIM OUT

REV

0/10

UNDO

TRIM OFF

MEMORY / WIPE PATTERN / 10 KEY

XPT DSBL REC -/+ PAGE STOP
TAKE ENTER
PLAY

KEY1 F/S

KEY2 F/S

KEY3 F/S

DSK1 F/S

AMBER : FILL / GREEN : SOURCE

DSK2 F/S

AUX1

AUX BUS DELEGATION

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

DISP CAM

MV1

PGM

MV2

PVW

AUX /DISP SOURCE

MACRO

AUX

SHIFT

BKGD

KEY

MIX

ppSwitching of the camera that is the target of operation by the CAM bus

150

Remote camera link functions

CDEFG

A Input source information display The following information is displayed. The CAM bus source material name/camera name/(camera model name)/camera status The name set on the remote camera is displayed as the camera name.

Camera status

Power On

Normal situation

Pan & Tilt Alarm

When a problem is detected with the pan/tilt of the camera

Fan Alarm

When a problem is detected with the fan of the camera

Other Alarm

When a problem is detected with something other than the pan/tilt or fan of the camera

Camera IP Connection Error When the camera failed to connect via IP

No IP Address for Camera When the IP address has not been set for the camera corresponding to the input signal

Now Connecting to Camera... When connecting to the camera for the first time after switching the input signal

Standby B Z-Dial
P-T Speed Zoom Focus Iris
C [F1]

When the camera is on standby
Indicates the application for [Z]. Each time you press [Z], operation switches between P-T Speed and Zoom.
Indicates the status of the control speed of pan/tilt. "Fast" indicates fast operation and "Slow" indicates slow operation.
Indicates the zoom position. "Tele" indicates the telephoto side and "Wide" indicates the wide side.
Indicates the focus position. "Far" indicates the far side and "Near" indicates the near side. "Auto" is displayed when auto focus is on.
Indicates the iris status. "Open" indicates that the iris is open and "Close" indicates that the iris is closed. "Auto" is displayed when the auto iris is on.
Zoom moves to the telephoto end at a constant speed when the button is pressed.

D [F2] E [F3]
F [F4]
Mode A

Zoom moves to the wide end at a constant speed when the button is pressed.
Turn left and right to operate the zoom. Zoom to the wide end with a counterclockwise turn and to the telephoto end with a clockwise turn. Turn left and right to operate the preset targets. Preset targets can be switched between the following 3 modes. Set the pan/tilt, zoom, focus, iris, gain, and white balance that are the targets of presetting.

Mode B

Set the pan/tilt, zoom, focus, and iris that are the targets of presetting.

Mode C

Set the pan/tilt, zoom, and focus that are the targets of presetting.

G [F5]

Minimum speed (When set to the pan/tilt operating time 99)

Default value (When set to the pan/tilt operating time 20)

Maximum speed (When set to the pan/tilt operating time 1)

p The screen displays here show the models that support thumbnails (AW-UE150/AW-UE100 series). Other models will not display thumbnails, with icons displayed instead.
p It is not possible to set the pan/tilt operating time for all of the remote cameras. Refer to the user guide for the remote camera for details.

151

Remote camera link functions

p If control of the remote cameras is disabled, explanations for F4 and F5 are not displayed.
Storing preset memories

1 Operate the

CAM PMEM

button to make it turn amber.

2 Operate the [STORE] button to make it turn red.

3 Hold down the number key that corresponds to the preset memory to be stored to store.
p After storing is complete, the corresponding number key turns green.
p Preset memories can be stored in number keys 1 to 10. p If there is already a preset memory that corresponds to
the number key, then storing is not possible even if the key is held down.

SHOT MEM EVENT MEM MACRO CAM PMEM

STORE RE
CALL DEL EDIT

7 NEW STILL 1

8 COPY STILL 2

9 PASTE TRIM IN

4 INS CLIP 1

5 DEL CLIP 2

6 MOD TRIM OUT

REV

0/10

UNDO

TRIM OFF

MEMORY / WIPE PATTERN / 10 KEY

XPT DSBL REC -/+ PAGE STOP
TAKE ENTER
PLAY

BKGD PATT KEY PATT VMEM CAM CONT

Recalling preset memories

1 Operate the

CAM PMEM

button to make it turn amber.

2 Operate the [RECALL] button to make it turn amber.

3 When a number key 1 to 10 is pressed, the preset memory that corresponds to the number key is executed.
p The number key that corresponds to the preset memory being recalled blinks green.
p The [C] (UNDO) button turns amber during recall and then goes out when recall is finished.
p When recalling finishes, the number key that corresponds to the preset memory that was recalled last turns amber.
4 Recalling can be stopped by pressing the [C](UNDO) button while recalling.

SHOT MEM EVENT MEM MACRO CAM PMEM

STORE RE
CALL DEL EDIT

7 NEW STILL 1

8 COPY STILL 2

9 PASTE TRIM IN

4 INS CLIP 1

5 DEL CLIP 2

6 MOD TRIM OUT

REV

0/10

UNDO

TRIM OFF

MEMORY / WIPE PATTERN / 10 KEY

XPT DSBL REC -/+ PAGE STOP
TAKE ENTER
PLAY

BKGD PATT KEY PATT VMEM CAM CONT

Deleting preset memories

1 Operate the

CAM PMEM

button to make it turn amber.

2 Operate the [DEL] button to make it turn red.

3 When a number key 1 to 10 is held down, the preset memory that corresponds to the number key can be deleted.
p When deleting is finished, the number key that corresponds to the preset memory that was deleted turns off.

152

Remote camera link functions

Selecting a page of preset memories

1 Operate the

CAM PMEM

button to make it turn amber.

2 Page selection starts when the [PAGE] button is pressed. p The [PAGE] button turns amber when a page is selected. Number keys 1 to 10 correspond to page numbers 1 to 10.
3 Use the number keys 1 to 10 or the [PAGE] button to complete selection of the page. p If a number key 1 to 10 is pressed, the current page number changes to the value of the pressed number key. p When the [PAGE] button is pressed, the current page number is not changed.
4 If there is at least one preset memory in the page, the LED of the number key that corresponds to the page lights. p The number key that corresponds to the current page turns amber and all the other pages light green. p In the example in the figure below, page numbers 1, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 10 each contain at least one preset memory, and page
number 1 is the current page.

SHOT MEM EVENT MEM MACRO CAM PMEM

STORE RE
CALL DEL EDIT

7 NEW STILL 1

8 COPY STILL 2

9 PASTE TRIM IN

4 INS CLIP 1

5 DEL CLIP 2

6 MOD TRIM OUT

REV

0/10

UNDO

TRIM OFF

MEMORY / WIPE PATTERN / 10 KEY

XPT DSBL REC -/+ PAGE STOP
TAKE ENTER
PLAY

BKGD PATT KEY PATT VMEM CAM CONT

p The targets for project file storing and macro recording are as shown in the below table.

Storing project files

Selections with the STORE/RECALL/DEL buttons, Preset page numbers for input signals (for each connected camera)

Macro recording targets

Storing preset memories, Recalling preset memories, Deleting preset memories, Stopping with the [C](UNDO) button when recalling preset memories, Selections with the [STORE]/[RECALL]/[DEL] buttons when recalling preset memories, Page selections when recalling preset memories, Changing Preset Scope, Changing Preset Speed

153

ROI function
This unit is equipped with ROI (region of interest) functionality which enables you to extract the parts you need from the images input from the camera and assign them to crosspoints. By extracting up to 4 parts that you need from the images of one camera, it is possible to produce the same images that might be possible with multiple cameras. Furthermore, as this function is also available with the SDI/HDMI optional units, it is possible to extract 12 images from a maximum of 3 cameras.
Overview
Normal mode
SDI IN5

ROI mode

SDI IN6 SDI IN7 SDI IN8

XPT

DSK AUX

Sharing source (SDI IN5)

The zoom and position can also be specified for the sharing source SDI IN5

SDI IN5

SDI IN6 SDI IN7

XPT

DSK AUX

SDI IN8

The images input to SDI IN6, 7, and 8 cannot be used

The images of SDI IN5 are shared, and the zoom and position can be specified

The above illustration shows an example with the camera connected to SDI IN5 on this unit. When in ROI mode, the images from SDI IN5 are shared with SDI IN6, SDI IN7, and SDI IN8. You can individually adjust the size and position of each of the images in the sharing source, SDI IN5, and in the sharing destinations, SDI IN6, SDI IN7, and SDI IN8. Those images can be selected with XPT, and can also be used by ME, DSK, AUX, and MV. The images for the sharing source can only come from SDI IN5.

154

ROI function

This function is also available with optional units AV-UHS5M1 (SDI Input Unit) and AV-UHS5M3 (HDMI Input Unit). In this case, the sharing source will be either IN-A1 or IN-B1 and the sharing destinations will be IN-A2-4 and IN-B2-4, respectively.

The inputs for which the ROI function is available are as follows:
p Standard SDI IN5 to 8 p IN-A1 to 4 on the SDI input unit (AV-UHS5M1) p IN-B1 to 4 on the SDI input unit (AV-UHS5M1) p IN-A1 to 4 on the HDMI input unit (AV-UHS5M3) p IN-B1 to 4 on the HDMI input unit (AV-UHS5M3)

Furthermore, the relationships between the inputs that are the sharing sources and the inputs that are the sharing destinations are as follows:

Standard SDI input

Sharing source

SDI IN

SDI IN5

SDI IN6

Sharing destinations

SDI IN7

SDI IN8

ppThe ROI function cannot be used with standard SDI IN1 to 4 or standard HDMI IN1 and 2.

Option slot A

Sharing source

SDI IN

IN-A1

HDMI IN

IN-A1

IN-A2 IN-A2

Sharing destinations

IN-A3

IN-A4

IN-A3

IN-A4 (*1)

ppIt is not possible to share the images from option slot B. *1: IN-A4 input on the HDMI input unit is enabled only in the ROI mode. Available in crosspoint and multi view.

Option slot B

Sharing source

SDI IN

IN-B1

HDMI IN

IN-B1

IN-B2 IN-B2

Sharing destinations

IN-B3

IN-B4

IN-B3

IN-B4 (*2)

ppIt is not possible to share the images from option slot A. *2: IN-B4 input on the HDMI input unit is enabled only in the ROI mode. Available in crosspoint and multi view.

Notes
ppThe images for the sharing source can only come from SDI IN5, IN-A1, and IN-B1. ppThe ROI mode is enabled if the system format is progressive, or if the system format is interlace and the input is
progressive.
Also, the enabled inputs are progressive and PsF. ppLEVEL-B input is not supported at 1080/59.94p and 1080/50p in the ROI mode. ppWhen the system format of the switcher is 29.97/25 Hz, input with 1080i/1080PsF is enabled in the ROI mode. ppWhen the system format of the switcher is 59.94/50 Hz, input with 1080i/1080PsF is disabled in the ROI mode.

155

ROI function

ROI mode settings

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator and display the Config menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the ROI sub menu.

3 Press [F2]/[F3]/[F4] to select an input that enables the ROI function in the Select item.

SDI IN IN-A

The ROI function is enabled with standard SDI input.

Off

The ROI function is disabled with standard SDI input.

The ROI function is enabled with option slot A.

Off

The ROI function is disabled with option slot A.

p Displayed when and SDI or HDMI input unit is installed in option slot A.

IN-B

The ROI function is enabled with option slot B.

Off

The ROI function is disabled with option slot B.

p Displayed when and SDI or HDMI input unit is installed in option slot B.

An indicator is displayed on the screen when the ROI function is enabled.

156

ROI function

Adjusting the position and range for ROI extraction

When the ROI function is enabled and selected, you can adjust the X and Y coordinates of the extraction position with the positioner in the positioner area, and also adjust the extraction range using the rotary encoder [Z] in the positioner area. These settings can also be made with menus.

1 Press the

IN OUT

button to light its indicator and display the Input menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Input sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to select an input signal where the ROI function has been enabled in the Select item. 4 When it is an input signal where the ROI function has been enabled, use [F1] to display the ROI sub menu.

5 Use the positioner and rotary encoder [Z], or use [F2] to [F5], to set the extraction position and extraction range in each of the Pos-X, Pos-Y, Size, and Pos-Speed items.

Pos-X Pos-Y Size Pos-Speed

Description Adjusts the X position Adjusts the Y position Sets the range of extraction Sets the speed of the positioner movement

Setting ranges 45.00 to 45.00 45.00 to 45.00 10.00 to 100.00 1 to 100

Default value 0.00 0.00 100.00 50

The setting ranges for the extraction position and the extraction range The settings for Pos-X, Pos-Y, and Size are reflected as shown in the diagram below. However, you cannot set so that they go beyond the bounds of the screen as shown by the red frame in the below diagram. Even if you try to change X-Pos, Y-Pos, and Size as shown by the red frame, the settings can only be made up to the changes possible for X-Pos, Y-Pos, and Size. The setting changes for Size take priority, so if the changes to Size mean that the settings become like the red frame in the diagram below, then X-Pos and Y-Pos will be changed in conjunction so that they fit within the screen setting range.
You cannot adjust the range beyond the bounds of the screen.
Settings possible to here.

Inside screen area Outside screen area
157

ROI function

ROI adjustments from the CAM CONT screen
When the ROI function is enabled and selected, in the CAM CONT screen, you can also select the target input signal and adjust the extraction position and extraction range.
1 Press the [DISP/CAM] button to make it turn green and select the CAM bus.

KEY1 F/S

KEY2 F/S

KEY3 F/S

DSK1 F/S

DSK2 F/S

AUX1

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

DISP CAM

AMBER : FILL / GREEN : SOURCE AUX BUS DELEGATION

AUX

MV1

PGM

MV2

PVW

AUX /DISP SOURCE

SHIFT

2 Select an input signal where the ROI function has been enabled as the source for the CAM bus. ppThe selected bus turns green.

Inputs which enable ROI adjustments are as follows: · SDI IN5 to SDI IN8 · IN-A1 to IN-A4 · IN-B1 to IN-B4
3 When you press the [CAM CONT] button, the display on the built-in display of this unit changes and the [CAM CONT] button turns amber.
4 Use the positioner to adjust the extraction position.

CDEFG

A ROI mode indicator B Z-Dial
Pos Speed
Zoom Focus Iris
C [F1]
D [F2]
E [F3]
F [F4] G [F5]

Indicates that the input signal is in the ROI mode.
Indicates the application for [Z]. Each time you press [Z], operation switches between Pos-Speed and Zoom. Indicates the status of the speed of movement of the position for extraction. "Fast" indicates fast operation and "Slow" indicates slow operation. Indicates the size of the range of extraction.
This is grayed out because it is not used when adjusting ROI.
This is grayed out because it is not used when adjusting ROI.
The range of extraction gets smaller when you press this button. An explanation is also displayed on the Menu screen. The range of extraction gets bigger when you press this button. An explanation is also displayed on the Menu screen. Turn left or right to adjust the range of extraction. The range gets bigger when turned to the left and gets smaller when turned to the right. An explanation is also displayed on the Menu screen. Not used.
Displays the setting values for X-Pos, Y-Pos, Size, and Pos-Speed in the Input menu.

p If you transition to this screen while controlling a remote camera, you will not be able to perform any camera operations.

158

ROI function

ROI preset memory

When the ROI function is enabled on this unit, you can save the extraction position and extraction range for each of the target input signals as ROI preset memories and then play them back.

1 Press the

CAM PMEM

button.

2 The display on the built-in LCD of the unit switches.

3 Use the positioner to adjust the extraction position.

p It is possible to save, play back, and delete the ROI preset memories using the number keys. p It is possible to change the ROI preset speed using [F5].
Also, by turning [F5] while pressing it, you can change the settings in 1-second increments.

The ROI preset memories are saved in the unit, with 10 available for each input. If there is an ROI preset memory saved that corresponds to a number key, the LED of the number key lights. The number key that corresponds to the ROI preset memory that was recalled last on this unit turns amber and all others turn green.

You can select the operation for the ROI preset memory each time you press the [STORE]/[RECALL]/[DEL] buttons.
ppWhile the [STORE] button is lit red, you can store ROI preset memories by holding down the number keys. ppWhile the [RECALL] button is lit amber, you can execute ROI preset memories by pressing the number keys. ppWhile the [DEL] button is lit red, you can delete ROI preset memories by holding down the number keys.

ppExecute operations corresponding to ROI

ppROI PMEM operation selection

PMEM

ppChanging the ROI preset speed

DISPLAY

SHOT MEM EVENT MEM

STORE RE
CALL

MACRO

DEL

CAM PMEM

EDIT

7 NEW STILL 1

8 COPY STILL 2

9 PASTE TRIM IN

4 INS CLIP 1

5 DEL CLIP 2

6 MOD TRIM OUT

REV

0/10

UNDO

TRIM OFF

MEMORY / WIPE PATTERN / 10 KEY

XPT DSBL REC -/+ PAGE STOP
TAKE ENTER
PLAY

KEY1 F/S AUX

KEY2 F/S

KEY3 F/S

DSK1 F/S

AMBER : FILL / GREEN : SOURCE

DSK2 F/S

AUX1

AUX BUS DELEGATION

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

DISP CAM

MV1

PGM

MV2

PVW

AUX /DISP SOURCE

SHIFT

ppSwitch the input signal from the CAM bus

MACRO

BKGD

KEY

MIX

159

ROI function

CDEFG

A Input signal information
display
B Z-Dial
Pos Speed
Zoom Focus Iris
C [F1] D [F2] E [F3] F [F4] G [F5]

p The thumbnail displayed when saving the preset will be of the input image when the save was executed. You cannot save a different thumbnail after the preset has been saved.

The dissolve time when recalling an ROI preset can also be set in the Input menu. It can be set individually for each of the input signals where the ROI function is enabled.

1 Press the

IN OUT

button to light its indicator and display the Input menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Input sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to select an input signal where the ROI function has been enabled in the Select item. 4 Use [F1] to display the ROI Preset sub menu.
5 Use [F2] to set the dissolve time when recalling an ROI preset in the TransTime item.

160

External interfaces

Setting the GPI I/O

The user can set the functions that are to be controlled from the GPI ports and set whether to enable the control.

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display

the Config menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the GPI-In Setting sub menu (or GPI-Out Setting sub menu).

3 Use [F2] to set "On" or "Off" for the control to be exercised from the ports using the GPI-In Enable item (or GPI-Out Enable item).
4 Use [F3] to set the AUX bus to be used to notify the tally using the AUX Sel item.
5 Use [F1] to display GPI-In Port 1/2 sub menu and GPI-In Port 2/2 sub menu (or GPI-Out Port 1/5 sub menu to GPI-Out Port 5/5 sub menu).

6 Use [F2] to [F5] to allocate the functions to be assigned to the respective pin numbers. Refer to "Control using the GPI Input port" and "Output from the GPI Output port".
p Settings for the GPI-In Enable (or GPI-Out Enable) item can be assigned to one of the user buttons. Refer to "Setting the user buttons".
161

External interfaces

w Control using the GPI Input port

Assign Item AUTO CUT
KEY ON DSK ON
FTB BKGD AUTO BKGD CUT KEY AUTO
KEY CUT REC Still1 REC Still2 REC Clip1 REC Clip2 STOP Clip1 STOP Clip2 PLAY Clip1 PLAY Clip2 AUX XPT
1 to 24
TlyG1 DSBL TlyG2 DSBL AUXTly DSBL
MACRO 001 to 100 MACRO Cancel No Assign

Description of function assigned

Control method

AUTO button in transition area

CUT button in transition area

KEY1 to KEY3 button in transition area

DSK1, DSK2 button in transition area

FTB button in transition area

AUTO button when the background is selected

CUT button when the background is selected

AUTO button when the key is selected

CUT button when the key is selected Still1 recording Still2 recording

Operations are performed using contact inputs (30 ms or more).

Clip1 recording start

Clip2 recording start

Clip1 recording stop or playback stop

Clip2 recording stop or playback stop

Clip1 playback start

Clip2 playback start

Crosspoint buttons (1 to 24) used to switch the AUX buses. p Select the AUX buses (AUX1 to AUX4) to be controlled using the
menu.

Red tally signal is not output Green tally signal is not output AUX tally signal is not output

Functions are enabled using contact inputs (or disabled in open status).

Play back the applicable macro registered memory (one of 1 to 100) Operations are performed using

Macro playback is canceled

contact inputs (30 ms or more).

No function assigned

162

External interfaces

w Output from the GPI Output port

Assign Item

Description of function assigned

CUT

Cut transition executed

KEY1 ON to KEY3 ON

Key1 to 3 transition start

DSK1 ON to DSK2 ON

DSK1 to 2 transition start

FTB ON

FTB transition start

BKGD CUT

Cut transition for the background executed

KEY1 CUT

Cut transition for a key1 executed

EVENTMEM

Event set by event memory executed

AUTO

Auto transition execution in progress

BKGD AUTO

Auto transition execution in progress for background

KEY1 AUTO

Auto transition execution in progress for key1

TlyG1 SDI IN1 to SDI IN8 Red tally for SDI IN1 to SDI IN8

TlyG1 HDMI IN1 to HDMI IN2 Red tally for HDMI IN1 to HDMI IN2

TlyG1 IN-A1 to IN-A4

Red tally for IN-A1 to IN-A4

TlyG1 IN-B1 to IN-B4

Red tally for IN-B1 to IN-B4

TlyG2 SDI IN1 to SDI IN8 Green tally for SDI IN1 to SDI IN8

TlyG2 HDMI IN1 to HDMI IN2 Green tally for HDMI IN1 to HDMI IN2

TlyG2 IN-A1 to IN-A4

Green tally for IN-A1 to IN-A4

TlyG2 IN-B1 to IN-B4

Green tally for IN-B1 to IN-B4

AUXTly SDI IN1 to SDI IN8 When SDI IN1 to SDI IN8* have been selected by the AUX bus

AUXTly HDMI IN1 to HDMI IN2 When HDMI IN1 to HDMI IN2* have been selected by the AUX bus

AUXTly IN-A1 to IN-A4

When IN-A1 to IN-A4* have been selected by the AUX bus

AUXTly IN-B1 to IN-B4

When IN-B1 to IN-B4* have been selected by the AUX bus

No Assign

No function assigned

Output
Low pulses are output (approx. 50 to 60 ms).
A low level is output.
A low level is output during tally output.
A low level is output while the inputs are selected.

*: Select the AUX buses (AUX1 to AUX4) whose signals are to be output using the menu.

163

External interfaces

Example of GPI Out and ALARM connections Ensure that the conditions given below are satisfied.

Dielectric strength: Max. DC 24 V

Current:

Max. 50 mA

AV-UHS500

(Max. voltage: 24 V)

GPI Out ALARM Out
(Max. current: 50 mA) Tally LED
Com

Example of GPI In connections Provide contact inputs.
AV-UHS500 +3.3 V
GPI In
Com

TALLY/GPI 1
87654321 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

Pin No. 1
9 2
10 3
11 4
12 5
13 6
14 7
15 8

Signal name GPI-Out1 GPI-Out9 GPI-Out2 ALARM Out GPI-Out3 GPI-In1 GPI-Out4 GPI-In2 GPI-Out5 GPI-In3 GPI-Out6 GPI-In4 GPI-Out7 GPI-Com GPI-Out8

TALLY/GPI 2
87654321 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

Pin No. 1
9 2
10 3
11 4
12 5
13 6
14 7
15 8

Signal name GPI-Out10 GPI-Out18 GPI-Out11 GPI-Out19 GPI-Out12 GPI-In5 GPI-Out13 GPI-In6 GPI-Out14 GPI-In7 GPI-Out15 GPI-In8 GPI-Out16 GPI-Com GPI-Out17

LAN
Connect the unit and computer or the unit and an external device*. *: An external device can be controlled from the unit. pp Use a LAN cable (category 5e or above).

164

External interfaces

Controlling with external panels
With this unit, you can perform the following operations from external panels (*) connected via an IP network: pp Select materials for each bus pp Execute video transitions pp Play back macro memories pp Play back shot memories pp Crosspoint selection for each bus
*: This unit supports the LBP series from LAWO. Consult LAWO for LBP series settings and operations.
Preparations
Use a LAN cable to connect the external panel to the LAN connector on the back of the unit. It is possible to connect a maximum of 20 external panels. When connecting multiple external panels, connect via a hub.
External panel settings
Check the following settings on this unit, then make the settings on the connected external panels:
pp System menu Network1 sub menu Take the address value set in the IP Address item of this sub menu and set it as the IP address of the device that will be the target of the external panel operations.
pp System menu ExtPanel Info sub menu Take the port number set in the Port No item of this sub menu and set it as the port number of the device that will be the target of the external panel operations.
Also set the subnet mask (Network2 sub menu) and the default gateway (Network3 sub menu) according to the network environment connected.

Settings on this unit when external panels are connected

Receiving port number settings

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display

the System menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the ExtPanel Info sub menu.

3 Press [F2] to enable/disable the external panel function in the Disable/Enable item.

4 Use [F3] to set the receiving port number used by this unit.

Possible setting range 62000 to 65535

Default value

62010

Shot memory playback target settings

Set the playback targets for when shot memories of this unit are played back by operations on the external panels.

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display

the System menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the ExtPanelIP SMEMRecall1/2 sub menu.

3 Use [F2] to [F4] to set the playback targets for the shot memory.
p ME, DSK, AUX, color background, and crosspoint area can be individually turned ON/OFF.

165

External interfaces

List of bus IDs and source IDs

When operations are performed on external panels, crosspoint setting commands are issued that specify the materials (Source) for the buses (Destination). When this unit receives the crosspoint setting command from the external panel, materials are selected and video transitions are executed according to the bus and material combinations specified in the command. This section describes the IDs (numbers) used by this unit to identify each bus and each material.
IDs can be categorized broadly into the following 2 types:
1) Normal bus IDs and material IDs IDs that specify the buses inside the switcher (ME1PGM, AUX1, etc.) and the switcher materials (IN1, CBGD1, STILL1-V, etc.). Use a number between 1 and 512.
2) Extended bus IDs and extended material IDs IDs used for playback of video transitions, macro memories, and shot memories. When this unit receives a crosspoint setting command in which the same extended ID is specified for the bus and the material, the corresponding function is executed. For example, when a command is received that specifies the ME1 AUTO material (ID: 522) for the ME1 AUTO bus (ID: 522), an AUTO transition is executed at ME1. Use a number between 513 and 1024.

Executable operations ME key transition ME key transition (CUT) ME AUTO transition ME CUT transition DSK transition DSK transition (CUT) Playing back macro registered memories Playing back shot memory registered memories Crosspoint selection for each bus

Specified bus and material ME1 KEY1 AUTO to ME1 KEY3 AUTO ME1 KEY1 CUT to ME1 KEY3 CUT ME1 BKGD AUTO ME1 BKGD CUT DSK1 AUTO to DSK2 AUTO DSK1 CUT to DSK2 CUT MACROPLAY1-1 to MACROPLAY10-10 SHOTPLAY1-1 to SHOTPLAY10-10 XPT1 to XPT24

pp Consult LAWO for details on how to assign IDs to the operations of each of the buttons on the LBP series.

166

External interfaces

Bus ID

Bus

1 ME1PGM

2 ME1PVW

3 ME1KEY1-F

4 ME1KEY1-S

5 ME1KEY2-F

6 ME1KEY2-S

7 ME1KEY3-F

8 ME1KEY3-S

97 DSK1-F

98 DSK1-S

99 DSK2-F

Bus

100 DSK2-S

101

112

113 AUX1

114 AUX2

115 AUX3

116 AUX4

117

140

141 DISP

142

Bus

149

150 VMEM-V

151 VMEM-K

152

153 MV1-1

154 MV1-2

155 MV1-3

156 MV1-4

157 MV1-5

158 MV1-6

159 MV1-7

160 MV1-8

161 MV1-9

162 MV1-10

Source ID

Source

1 IN1

2 IN2

3 SDI_IN3

4 SDI_IN4

5 SDI_IN5

6 SDI_IN6

7 SDI_IN7

8 SDI_IN8

9 OPA_IN1

10 OPA_IN2

11 OPA_IN3

12 OPA_IN4

13 OPB_IN1

14 OPB_IN2

Source

15 OPB_IN3

16 OPB_IN4

144

145 CBGD1

146 CBGD2

147 CBAR

148 BLACK

149 STILL1V

150 STILL1K

151 STILL2V

152 STILL2K

153

Source

156

157 CLIP1V

158 CLIP1K

159 CLIP2V

160 CLIP2K

161

164

165 MV1

166 MV2

167

170

Bus

163 MV1-11

164 MV1-12

165 MV1-13

166 MV1-14

167 MV1-15

168 MV1-16

169 MV2-1

170 MV2-2

171 MV2-3

172 MV2-4

173 MV2-5

174 MV2-6

175 MV2-7

176 MV2-8

Source

171 Key Out

172 CLN

173

200

201 PGM

202

203 PVW

204

208

209 ME PGM

210

Bus

177 MV2-9

178 MV2-10

179 MV2-11

180 MV2-12

181 MV2-13

182 MV2-14

183 MV2-15

184 MV2-16

185

512

: Unused ID

Source

226

227 AUX1 228 AUX2

229 AUX3

230 AUX4

231

250

251 CLOCK

252

512

: Unused ID

167

External interfaces

Extended bus ID

Bus

513

514 ME1 KEY1 AUTO

515 ME1 KEY2 AUTO

516 ME1 KEY3 AUTO

517

518 ME1 KEY1 CUT

519 ME1 KEY2 CUT

520 ME1 KEY3 CUT

521

522 ME1 BKGD AUTO

523 ME1 BKGD CUT

524

593

594 DSK1 AUTO

595 DSK2 AUTO

596

597

598 DSK1 CUT

599 DSK2 CUT

600

609

610 MACROPLAY1-1

611 MACROPLAY1-2

612 MACROPLAY1-3

613 MACROPLAY1-4

614 MACROPLAY1-5

615 MACROPLAY1-6

616 MACROPLAY1-7

617 MACROPLAY1-8

618 MACROPLAY1-9

619 MACROPLAY1-10

620 MACROPLAY2-1

621 MACROPLAY2-2

622 MACROPLAY2-3

623 MACROPLAY2-4

624 MACROPLAY2-5

625 MACROPLAY2-6

626 MACROPLAY2-7

627 MACROPLAY2-8

628 MACROPLAY2-9

629 MACROPLAY2-10

630 MACROPLAY3-1

631 MACROPLAY3-2

632 MACROPLAY3-3

Bus

633 MACROPLAY3-4

634 MACROPLAY3-5

635 MACROPLAY3-6

636 MACROPLAY3-7

637 MACROPLAY3-8

638 MACROPLAY3-9

639 MACROPLAY3-10

640 MACROPLAY4-1

641 MACROPLAY4-2

642 MACROPLAY4-3

643 MACROPLAY4-4

644 MACROPLAY4-5

645 MACROPLAY4-6

646 MACROPLAY4-7

647 MACROPLAY4-8

648 MACROPLAY4-9

649 MACROPLAY4-10

650 MACROPLAY5-1

651 MACROPLAY5-2

652 MACROPLAY5-3

653 MACROPLAY5-4

654 MACROPLAY5-5

655 MACROPLAY5-6

656 MACROPLAY5-7

657 MACROPLAY5-8

658 MACROPLAY5-9

659 MACROPLAY5-10

660 MACROPLAY6-1

661 MACROPLAY6-2

662 MACROPLAY6-3

663 MACROPLAY6-4

664 MACROPLAY6-5

665 MACROPLAY6-6

666 MACROPLAY6-7

667 MACROPLAY6-8

668 MACROPLAY6-9

669 MACROPLAY6-10

670 MACROPLAY7-1

671 MACROPLAY7-2

672 MACROPLAY7-3

673 MACROPLAY7-4

674 MACROPLAY7-5

675 MACROPLAY7-6

676 MACROPLAY7-7

677 MACROPLAY7-8

678 MACROPLAY7-9

Bus

679 MACROPLAY7-10

680 MACROPLAY8-1

681 MACROPLAY8-2

682 MACROPLAY8-3

683 MACROPLAY8-4

684 MACROPLAY8-5

685 MACROPLAY8-6

686 MACROPLAY8-7

687 MACROPLAY8-8

688 MACROPLAY8-9

689 MACROPLAY8-10

690 MACROPLAY9-1

691 MACROPLAY9-2

692 MACROPLAY9-3

693 MACROPLAY9-4

694 MACROPLAY9-5

695 MACROPLAY9-6

696 MACROPLAY9-7

697 MACROPLAY9-8

698 MACROPLAY9-9

699 MACROPLAY9-10

700 MACROPLAY10-1

701 MACROPLAY10-2

702 MACROPLAY10-3

703 MACROPLAY10-4

704 MACROPLAY10-5

705 MACROPLAY10-6

706 MACROPLAY10-7

707 MACROPLAY10-8

708 MACROPLAY10-9

709 MACROPLAY10-10

710 SHOTPLAY1-1

711 SHOTPLAY1-2

712 SHOTPLAY1-3

713 SHOTPLAY1-4

714 SHOTPLAY1-5

715 SHOTPLAY1-6

716 SHOTPLAY1-7

717 SHOTPLAY1-8

718 SHOTPLAY1-9

719 SHOTPLAY1-10

720 SHOTPLAY2-1

721 SHOTPLAY2-2

722 SHOTPLAY2-3

723 SHOTPLAY2-4

724 SHOTPLAY2-5

Bus

725 SHOTPLAY2-6

726 SHOTPLAY2-7

727 SHOTPLAY2-8

728 SHOTPLAY2-9

729 SHOTPLAY2-10

730 SHOTPLAY3-1

731 SHOTPLAY3-2

732 SHOTPLAY3-3

733 SHOTPLAY3-4

734 SHOTPLAY3-5

735 SHOTPLAY3-6

736 SHOTPLAY3-7

737 SHOTPLAY3-8

738 SHOTPLAY3-9

739 SHOTPLAY3-10

740 SHOTPLAY4-1

741 SHOTPLAY4-2

742 SHOTPLAY4-3

743 SHOTPLAY4-4

744 SHOTPLAY4-5

745 SHOTPLAY4-6

746 SHOTPLAY4-7

747 SHOTPLAY4-8

748 SHOTPLAY4-9

749 SHOTPLAY4-10

750 SHOTPLAY5-1

751 SHOTPLAY5-2

752 SHOTPLAY5-3

753 SHOTPLAY5-4

754 SHOTPLAY5-5

755 SHOTPLAY5-6

756 SHOTPLAY5-7

757 SHOTPLAY5-8

758 SHOTPLAY5-9

759 SHOTPLAY5-10

760 SHOTPLAY6-1

761 SHOTPLAY6-2

762 SHOTPLAY6-3

763 SHOTPLAY6-4

764 SHOTPLAY6-5

765 SHOTPLAY6-6

766 SHOTPLAY6-7

767 SHOTPLAY6-8

768 SHOTPLAY6-9

769 SHOTPLAY6-10

770 SHOTPLAY7-1

Bus

771 SHOTPLAY7-2

772 SHOTPLAY7-3

773 SHOTPLAY7-4

774 SHOTPLAY7-5

775 SHOTPLAY7-6

776 SHOTPLAY7-7

777 SHOTPLAY7-8

778 SHOTPLAY7-9

779 SHOTPLAY7-10

780 SHOTPLAY8-1

781 SHOTPLAY8-2

782 SHOTPLAY8-3

783 SHOTPLAY8-4

784 SHOTPLAY8-5

785 SHOTPLAY8-6

786 SHOTPLAY8-7

787 SHOTPLAY8-8

788 SHOTPLAY8-9

789 SHOTPLAY8-10

790 SHOTPLAY9-1

791 SHOTPLAY9-2

792 SHOTPLAY9-3

793 SHOTPLAY9-4

794 SHOTPLAY9-5

795 SHOTPLAY9-6

796 SHOTPLAY9-7

797 SHOTPLAY9-8

798 SHOTPLAY9-9

799 SHOTPLAY9-10

800 SHOTPLAY10-1

801 SHOTPLAY10-2

802 SHOTPLAY10-3

803 SHOTPLAY10-4

804 SHOTPLAY10-5

805 SHOTPLAY10-6

806 SHOTPLAY10-7

807 SHOTPLAY10-8

808 SHOTPLAY10-9

809 SHOTPLAY10-10

810 XPT1

811 XPT2

812 XPT3

813 XPT4

814 XPT5

815 XPT6

816 XPT7

: Disabled ID (-1) sent

168

External interfaces

Extended bus ID (continued)

Bus

817 XPT8

818 XPT9

819 XPT10

820 XPT11

821 XPT12

822 XPT13

823 XPT14

824 XPT15

825 XPT16

826 XPT17

827 XPT18

828 XPT19

829 XPT20

830 XPT21

831 XPT22

832 XPT23

833 XPT24

834

1024

: Disabled ID (-1) sent

Extended Source ID

Source

513

514 ME1 KEY1 AUTO

515 ME1 KEY2 AUTO

516 ME1 KEY3 AUTO

517

518 ME1 KEY1 CUT

519 ME1 KEY2 CUT

520 ME1 KEY3 CUT

521

522 ME1 BKGD AUTO

523 ME1 BKGD CUT

524

593

594 DSK1 AUTO

595 DSK2 AUTO

596

597

598 DSK1 CUT

599 DSK2 CUT

600

609

610 MACROPLAY1-1

611 MACROPLAY1-2

612 MACROPLAY1-3

613 MACROPLAY1-4

614 MACROPLAY1-5

615 MACROPLAY1-6

616 MACROPLAY1-7

617 MACROPLAY1-8

618 MACROPLAY1-9

619 MACROPLAY1-10

620 MACROPLAY2-1

621 MACROPLAY2-2

622 MACROPLAY2-3

623 MACROPLAY2-4

624 MACROPLAY2-5

625 MACROPLAY2-6

626 MACROPLAY2-7

627 MACROPLAY2-8

628 MACROPLAY2-9

629 MACROPLAY2-10

630 MACROPLAY3-1

631 MACROPLAY3-2

632 MACROPLAY3-3

Source

633 MACROPLAY3-4

634 MACROPLAY3-5

635 MACROPLAY3-6

636 MACROPLAY3-7

637 MACROPLAY3-8

638 MACROPLAY3-9

639 MACROPLAY3-10

640 MACROPLAY4-1

641 MACROPLAY4-2

642 MACROPLAY4-3

643 MACROPLAY4-4

644 MACROPLAY4-5

645 MACROPLAY4-6

646 MACROPLAY4-7

647 MACROPLAY4-8

648 MACROPLAY4-9

649 MACROPLAY4-10

650 MACROPLAY5-1

651 MACROPLAY5-2

652 MACROPLAY5-3

653 MACROPLAY5-4 654 MACROPLAY5-5

655 MACROPLAY5-6 656 MACROPLAY5-7

657 MACROPLAY5-8

658 MACROPLAY5-9 659 MACROPLAY5-10

660 MACROPLAY6-1 661 MACROPLAY6-2 662 MACROPLAY6-3

663 MACROPLAY6-4 664 MACROPLAY6-5 665 MACROPLAY6-6

666 MACROPLAY6-7 667 MACROPLAY6-8

668 MACROPLAY6-9

669 MACROPLAY6-10

670 MACROPLAY7-1

671 MACROPLAY7-2

672 MACROPLAY7-3

673 MACROPLAY7-4

674 MACROPLAY7-5

675 MACROPLAY7-6

676 MACROPLAY7-7

677 MACROPLAY7-8

678 MACROPLAY7-9

Source

679 MACROPLAY7-10

680 MACROPLAY8-1

681 MACROPLAY8-2

682 MACROPLAY8-3

683 MACROPLAY8-4

684 MACROPLAY8-5

685 MACROPLAY8-6

686 MACROPLAY8-7

687 MACROPLAY8-8

688 MACROPLAY8-9

689 MACROPLAY8-10

690 MACROPLAY9-1

691 MACROPLAY9-2

692 MACROPLAY9-3

693 MACROPLAY9-4

694 MACROPLAY9-5

695 MACROPLAY9-6

696 MACROPLAY9-7

697 MACROPLAY9-8

698 MACROPLAY9-9

699 MACROPLAY9-10 700 MACROPLAY10-1

701 MACROPLAY10-2 702 MACROPLAY10-3

703 MACROPLAY10-4

704 MACROPLAY10-5 705 MACROPLAY10-6

706 MACROPLAY10-7 707 MACROPLAY10-8 708 MACROPLAY10-9

709 MACROPLAY10-10 710 SHOTPLAY1-1 711 SHOTPLAY1-2

712 SHOTPLAY1-3 713 SHOTPLAY1-4

714 SHOTPLAY1-5

715 SHOTPLAY1-6

716 SHOTPLAY1-7

717 SHOTPLAY1-8

718 SHOTPLAY1-9

719 SHOTPLAY1-10

720 SHOTPLAY2-1

721 SHOTPLAY2-2

722 SHOTPLAY2-3

723 SHOTPLAY2-4

724 SHOTPLAY2-5

: Unused ID

169

External interfaces

Extended Source ID (continued)

Source

725 SHOTPLAY2-6

771 SHOTPLAY7-2

726 SHOTPLAY2-7

772 SHOTPLAY7-3

727 SHOTPLAY2-8

773 SHOTPLAY7-4

728 SHOTPLAY2-9

774 SHOTPLAY7-5

729 SHOTPLAY2-10

775 SHOTPLAY7-6

730 SHOTPLAY3-1

776 SHOTPLAY7-7

731 SHOTPLAY3-2

777 SHOTPLAY7-8

732 SHOTPLAY3-3

778 SHOTPLAY7-9

733 SHOTPLAY3-4

779 SHOTPLAY7-10

734 SHOTPLAY3-5

780 SHOTPLAY8-1

735 SHOTPLAY3-6

781 SHOTPLAY8-2

736 SHOTPLAY3-7

782 SHOTPLAY8-3

737 SHOTPLAY3-8

783 SHOTPLAY8-4

738 SHOTPLAY3-9

784 SHOTPLAY8-5

739 SHOTPLAY3-10

785 SHOTPLAY8-6

740 SHOTPLAY4-1

786 SHOTPLAY8-7

741 SHOTPLAY4-2

787 SHOTPLAY8-8

742 SHOTPLAY4-3

788 SHOTPLAY8-9

743 SHOTPLAY4-4

789 SHOTPLAY8-10

744 SHOTPLAY4-5

790 SHOTPLAY9-1

745 SHOTPLAY4-6

791 SHOTPLAY9-2

746 SHOTPLAY4-7

792 SHOTPLAY9-3

747 SHOTPLAY4-8

793 SHOTPLAY9-4

748 SHOTPLAY4-9

794 SHOTPLAY9-5

749 SHOTPLAY4-10

795 SHOTPLAY9-6

750 SHOTPLAY5-1

796 SHOTPLAY9-7

751 SHOTPLAY5-2

797 SHOTPLAY9-8

752 SHOTPLAY5-3

798 SHOTPLAY9-9

753 SHOTPLAY5-4

799 SHOTPLAY9-10

754 SHOTPLAY5-5

800 SHOTPLAY10-1

755 SHOTPLAY5-6

801 SHOTPLAY10-2

756 SHOTPLAY5-7

802 SHOTPLAY10-3

757 SHOTPLAY5-8

803 SHOTPLAY10-4

758 SHOTPLAY5-9

804 SHOTPLAY10-5

759 SHOTPLAY5-10

805 SHOTPLAY10-6

760 SHOTPLAY6-1

806 SHOTPLAY10-7

761 SHOTPLAY6-2

807 SHOTPLAY10-8

762 SHOTPLAY6-3

808 SHOTPLAY10-9

763 SHOTPLAY6-4

809 SHOTPLAY10-10

764 SHOTPLAY6-5

810 XPT1

765 SHOTPLAY6-6

811 XPT2

766 SHOTPLAY6-7

812 XPT3

767 SHOTPLAY6-8

813 XPT4

768 SHOTPLAY6-9

814 XPT5

769 SHOTPLAY6-10

815 XPT6

770 SHOTPLAY7-1

816 XPT7

Source

817 XPT8

818 XPT9

819 XPT10

820 XPT11

821 XPT12

822 XPT13

823 XPT14

824 XPT15

825 XPT16

826 XPT17

827 XPT18

828 XPT19

829 XPT20

830 XPT21

831 XPT22

832 XPT23

833 XPT24

834

1024

: Unused ID

170

External interfaces

External Control
<Overview> It is possible to switch the materials of all buses on the AV-UHS500 and transmit and receive the material name information of all buses on the AV-UHS500 with external devices connected to the network such as system controllers and tally interfaces. It is also possible to switch the Key Signal Coupling settings from external devices. It is possible to transmit and receive tally information and Source ID information using a transmission format that is compatible with TSL UMD Protocol V5.0. By connecting to the Remote Camera Controller AW-RP series from Panasonic via IP, it is possible to switch material, transmit and receive Tally information, perform focus assist, and acquire material names for the AV-UHS500 buses using the AW-RP series camera selector. pp Refer to the operating instructions for AW-RP series for
information about control bus settings, etc.
<Preparation> Use a LAN cable to connect the external device to the LAN connector on the rear of AV-UHS500. The unit supports 20 IP connections. When connecting to multiple external devices, connect via a hub. Set IP address so there is no duplication. You can confirm the AV-UHS500 network settings with <CONF/SYS> button [SYSTEM] [NetWork1] sub menu, [NetWork2] sub menu. The initial settings are; IP Address: "192.168.0.8", Subnet Mask: "255.255.255.0".

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display

the System menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the ExtControl Switcher sub menu.

3 Press [F2] to enable/disable the External Control function in the Disable/Enable item.

4 Use [F3] to set the network in the PortNo item.

5 Use [F4] to set the command transmission interval in the IntervalTime item.

6 Use [F5] to make settings for the sending of change notifications for the transmission source in the Response item.

Send a change notification to the

transmission source.

Off

Do not send a change notification to the

transmission source.

7 Use [F1] to display the ExtControl AUX Panel1 to 5 sub menu.

8 Press [F2] to [F5] to set the IP address of the connected external device.
9 Use [F1] to display the ExtControl Aux Panel6 sub menu.

Use [F2] to set the receiving port number of the connected external device. Set to 60031 when connecting to the Remote Camera Controller AW-RP series.

171

External interfaces

Information about the DMSG-CONTROL parameter of the TSL UMD Protocol V5.0 commands TallyGroup1 settings are output when RH tally is output. TallyGroup2 settings are output when TXT tally is output.
When the material name is to be changed It is necessary to set the Type to User with <IN/OUT> button [Input] [Name] sub menu.
<Command specifications> Refer to the AV-UHS500 external interface communications protocol specifications.

Macro Trigger

<Overview> By receiving specific commands via the TCP/IP protocol from external devices connected via the network, it is possible to execute macros that have been set. Use 63000 for the TCP/IP PORT number.

<Preparation> Connect the external device that will apply the macro trigger via the network using a LAN cable to the LAN connector on the rear of AV-UHS500. 20 IP connections are supported. When connecting to multiple external devices, connect via a hub. Set IP address so there is no duplication.

1 Press the

CONF SYS

button to light its indicator, and display

the System menu.

2 Use [F1] to display the Macro Trigger Control1 sub menu.

3 Press [F2] to enable/disable the Macro Trigger function in the Disable/Enable item.
4 Use [F1] to display the Macro Trigger Control2 to 11 sub menu.

5 Press [F2] and [F4] to set the IP address of the external device that will apply the macro trigger via the network in the IP Address item.
6 Press [F3] and [F5] to set the macro to be executed in the Macro item.
7 Register the macro to be executed on AV-UHS500. Refer to "Memory" for information about registering macros.

172

External interfaces

<Command specifications> This document describes the TCP/IP protocol commands transmitted/received between the external device and AV-UHS500.

When the macro setup command (401) is sent from the external device to AV-UHS500, the macro setup response command (451) is returned.

pp Macro setup command (401) (the external device AV-UHS500)

No.

Name

Size

(byte)

Details

0 Start code

2 Fixed to "@S"

2 Source information

Device code

2 Upper 1 byte: device specific 0x19 fixed Lower 1 byte: device number (arbitrarily set from 1 to avoid duplication.)

PROTOCOL ID

1 Fixed to 0

Transaction ID

1 Set to an arbitrary value

IP address

4 IP address of the device

Port number

2 Device port number

12 Destination information

Device code

2 Upper 1 byte: device specific 0x02 fixed Lower 1 byte: device number (arbitrarily set from 1 to avoid duplication.)

PROTOCOL ID

1 Fixed to 0

Transaction ID

1 Set to an arbitrary value

IP address

4 IP address of the device

Port number

2 Device port number 63000=0xF618

22 Information

Control code

23 section header Number of controls

1 Fixed to 0 1 Fixed to 0

Data length

2 Fixed to 3

26 Information 28 section data

Command Data

2 Macro setup 401=0x191 1 Fixed to 0

Reserved

481 Fixed to 0

510 End code

2 Fixed to "@E"

173

External interfaces

pp Macro setup response command (451) (AV-UHS500 the external device)

No.

Name

Size

(byte)

Details

0 Start code

2 Fixed to "@S"

2 Source information

Device code

2 Upper 1 byte: device specific 0x02 fixed Lower 1 byte: device number (arbitrarily set from 1 to avoid duplication.)

PROTOCOL ID

1 Fixed to 0

Transaction ID

1 Transaction ID of the destination when receiving the

command

IP address

4 IP address of the device

Port number

2 Device port number 63000=0xF618

12 Destination information

Device code

2 Upper 1 byte: device specific 0x19 fixed Lower 1 byte: device number (arbitrarily set from 1 to avoid duplication.)

PROTOCOL ID

1 Fixed to 0

Transaction ID

1 Transaction ID of the source when receiving the command

IP address

4 IP address of the device

Port number

2 Device port number

22 Information

Control code

23 section header Number of controls

1 Fixed to 0 1 Fixed to 0

Data length

2 Fixed to 3

26 Information 28 section data

Command Data

2 Macro setup response 451=0x1C3 1 Fixed to 0

Reserved

481 Fixed to 0

510 End code

2 Fixed to "@E"

174

Appearance

Unit: mm (inch)

HDMI IOUT

12G SDI OUT

HDMI IN

12G SDI IN

LAN

OFF AC IN

SIGNAL GND

POWER ON

EXPANTION SLOT B

EXPANTION SLOT A

SV NM

BOOT

TALLY/GPI 2

TALLY/GPI 1

REF

360 (14-3/16)

170 (6-11/16) 130 (5-1/8)

MENU MODE

PICT

MENU OFF

WFM VECT

DISPLAY

SHOT MEM EVENT MEM

STORE RE
CALL

MACRO

DEL

CAM PMEM

EDIT

USER

BKGD CBGD VMEM MACRO

KEY1 CKEY SHOT EVENT

KEY2 KEY3

DSK1 DSK2

XPT

OUT

TIME CAM CONF SYS

7 NEW STILL 1

8 COPY STILL 2

9 PASTE TRIM IN

4 INS CLIP 1

5 DEL CLIP 2

6 MOD TRIM OUT

REV

0/10

UNDO

TRIM OFF

MEMORY / WIPE PATTERN / 10 KEY

XPT DSBL REC -/+ PAGE STOP
TAKE ENTER
PLAY

U8
PRJ SD Card MENU HOLD
BKGD PATT KEY PATT VMEM CAM CONT

KEY1 F/S
AUX
PGM A 1/13
PST B

KEY2 F/S

KEY3 F/S

DSK1 F/S

AMBER : FILL / GREEN : SOURCE

DSK2 F/S

AUX1

AUX BUS DELEGATION

AUX2

2/14

3/15

4/16

5/17

6/18

7/19

AUX3 8/20

AUX4 9/21

DISP CAM
10/22

MV1

PGM

MV2

PVW

AUX /DISP SOURCE

SHIFT

11/23

12/24

SHIFT

MACRO

BKGD MIX WIPE
MIX

KEY MIX WIPE
WIPE

CUT

AUTO

N/R

WIPE DIRECTION

Z ZOOM

POWER ALARM LINK

X/Y PAN/TLT

FTB ON

KEY1 ON

KEY2 ON

KEY3 ON

DSK1 ON

DSK2 ON

440 (17-5/16)

33 (1-5/16)

175

Specifications

Power supply:

AC ( ) 100 V to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

Current consumption: 1.5 A

indicates safety information.

Video connectors
<SDI IN 1> to <SDI IN 8> terminals

8 lines (plus another maximum of 8 lines when using the OPTION unit)
ppConnectors: BNC × 8 ppConnectors <SDI IN 5> to <SDI IN 8> equipped with up-converters. ppConnectors <SDI IN 5> to <SDI IN 8> equipped with color correctors. ppSDI IN 1/2 excludes HDMI IN 1/2.

12G-SDI

12G-SDI, complied with SMPTE ST 2082-10 standard

3G-SDI

3G-SDI, complied with SMPTE292 standard (Compatible with Level-A/Level-B)

HD-SDI

HD-SDI, complied with SMPTE292M standard

<HDMI IN 1> to <HDMI IN 2> terminals

2 lines (plus another maximum of 6 lines when using the OPTION unit) Video format inputs: 720p/59.94 Hz, 720p/50 Hz, 1080i/59.94 Hz, 1080i/50 Hz, 1080p/59.94 Hz, 1080p/50 Hz, 1080p/29.97 Hz, 1080p/25 Hz, 1080p/24 Hz, 1080p/23.98 Hz, 2160p/59.94 Hz, 2160p/50 Hz, 2160p/29.97 Hz, 2160p/25 Hz, 2160p/24 Hz, 2160p/23.98 Hz, 720p/60 Hz, 1080i/60 Hz, 1080p/60 Hz, 2160p/60 Hz ppConnectors: HDMI × 2 ppThis connector does not support the CPRM technologies. ppHDMI IN 1/2 excludes SDI IN 1/2.

<SDI OUT 1> to <SDI OUT 5> terminals

5 lines (plus another maximum of 8 lines when using the OPTION unit) ppConnectors: BNC × 5 ppPGM, PVW, CLN, ME PGM, MV1 to MV2, AUX1 to AUX4, Key Out can be assigned.

12G-SDI

12G-SDI, complied with SMPTE ST 2082-10 standard

3G-SDI

3G-SDI, complied with SMPTE292 standard (Compatible with Level-A)

HD-SDI

HD-SDI, complied with SMPTE292M standard

<HDMI OUT 1> to <HDMI OUT 2> terminals

2 lines (plus another maximum of 6 lines when using the OPTION unit) Video format outputs: 720p/59.94 Hz, 720p/50 Hz, 1080i/59.94 Hz, 1080i/50 Hz, 1080p/59.94Hz, 1080p/50 Hz, 1080p/29.97 Hz, 1080p/25 Hz, 1080p/24 Hz, 1080p/23.98 Hz, 2160p/59.94 Hz, 2160p/50 Hz, 2160p/29.97 Hz, 2160p/25 Hz, 2160p/24 Hz, 2160p/23.98 Hz, 720p/60 Hz, 1080i/60 Hz, 1080p/60 Hz, 2160p/60 Hz ppConnectors :HDMI × 2 ppPGM, PVW, CLN, ME PGM, MV1 to MV2, AUX1 to AUX4, Key Out can be assigned.

Signal formats

2160/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P, 24P, 23.98P, 1080/59.94P, 50P, 29.97Psf, 25Psf, 24Psf, 23.98Psf, 59.94i, 50i, 29.97p, 25p, 24p, 23.98p, 720/59.94P, 50P

Signal processing

R: G: B

4: 4: 4 10 bit/4: 2: 2 10 bit

Y: PB: PR

4: 2: 2 10 bit

ME number

1ME

176

Specifications

Synchronizing connectors

<REF> terminal Reference input/ BB outputs

In Genlock mode: Black burst or Tri-level Sync input signals (with loop-through) ppLoop-through output is performed in external sync mode. ppIf loop-through output is not going to be used, provide a 75 termination. ppConnectors : BNC ppSame field frequencies as those of the system formats supported. ppWith the 1080/24PsF format, only Genlock mode supported. ppWith the 1080/23.98PsF format, black burst with 10 Field ID (SMPTE318M standard met) or Tri-
level Sync signals supported. ppBB signals are output from two connectors in the internal sync mode.

Video delay time

1 line (H)

When the frame synchronizer setting is [Off] and neither the up-converter nor the down-converter is operating

1 frame (F)

When the frame synchronizer setting is on and the up-converter and downconverter are operating

ppWhen the signals have passed through PinP, DVE, multi view, down-converter or HDMI IN, a maximum delay of 1 frame is applied in each case.

Control connectors <LAN> terminal
<TALLY GPI> terminal
Other Ambient operating temperature Ambient operating humidity Storage temperature Storage humidity Mass Dimensions (W × H × D)

Compatible with 1000Base-TX and AUTO-MDIX (For IP control) ppConnecting cable: LAN cable (CAT5E), max. 100 m (328 ft), STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) cable
recommended ppConnectors : RJ-45 INPUT: 8 inputs, general-purpose, photocoupler sensing OUTPUT: 19 outputs, selected from R/G tally, general-purpose ALARM: 1 output, open collector output (negative logic)
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
10% to 90% (no condensation)
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F) 10% to 90% (no condensation) Approx. 7 kg (15.4 lb) 440 mm × 170 mm × 360 mm (17-5/16 inches × 6-11/16 inches × 14-3/16 inches) (excluding protrusions)

177

Setting menu table

pp Settings for items indicated with () are reflected when the item is selected and [F2], [F3], [F4] or [F5] is pressed.

Sub menu
Use [F1] to select.

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4
Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

Background

Border

Parameter

Border

Width

Soft

Setting range

On, Off

0.1 to 100.0

0.0 to 100.0

Default value

Off

5.0

0.0

Border Color Parameter

Hue

Sat

Lum

Load

Setting range

0.0 to 359.9

0.0 to 100.0

0.0 to 108.0

White, Yellow,

Cyan, Green,

Magenta, Red,

Blue, Black

Default value

0.0

100.0

White

Position

Parameter

X-Pos

Y-Pos

Copy To Key1

Setting range

100.00 to

Execute

100.00

Default value

0.00

Modify

Parameter

Trim

Setting range

Off, 16:9, 4:3,

4:3 Smooth

Default value

Off

3D Modify

Parameter

Light

Size

Radius

Angle

Setting range

On, Off

0.0 to 100.0

0.000 to 1.000 45 to 45

Default value

Off

100.0

0.500

Transition

Parameter

TransTime

WaitTime

Wait

Time

Setting range

0 to 999*

Off, On

(Frame)

Default value

1s00f

0s00f

Off

Transition

Parameter

Margin

Start

End

Margin

Setting range

Off, On

0.0 to 100.0

Default value

Off

0.0

Clip Trans Sync Parameter

Clip1

Clip2

Setting range

Off, AUTO,

KEY1 ON, KEY2 KEY1 ON, KEY2

ON, KEY3 ON, ON, KEY3 ON,

DSK1 ON, DSK2 DSK1 ON, DSK2

ON, FTB ON, ON, FTB ON,

Fader

Default value

Off

*: Items with frame count indications will in fact be displayed with the time corresponding to the Format.

178

Setting menu table

Menu
Color Background

Sub menu
Use [F1] to select. CBGD1 Main Parameter
Setting range

CBGD1 Sub

Default value Parameter Setting range

CBGD1 Wash CBGD1 Wave CBGD1 Move

Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range

CBGD2 Main

Default value Parameter Setting range

CBGD2 Sub

Default value Parameter Setting range

CBGD2 Wash CBGD2 Wave CBGD2 Move

Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range

Default value

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

Hue

Sat

Lum

Load

0.0 to 359.9

0.0 to 100.0

0.0 to 108.0

White, Yellow,

Cyan, Green,

Magenta, Red,

Blue, Black

120.0

100.0

Blue

Hue

Sat

Lum

Load

0.0 to 359.9

0.0 to 100.0

0.0 to 108.0

White, Yellow,

Cyan, Green,

Magenta, Red,

Blue, Black

0.0

100.0

White

Wash

Color

R-Sat

R-Lum

On, Off

Dual, Rainbow 0.0 to 100.0 0.0 to 108.0

Off

Dual

100.0

Pattern

Cycle

Phase

Angle

Sine, Saw

0 to 100

180.0 to 180.0 0.0 to 360.0

Sine

0.0

Move

Speed

Off, Roll,

50.0 to 50.0

Rotation

Off

1.0

Hue

Sat

Lum

Load

0.0 to 359.9

0.0 to 100.0

0.0 to 108.0

White, Yellow,

Cyan, Green,

Magenta, Red,

Blue, Black

0.0

100.0

Red

Hue

Sat

Lum

Load

0.0 to 359.9

0.0 to 100.0

0.0 to 108.0

White, Yellow,

Cyan, Green,

Magenta, Red,

Blue, Black

0.0

100.0

White

Wash

Color

R-Sat

R-Lum

On, Off

Dual, Rainbow 0.0 to 100.0 0.0 to 108.0

Off

Dual

100.0

Pattern

Cycle

Phase

Angle

Sine, Saw

0 to 100

180.0 to 180.0 0.0 to 360.0

Sine

0.0

Move

Speed

Off, Roll,

50.0 to 50.0

Rotation

Off

1.0

179

Setting menu table

Menu
Key1

Sub menu

Use [F1] to select.

Key

Parameter

Setting range

Adjust Fill Matte

Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range

Edge1 Edge2

Default value Parameter Setting range
Default value Parameter Setting range

Edge Color

Default value Parameter Setting range

Transition Position

Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range

Flying Key Rotation/Size

Default value Parameter
Setting range

Flying Key Rotation

Default value Parameter
Setting range

Flying Key Aspect
3D Modify

Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range Default value

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

Type

Lum Key

Fill

PVW

Lum, Linear, Chroma On, Bus, Matte

Auto, Off, On

Chroma, Full Chroma Off

Linear

Chroma Off

Bus

Auto

Clip

Gain

Density

Invert

0.0 to 108.0

0.0 to 200.0

0.0 to 100.0

On, Off

0.0

100.0

Off

Hue

Sat

Lum

Load

0.0 to 359.9

0.0 to 100.0

0.0 to 108.0

White, Yellow,

Cyan, Green,

Magenta, Red,

Blue, Black

0.0

100.0

White

Type

Width

Direction

Density

Off, Border, 0 to 4

0, 45, 90, 135, 25%, 50%,

Drop, Shadow,

180, 225, 270, 75%, 100%

Outline

315

Off

100%

Edge Fill

Color, CBGD1,

CBGD2, Still1,

Still2, Clip1,

Clip2

Color

Hue

Sat

Lum

Load

0.0 to 359.9

0.0 to 100.0

0.0 to 108.0

White, Yellow,

Cyan, Green,

Magenta, Red,

Blue, Black

0.0

Black

Keyout Pattern

Normal, Reverse

Normal

X-Pos

Y-Pos

Copy To BKGD

100.00 to

Execute

100.00

0.00

X-Pos

Y-Pos

Size

100.00 to 100.00 0.00 X

100.00 to 100.00 0.00 Y

0.0 to 400.0
100.0 Z

2880.0 to 2880.0 0.0 X

2880.0 to 2880.0 0.0 Y

2880.0 to 2880.0 0.0

50.00 to 100.00 50.00 to 100.00

100.00

Light

Size

Radius

On, Off

0.0 to 100.0

0.000 to 1.000

Off

100.0

0.500

Angle 45 to 45 0

180

Setting menu table

Menu
Key1

Sub menu

Use [F1] to select.

Mask

Parameter

Setting range

Mask Adjust PinP

Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range

PinP Border PinP Position

Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range

PinP Trim

Default value Parameter Setting range

PinP Trim Adjust
PinP Sync

Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range

Key Signal Coupling
Key Priority
Key On

Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range Default value

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

Mask

Invert

Off, Manual, On, Off

4:3

Off

Left

Top

Bottom

Right

50.00 to 50.00 50.00 to 50.00 50.00 to 50.00 50.00 to 50.00

25.00

PinP

Full Key

Shape

Density

On, Off

Square, Circle, 0.0 to 100.0

Heart, Flower,

Star

Off

Square

100.0

Border

Width

Soft

Mode

On, Off

0.1 to 100.0

0.0 to 100.0

Fix, Variable

Off

5.0

0.0

Fix

X-Pos

Y-Pos

Size

100.00 to

0.0 to 100.0

100.00

0.00

25.0

Trim

Pair

Preset

Off, On

On, Off

16:9, 12:9,

(Disabled when set to anything other than Square)

9:9, 7:9, 6:9, Manual

Off

16:9

Left

Top

Bottom

Right

50.00 to 50.00 50.00 to 50.00 50.00 to 50.00 50.00 to 50.00

50.00

Symmetry

Copy To DSK1

Off, X, Y, Center, Same

Execute

Off

Independent

On, Off Off Key1 1st, 2nd, 3rd 3rd Key1 On, Off Off

Key2 1st, 2nd, 3rd 2nd

Key3 1st, 2nd, 3rd 1st

181

Setting menu table

Menu
Key2

Sub menu

Use [F1] to select.

Key

Parameter

Setting range

Adjust Fill Matte

Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range

Edge1 Edge2

Default value Parameter Setting range
Default value Parameter Setting range

Edge Color

Default value Parameter Setting range

Mask

Default value Parameter Setting range

Mask Adjust PinP

Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range

PinP Border PinP Position

Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range

Default value

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

Type

Lum Key

Fill

PVW

Lum, Linear, Full Chroma On, Bus, Matte

Off, On

Chroma Off

Linear

Chroma Off

Bus

Off

Clip

Gain

Density

Invert

0.0 to 108.0

0.0 to 200.0

0.0 to 100.0

On, Off

0.0

100.0

Off

Hue

Sat

Lum

Load

0.0 to 359.9

0.0 to 100.0

0.0 to 108.0

White, Yellow,

Cyan, Green,

Magenta, Red,

Blue, Black

0.0

100.0

White

Type

Width

Direction

Density

Off, Border, 0 to 4

0, 45, 90, 135, 25%, 50%,

Drop, Shadow,

180, 225, 270, 75%, 100%

Outline

315

Off

100%

Edge Fill

Color, CBGD1,

CBGD2, Still1,

Still2, Clip1,

Clip2

Color

Hue

Sat

Lum

Load

0.0 to 359.9

0.0 to 100.0

0.0 to 108.0

White, Yellow,

Cyan, Green,

Magenta, Red,

Blue, Black

0.0

100.0

Black

Mask

Invert

Off, Manual, On, Off

4:3

Off

Left

Top

Bottom

Right

50.00 to 50.00 50.00 to 50.00 50.00 to 50.00 50.00 to 50.00

25.00

PinP

Full Key

Shape

Density

On, Off

Square, Circle, 0.0 to 100.0

Heart, Flower,

Star

Off

Square

100.0

Border

Width

Soft

Mode

Off, On

0.1 to 100.0

0.0 to 100.0

Fix, Variable

Off

5.0

0.0

Fix

X-Pos

Y-Pos

Size

100.00 to

0.00 to 100.00

100.00

0.00

25.00

182

Setting menu table

Menu
Key2

Sub menu

Use [F1] to select.

PinP Trim

Parameter

Setting range

Key3

PinP Trim Adjust PinP Sync
Key Signal Coupling Key Priority Key On Key
Adjust Fill Matte

Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range
Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range
Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range

Mask

Default value Parameter Setting range

Mask Adjust
Key Signal Coupling
Key Priority
Key On

Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range Default value

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

Trim

Pair

Preset

Off, On (Disabled when set to anything other than Square)

Off, On

16:9, 12:9, 9:9, 7:9, 6:9, Manual

Off

16:9

Left

Top

Bottom

Right

50.00 to 50.00 50.00 to 50.00 50.00 to 50.00 50.00 to 50.00

40.00

Symmetry

Copy To DSK1

Off, X, Y,

Execute

Center, Same

Off

Independent

On, Off

Off

Key1

Key2

Key3

1st, 2nd, 3rd 1st, 2nd, 3rd 1st, 2nd, 3rd

3rd

2nd

1st

Key2

On, Off

Off

Type

Lum Key

Fill

PVW

Lum, Linear, Full Chroma On, Bus, Matte

Off, On

Chroma Off

Linear

Chroma Off

Bus

Off

Clip

Gain

Density

Invert

0.0 to 108.0

0.0 to 200.0

0.0 to 100.0

On, Off

0.0

100.0

Off

Hue

Sat

Lum

Load

0.0 to 359.9

0.0 to 100.0

0.0 to 108.0

White, Yellow,

Cyan, Green,

Magenta, Red, Blue, Black

0.0

100.0

White

Mask

Invert

Off, Manual, On, Off

4:3

Off

Left

Top

Bottom

Right

50.00 to 50.00 50.00 to 50.00 50.00 to 50.00 50.00 to 50.00

25.00

Independent

On, Off Off Key1 1st, 2nd, 3rd 3rd Key2 On, Off Off

Key2 1st, 2nd, 3rd 2nd

Key3 1st, 2nd, 3rd 1st

183

Setting menu table

Menu
Chroma Key

Sub menu
Use [F1] to select. Chroma Key Parameter
Setting range

Default value

Auto Compute Parameter

Setting range

Default value

Adjust

Parameter

Setting range

Sampling

Default value Parameter Setting range

DSK1

Default value

Sampling Area Parameter

Setting range

Default value

Fine Tuning Parameter

Setting range

Default value

Adjusting Mode

Parameter

Setting range

Value

Default value Parameter Setting range

DSK

Default value Parameter Setting range

Adjust Fill Matte

Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range

Default value

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

Select

Key Type

Key1, DSK1

Linked to the Key Type of Key1 or DSK selected in Select

Key1

Auto Compute

Reset

Execute

Narrow

Phase

Off, 0.5, 1.0, 4.0 to 4.0

1.5

Off

0.0

View

Mode

Sampling

Composite,

Select BG, Clean Execute

Matte, Proc FG, BG, Clean FG,

Sponge, Fine

Tuning

Composite

Select BG Color

Undo Execute

X-Pos

Y-Pos

Size

50.00 to 50.00 50.00 to 50.00 1.00 to 100.00

0.00

10.00

Spill

Trans

Detail

1000 to 1000 1000 to 1000 1000 to 1000

Adjusting Mode

Sample Mode, Value Mode

Sample Mode

ColorCancel 100.00 to 100.00

FG Trans 100.00 to 100.00

BG Clean 100.00 to 100.00

0.00 Type Lum, Linear, Chroma, Full Linear Clip 0.0 to 108.0 0.0 Hue 0.0 to 359.9

0.00 Lum Key Chroma On, Chroma Off Chroma Off Gain 0.0 to 200.0 100.0 Sat 0.0 to 100.0

0.0

0.00 Fill Bus, Matte
Bus Density 0.0 to 100.0 100.0 Lum 0.0 to 108.0
100.0

PVW Off, On
Off Invert On, Off Off Load White, Yellow, Cyan, Green, Magenta, Red, Blue, Black White

184

Setting menu table

Menu
DSK1

Sub menu

Use [F1] to select.

Mask

Parameter

Setting range

Mask Adjust PinP

Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range

PinP Border PinP Position PinP Trim

Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range

PinP Trim Adjust
PinP Sync

Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range

DSK Priority
DSK Signal Coupling
DSK On

Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range Default value

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

Mask

Invert

Off, Manual, On, Off

4:3

Off

Left

Top

Bottom

Right

50.00 to 50.00 50.00 to 50.00 50.00 to 50.00 50.00 to 50.00

25.00

PinP

Full Key

Shape

Density

On, Off

Square, Circle, 0.0 to 100.0

Heart, Flower,

Star

Off

Square

100.0

Border

Width

Soft

Mode

Off, On

0.1 to 100.0

0.0 to 100.0

Fix, Variable

Off

5.0

0.0

Fix

X-Pos

Y-Pos

Size

100.0 to 100.0 100.0 to 100.0 0.0 to 100.0

0.00

25.0

Trim

Pair

Preset

Off, On

16:9, 12:9,

(Disabled when set to anything other than Square)

9:9, 7:9, 6:9, Manual

Off

16:9

Left

Top

Bottom

Right

50.00 to 50.00 50.00 to 50.00 50.00 to 50.00 50.00 to 50.00

50.00

Symmetry

Copy To Key2

Off, X, Y,

Execute

Center, Same

Off

DSK1

DSK2

1st, 2nd

2nd

1st

Independent

On, Off Off DSK1 On, Off Off

185

Setting menu table

Menu
DSK2

Sub menu

Use [F1] to select.

DSK

Parameter

Setting range

Adjust Fill Matte

Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range

Mask

Default value Parameter Setting range

Mask Adjust
DSK Priority
DSK Signal Coupling
DSK On

Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range Default value

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

Type

Lum Key

Fill

PVW

Lum, Linear, Full Chroma On, Bus, Matte

Off, On

Chroma Off

Linear

Chroma Off

Bus

Off

Clip

Gain

Density

Invert

0.0 to 108.0

0.0 to 200.0

0.0 to 100.0

On, Off

0.0

100.0

Off

Hue

Sat

Lum

Load

0.0 to 359.9

0.0 to 100.0

0.0 to 108.0

White, Yellow,

Cyan, Green,

Magenta, Red,

Blue, Black

0.0

100.0

White

Mask

Invert

Off, Manual, On, Off

4:3

Off

Left

Top

Bottom

Right

50.00 to 50.00 50.00 to 50.00 50.00 to 50.00 50.00 to 50.00

25.00

DSK1

DSK2

1st, 2nd

2nd

1st

Independent

On, Off Off DSK2 On, Off Off

186

Setting menu table

Menu
Time

Sub menu

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F1] to select.

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

BKGD

Parameter

TransTime

WaitTime

Wait

Setting range

0 to 999*

Off, On

(Frame)

Default value

1s00f

Off

Key1

Parameter

TransTime

Setting range

0 to 999*

(Frame)

Default value

1s00f

Key2

Parameter

TransTime

Setting range

0 to 999*

(Frame)

Default value

1s00f

Key3

Parameter

TransTime

Setting range

0 to 999*

(Frame)

Default value

1s00f

DSK1

Parameter

TransTime

Setting range

0 to 999*

(Frame)

Default value

1s00f

DSK2

Parameter

TransTime

Setting range

0 to 999*

(Frame)

Default value

1s00f

AUX1 BUS

Parameter

TransTime

Transition

Trans

Setting range

0 to 999*

On, Off

(Frame)

Default value

1s00f

Off

AUX2 BUS

Parameter

TransTime

Transition

Trans

Setting range

0 to 999*

On, Off

(Frame)

Default value

1s00f

Off

Effect Dissolve Parameter

TransTime

Setting range

0 to 999*

(Frame)

Default value

1s00f

FTB

Parameter

TransTime

Setting range

0 to 999*

(Frame)

Default value

1s00f

*: Items with frame count indications will in fact be displayed with the time corresponding to the Format.

187

Setting menu table

Menu
Camera

Sub menu

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F1] to select.

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

Camera

Parameter

Input Selection Name

Model

Status

Information

Setting range

Default value

IN1

Model name of the camera "" is displayed if no camera is connected.

*3 No IP Address

Camera

Parameter

Power

All Power On All Standby Z-Dial Usage

Control

Setting range

Standby, On Execute

Execute

P-T Sp. & Zoom,

P-T Speed Only

Default value

Undetermined (depends on the settings on the camera)

P-T Sp. & Zoom

Control Speed Parameter

Pan & Tilt

Zoom

Focus

Iris

Setting range

1 to 32

Default value

OSD Menu & Parameter

OSD Menu

Color Bars

Operation

Setting range

On, Off

(Turn or Push) On, Off

Default value

Undetermined (depends on the settings on the camera)

Lens Control Parameter

Auto Focus

Auto Iris

Setting range

On, Off

Default value

Undetermined (depends on the settings on the camera)

AWB

Parameter

AWB

Last AWB

AWB Mode

Result

Setting range

Execute

, Successful, ATW, AWB A,

Failed

AWB B,

3200K, 5600K,

VAR

Default value

Undetermined

(depends on the

settings on the

camera)

*1: IN1, IN2, SDI IN3, SDI IN4, SDI IN5, SDI IN6, SDI IN7, SDI IN8, HDMI IN1, HDMI IN2, SlotA HDMI IN board is inserted: IN-A1, IN-A2, IN-A3, SlotA SDI IN board is inserted: IN-A1, IN-A2, IN-A3, IN-A4, SlotB HDMI IN board is inserted: IN-B1, IN-B2, IN-B3 SlotB SDI IN board is inserted: IN-B1, IN-B2, IN-B3, IN-B4

*2: Name registered on the camera. When a camera is not connected, "" is displayed. When the camera name is just a single space, "(Standby Mode)" is displayed.

*3: No IP Address, Now Checking..., Connected, Unauthorized, Not Connected, Please Wait..., Pan & Tilt Alarm, Fan Alarm, Other Alarm

188

Setting menu table

Menu
Camera

Sub menu

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F1] to select.

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

ABB

Parameter

ABB

Last ABB

Result

Setting range

Execute

, Successful,

Failed

Default value

Gain1

Parameter

Gain

R Gain

B Gain

Setting range

Default value

Undetermined (depends on the settings on the camera)

Gain2

Parameter

AGC Max Gain Super Gain

Setting range

ON, OFF

Default value

Undetermined (depends on the settings on the camera)

Pedestal

Parameter

M Ped.

R Ped.

G Ped.

B Ped.

Setting range

100 to 100 100 to 100 100 to 100

Default value

Undetermined (depends on the settings on the camera)

Preset Settings Parameter

Preset Scope Speed

Preset Sp. Unit Preset Sp.Table

Setting range

Mode A, Mode *5

Speed Table, Slow, Fast

B, Mode C

Time

Default value

Undetermined (depends on the settings on the camera)

Lock

Parameter

Pan & Tilt Lock Zoom Lock

Focus Lock

Iris Lock

Setting range

On, Off

Default value

Off

*1: AW-UE100/AW-UE150/AW-HR140: 0 to 42 dB, AGC (Super Gain: ON), 0 to 36 dB, AGC (Super Gain: OFF)
AW-HE130/AW-HN130: 0 to 36 dB, AGC
AW-UE70/AW-UN70/AW-HE40/AW-HN40/AW-HE42: 0, 3, ..., 48 dB (3 dB increments), AGC
*2: AW-UE100/AW-UE150: 200 to 200 AW-HR140/AW-HE130/AW-HN130: 150 to 150 AW-UE70/AW-UN70/AW-HE40/AW-HN40/AW-HE42: 30 to 30
*3: AW-UE100/AW-UE150: 200 to 200 AW-HR140/AW-HE130/AW-HN130: 150 to 150 AW-UE70/AW-UN70/AW-HE40/AW-HN40/AW-HE42: 10 to 10

*4: AW-UE100/AW-UE150/AW-HR140/AW-HE130/AW-HN130: 6 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB AW-UE70/AW-UN70/AW-HE40/AW-HN40/AW-HE42: 6 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, 24 dB, 30 dB, 36 dB, 42 dB, 48 dB

*5: AW-UE100/AW-UE150: 1 to 30 (Preset Sp.Unit: Speed Table) 1 to 99 (Preset Sp.Unit: Time) Other than AW-UE100/AW-UE150: 1 to 30

189

Setting menu table

Menu
Project File
SD Card

Sub menu

Use [F1] to select.

Last Load File Parameter

Setting range

Default value

Last Load Date Parameter

Setting range

Default value

Project File

Parameter

Setting range

Default value

Target Select1 Parameter

Setting range

Default value

Target Select2 Parameter

Setting range

Default value

Card

Parameter

Management

Setting range

Default value

Mode

Parameter

Setting range

Default value

File

Parameter

Setting range

Default value

Target Select1 Parameter

Setting range

Default value

Target Select2 Parameter

Setting range

Default value

Create

Parameter

Thumbnail

Setting range

Default value

Card

Parameter

Information

Setting range

Default value

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

Media

File Name

Display only

Display only Date

Load Execute

Display only Save Execute

Delete Execute

Rename Execute

Setup On, Off On Still On, Off Off Mount

Shot On, Off On Still Playlist On, Off Off Unmount

Event On, Off On Clip On, Off Off

Macro On, Off On
Format

Execute

Load Execute
Save Execute
Setup On, Off On Still On, Off Off Still

Delete Execute
Save Type Still1, Still2, Clip1, Clip2, Project, Log Project Shot On, Off On Clip On, Off Off Clip

Rename Execute
Format bmp, tga, png, jpeg, tif, gif

Sort Newest, Oldest, Name Name

png Event On, Off On

Macro On, Off On

Execute

Free

Total

190

Setting menu table

Menu
Video Memory When Still1, Sitll2
Video Memory When Clip1, Clip2

Sub menu

Use [F1] to select.

Video

Parameter

Memory1

Setting range

Rec1 Rec2 Memory

Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range

Video Memory1

Default value Parameter
Setting range

Video Memory2
Video Memory3
Rec1
Rec2
Rec3
Limit Time

Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter
Setting range
Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range

Play Mode1

Default value Parameter Setting range

Play Mode2

Default value Parameter Setting range

Memory

Default value Parameter Setting range
Default value

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

Select

Rec

Key

Still1, Still2, Clip1, Clip2 Still1 VMEM Video AUX1 to 4 AUX1 Preview On, Off Off Mode Auto, Manual
Auto Select

Execute

On, Off

VMEM Key AUX1 to 4 AUX1 Key Enable On, Off On Select Still1, Still2, Clip1, Clip2, All All Rec

Review On, Off On
Play

Save Execute
Stop

Still1, Still2, Clip1, Clip2 Still1 LEAD

Execute LAST

Execute

Total Time

Current Time Key

The setting range differs with each On, Off format.

VMEM Video VMEM Key

AUX1 to 4

AUX1

Preview

Key Enable

Review

On, Off

Off

Loop

Quality

Audio

On, Off

High, Standard On, Off

Off

Standard

Mode

1f to 2m00s00f (when 59.94i)

5s00f

Mode

Reverse

Variable

Lead, Last, Loop On, Off

x1, x2, x4, x8, x1/2, x1/4,

x1/8

Last

Off

Trans Sync

Audio

Off, Auto, KEY1

On, Off

ON, KEY2 ON, KEY3 ON, DSK1

ON, DSK2 ON,

FTB ON, Fader

Off

Mode

Select

Auto, Manual Still1, Still2, Clip1, Clip2, All

Auto

All

Freeze Frame, Field Frame
Save Execute

191

Setting menu table

Menu
Macro

Sub menu

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F1] to select.

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

Store Select1 Parameter

DSK

AUX

Setting range

On, Off

Default value

Store Select2 Parameter

XPT

OTHER

Setting range

On, Off

Default value

Insert Delay Parameter

Time

Set

Setting range

0 to 600*

Execute

(Frame)

Default value

1s00f

Macro Assign Parameter

XPT1

XPT2

XPT3

XPT4

1/6

Setting range

Macro001 to Macro001 to Macro001 to Macro001 to

Macro100,

PlayCancel, No PlayCancel, No PlayCancel, No PlayCancel, No

Assign

Default value

No Assign

Macro Assign Parameter

XPT5

XPT6

XPT7

XPT8

2/6

Setting range

Macro001 to Macro001 to Macro001 to Macro001 to

Macro100,

PlayCancel, No PlayCancel, No PlayCancel, No PlayCancel, No

Assign

Default value

No Assign

Macro Assign Parameter

XPT9

XPT10

XPT11

XPT12

3/6

Setting range

Macro001 to Macro001 to Macro001 to Macro001 to

Macro100,

PlayCancel, No PlayCancel, No PlayCancel, No PlayCancel, No

Assign

Default value

No Assign

Macro Assign Parameter

XPT13

XPT14

XPT15

XPT16

4/6

Setting range

Macro001 to Macro001 to Macro001 to Macro001 to

Macro100,

PlayCancel, No PlayCancel, No PlayCancel, No PlayCancel, No

Assign

Default value

No Assign

Macro Assign Parameter

XPT17

XPT18

XPT19

XPT20

5/6

Setting range

Macro001 to Macro001 to Macro001 to Macro001 to

Macro100,

PlayCancel, No PlayCancel, No PlayCancel, No PlayCancel, No

Assign

Default value

No Assign

Macro Assign Parameter

XPT21

XPT22

XPT23

XPT24

6/6

Setting range

Macro001 to Macro001 to Macro001 to Macro001 to

Macro100,

PlayCancel, No PlayCancel, No PlayCancel, No PlayCancel, No

Assign

Default value

No Assign

*: Items with frame count indications will in fact be displayed with the time corresponding to the Format.

192

Setting menu table

Menu
Macro Shot Memory
Event Memory

Sub menu

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F1] to select.

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

Parameter

Page

No.

Rename

Setting range

1 to 10

Execute

Default value

Attach

Parameter

Enable

Attach Setting

Setting range

Off, On

Execute

Default value

Off

Target Select1 Parameter

DSK

AUX

Setting range

On, Off

Default value

Target Select2 Parameter

CBGD

Setting range

On, Off

Default value

Parameter

Page

No.

Rename

Setting range

1 to 10

Execute

Default value

Path

Parameter

Effect

Hue Path

Setting range

Cut, Dissolve Short, Long,

CW, CCW

Default value

Dissolve

Short

Mark

Parameter

PAUSE

CLIP

GPI-Out

Setting range

On, Off

Off, Clip1, Clip2 Off, GPI-O1 to

GPI-O19

Default value

Off

Event Duration Parameter

(Time)

Set

Setting range

0 to 215999* Execute

(Frame)

Default value

1s00f

Total Duration Parameter

(Time)

Set

Setting range

0 to 215999* Execute

(Frame)

Default value

1s00f

Timeline

Parameter

View

Setting range

Normal, Wide

Default value

Wide

Play

Parameter

Loop

Play Mode

Setting range

Once, Loop

Normal, Reverse

Default value

Once

Normal

Target Select1 Parameter

DSK

AUX

Setting range

On, Off

Default value

Target Select2 Parameter

CBGD

CLIP

Setting range

On, Off

Default value

Parameter

Page

No.

Rename

Setting range

1 to 10

Execute

Default value

Path

Parameter

Trans Path

Hue Path

Setting range

Linear, Spline, Short, Long,

Step

CW, CCW, Step

Default value

Linear

*: Items with frame count indications will in fact be displayed with the time corresponding to the Format.

193

Setting menu table

Menu
XPT

Sub menu
Use [F1] to select. XPT Assign 1/6 Parameter
Setting range

Default value

XPT Assign 2/6 Parameter Setting range Default value

XPT Assign 3/6 Parameter

Setting range Default value

XPT Assign 4/6 Parameter Setting range Default value

XPT Assign 5/6 Parameter Setting range Default value

XPT Assign 6/6 Parameter Setting range Default value

XPT Setting

Parameter Setting range

Default value

XPT Switch

Parameter Setting range

Multi View Display MV

Default value Parameter Setting range Default value

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

XPT1 Signal XPT2 Signal XPT3 Signal XPT4 Signal

IN1, IN2, SDI IN3 to 8, IN-A1, IN-A2, IN-A3, IN-A4, IN-B1, IN-B2, IN-

B3, IN-B4, Black, CBGD 1, CBGD 2, CBAR, Still 1V, Still 1K, Still 2V, Still 2K, Clip 1V, Clip 1K, Clip 2V, Clip 2K, CLN, Key Out, None

IN1

IN2

SDI IN3

SDI IN4

XPT5 Signal XPT6 Signal XPT7 Signal XPT8 Signal

The setting range is the same as for the XPT Assign 1/6 sub menu.

SDI IN5

SDI IN6

SDI IN7

SDI IN8

XPT9 Signal XPT10 Signal XPT11 Signal XPT12 Signal

The setting range is the same as for the XPT Assign 1/6 sub menu.

CBAR

CBGD 1

CBGD 2

None

XPT13 Signal XPT14 Signal XPT15 Signal XPT16 Signal

The setting range is the same as for the XPT Assign 1/6 sub menu.

None

XPT17 Signal XPT18 Signal XPT19 Signal XPT20 Signal

The setting range is the same as for the XPT Assign 1/6 sub menu.

None

XPT21 Signal XPT22 Signal XPT23 Signal XPT24 Signal

The setting range is the same as for the XPT Assign 1/6 sub menu.

None

Shift

Shift-Lock

Off, Right, Left On, Off

Right

Off

Timing

Any, Field1,

Field2

Any

Select

MV1, MV2

MV1

194

Setting menu table

Menu
Multi View Display
When MV1

Sub menu

Use [F1] to select.

MV Split

Parameter

Setting range

MV Pattern 1/4

Default value Parameter
Setting range

MV Pattern 2/4
MV Pattern 3/4
MV Pattern 4/4
MV Frame
MV Tally Group1
MV Tally Group2
Display

Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range
Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range

Default value

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

Split

4Split, 5-aSplit,

5-bSplit,

6-aSplit,

6-bSplit, 9Split,

10-aSplit,

10-bSplit,

12Split, 16Split

10-aSplit

Pos1 Signal

Pos2 Signal

Pos3 Signal

Pos4 Signal

IN1, IN2, SDI IN3, SDI IN4, SDI IN5, SDI IN6, SDI IN7, SDI IN8, IN-

A1, IN-A2, IN-A3, IN-A4, IN-B1, IN-B2, IN-B3, IN-B4, Black, CBGD 1,

CBGD 2, CBAR, Still 1V, Still 1K, Still 2V, Still 2K, Clip 1V, Clip 1K,

Clip 2V, Clip 2K, PGM, PVW, CLN, ME PGM, Key Out, MV1, MV2,

AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, AUX4, Clock

PGM

PVW

IN1

IN2

Pos5 Signal

Pos6 Signal

Pos7 Signal

Pos8 Signal

The setting range is the same as for the MV Pattern 1/4 sub menu.

SDI IN3

SDI IN4

SDI IN5

SDI IN6

Pos9 Signal Pos10 Signal Pos11 Signal Pos12 Signal

The setting range is the same as for the MV Pattern 1/4 sub menu.

SDI IN7

SDI IN8

Still 1V

Still 2V

Pos13 Signal Pos14 Signal Pos15 Signal Pos16 Signal

The setting range is the same as for the MV Pattern 1/4 sub menu.

Clip 1V

Clip 2V

AUX1

AUX2

Frame

Character

Label

LUM0%, LUM25%, LUM50%, On, Off

LUM75%, LUM100%, Off

LUM75%

Box

Label Left

Label Right

On, Off Off Box

On, Off Off Label Left

On, Off Off Label Right

On, Off Off Level Meter OFF, IN ON, OUT ON, IN/OUT ON OFF

On, Off Off Input Status On, Off
On

On, Off Off Marker 4:3, 16:9, Off

Marker Size 80 to 100%

Off

95%

195

Setting menu table

Menu
Multi View Display
When MV2

Sub menu

Use [F1] to select.

MV Split

Parameter

Setting range

Input

MV Pattern 1/4

Default value Parameter
Setting range

MV Pattern 2/4
MV Pattern 3/4
MV Pattern 4/4
MV Frame

Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range

MV Tally Red
MV Tally Green
Display

Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range

Input

Default value Parameter Setting range

Default value

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

Split

4Split, 5-aSplit,

5-bSplit,

6-aSplit,

6-bSplit, 9Split,

10-aSplit,

10-bSplit,

12Split, 16Split

10-aSplit

Pos1 Signal

Pos2 Signal

Pos3 Signal

Pos4 Signal

IN1, IN2, SDI IN3, SDI IN4, SDI IN5, SDI IN6, SDI IN7, SDI IN8, IN-

A1, IN-A2, IN-A3, IN-A4, IN-B1, IN-B2, IN-B3, IN-B4, Black, CBGD 1,

CBGD 2, CBAR, Still 1V, Still 1K, Still 2V, Still 2K, Clip 1V, Clip 1K,

Clip 2V, Clip 2K, PGM, PVW, CLN, ME PGM, Key Out, MV1, MV2,

AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, AUX4, Clock

IN1

IN2

CBGD 1

CBGD 2

Pos5 Signal

Pos6 Signal

Pos7 Signal

Pos8 Signal

The setting range is the same as for the MV Pattern 1/4 sub menu.

CBAR

Black

Still 1K

Clip 1K

Pos9 Signal Pos10 Signal Pos11 Signal Pos12 Signal

The setting range is the same as for the MV Pattern 1/4 sub menu.

CLN

ME PGM

Key Out

AUX1

Pos13 Signal Pos14 Signal Pos15 Signal Pos16 Signal

The setting range is the same as for the MV Pattern 1/4 sub menu.

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

Clock

Frame

Character

Label

LUM0%, LUM25%, LUM50%, On, Off

LUM75%, LUM100%, Off

LUM75%

Box

Label Left

Label Right

On, Off

Off

Box

Label Left

Label Right

On, Off

Off

Level Meter Input Status

OFF, IN ON, On, Off

OUT ON,

IN/OUT ON

OFF

Select

IN1, IN2, SDI

IN3, SDI IN4,

SDI IN5, SDI

IN6, SDI IN7,

SDI IN8,

IN-A1, IN-A2,

IN-A3, IN-A4,

IN-B1, IN-B2, IN-

B3, IN-B4

IN1

On, Off Off Marker 4:3, 16:9, Off

Marker Size 80 to 100%

Off Color Space HDR BT.2020, HDR BT.709, SDR BT.709

95% SDI/HDMI SDI IN, HDMI IN

SDR BT.709 SDI IN

196

Setting menu table

Sub menu
Use [F1] to select.

Input (SDI) / X(***) Status

Parameter

Setting range

p IN1, IN2, SDI IN3 to 8, IN-A1 to 4 or IN-B1 FS to 4 is displayed in
the X part. p The material name
(up to 32 characters) is displayed in the *** Freeze
part.

Default value Parameter Setting range
Default value Parameter Setting range

Default value

Name

Parameter Setting range

Default value

Up/Down Converter

Parameter

Setting range

Default value

ROI

Parameter

Setting range

Default value

ROI Preset

Parameter

Setting range

Default value C/C Operation Parameter
Setting range

C/C Process
C/C Tone1 Black
C/C Tone2 Gray L
C/C Tone3 Gray H
C/C Tone4 White

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

Format

Audio

Color Space

Mode Off, Normal, Auto Auto Select Frame, Field Frame Type Default, User Default Move Detect

Delay 0F to 8F
0F Freeze On, Off Off Name
Sharp

1 to 5 3

Pos-X

Pos-Y

Size

Pos-Speed

45.00 to 45.00 45.00 to 45.00 10.00 to 100.00 1 to 100

0.00 TransTime

0.00

100.0

00s00f to 16s39f

01s00f C/C On, Off
Off Y-Gain

Limit Off, 108, 104, 100 Off Pedestal

C-Gain

Hue

0.0 to 200.0 20.0 to 200.0 0.0 to 200.0 0.0 to 359.9

100.0 Red

0.0 Green

100.0 Blue

0.0 RGB Link

10.0 to 108.0 10.0 to 108.0 10.0 to 108.0 On, Off

0.0

Off

Red

Green

Blue

10.0 to 108.0 10.0 to 108.0 10.0 to 108.0

33.3

Red

Green

Blue

10.0 to 108.0 10.0 to 108.0 10.0 to 108.0

66.6

Red

Green

Blue

10.0 to 108.0 10.0 to 108.0 10.0 to 108.0

100.0

197

Setting menu table

Sub menu
Use [F1] to select.

Input (SDI) / X(***) C/C Matrix R/G Parameter

Setting range

p IN1, IN2, SDI IN3 to 8, IN-A1 to 4 or IN-B1 C/C Matrix B to 4 is displayed in
the X part. p The material name
(up to 32 characters) C/C Setting
is displayed in the ***
part.

Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range

Input (HDMI) / X(***)

Freeze

p IN1, IN2, IN-A1 to Limited

4 or IN-B1 to 4 is

displayed in the X

part. p The material name Name

(up to 10 characters)

is displayed in the ***

part.

HDMI Input

HDMI Status

ROI

ROI Preset

Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range Default value
Parameter Setting range

Default value C/C Operation Parameter
Setting range

C/C Process
C/C Tone1 Black

Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

R-G

R-B

G-R

G-B

0.60 to 0.60 0.60 to 0.60 0.60 to 0.60 0.60 to 0.60

0.00

B-R 0.60 to 0.60

B-G 0.60 to 0.60

0.00

Init Target

Initialize

Copy Target Copy From

Process, Tone, Execute RGB Matrix, All

All

SDI IN5, SDI IN6, Execute

SDI IN7, SDI IN8, IN-

A1, IN-A2, IN-A3,

IN-A4, IN-B1, IN-B2,

IN-B3, IN-B4

SDI IN5

Select

Freeze

Frame, Field On, Off

Frame

Off

Limited

On, Off

Off

Type

Name

Default, User

Default

Scale

Fit-V, Fit-H, Full

Full

Size

Dot Clock

H-Frequency V-Frequency

****x****

***.*MHz

**.*kHz

**.*Hz

Pos-X

Pos-Y

Size

Pos-Speed

45.00 to 45.00 45.00 to 45.00 10.00 to 100.00 1 to 100

0.00

100.0

TransTime

00s00f to 16s39f

01s00f

C/C

Limit

On, Off

Off, 108, 104, 100

Off

Y-Gain 0.0 to 200.0

Pedestal

C-Gain

20.0 to 200.0 0.0 to 200.0

Hue 0.0 to 359.9

100.0

0.0

100.0

0.0

Red

Green

Blue

RGB Link

10.0 to 108.0 10.0 to 108.0 10.0 to 108.0 On, Off

0.0

Off

198

Setting menu table

Sub menu
Use [F1] to select.

Input (HDMI) /

C/C Tone2

Parameter

X(***)

Gray L

Setting range

p IN1, IN2, IN-A1 to

4 or IN-B1 to 4 is

C/C Tone3

displayed in the X part.

Gray H

p The material name

(up to 10 characters)

is displayed in the *** C/C Tone4

part.

White

Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter

Setting range

Default value

C/C Matrix R/G Parameter

Setting range

Default value

C/C Matrix B Parameter

Setting range

Default value

C/C Setting Parameter

Setting range

Input

Camera Settings1

Default value Parameter
Setting range

Camera Settings2

Default value Parameter
Setting range

Camera Settings3
Camera Settings4

Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

Red

Green

Blue

10.0 to 108.0 10.0 to 108.0 10.0 to 108.0

33.3

Red

Green

Blue

10.0 to 108.0 10.0 to 108.0 10.0 to 108.0

66.6

Red

Green

Blue

10.0 to 108.0 10.0 to 108.0 10.0 to 108.0

100.0

R-G

R-B

G-R

G-B

0.60 to 0.60 0.60 to 0.60 0.60 to 0.60 0.60 to 0.60

0.00

B-R

B-G

0.60 to 0.60 0.60 to 0.60

0.00

Init Target

Initialize

Copy Target Copy From

Process, Tone, Execute

IN-A1, IN-A2, Execute

RGB Matrix, All

IN-A3, IN-B1, IN-B2, IN-B3

All

IP Address

Port

Edit IP Address Scan IP Address

Need Edit/Scan 1 to 65535

Execute

Now Scanning...

Not Detected Select From List

Need Edit/Scan 80

Edit User Name

Edit Password Name

Network Status

Execute

Name registered on the camera

No IP Address, Now Checking...,

Connected,

Unauthorized,

Not Connected

No IP Address

Pan Direction Tilt Direction

Tally (Group1)

Normal, Reverse Normal, Reverse

Disable, Enable

Normal

Enable

Zoom

Focus Direction Iris Direction

Direction

Normal, Reverse Normal, Reverse Normal, Reverse

Normal

199

Setting menu table

Menu
Output

Sub menu

Use [F1] to select.

Output

Parameter

Setting range

Output (SDI) / Y Assign
p SDI OUT1 to SDI OUT5, OUT A1, OUT A2, OUT A3, OUT A4, OUT B1, OUT B2, OUT B3 or OUT B4 is displayed in the Y part.
(OUT A1, OUT A2, OUT A3, OUT A4, OUT B1, OUT B2, OUT B3 and OUT B4 take effect when the AVUHS5M2 unit has been connected.)

Default value Parameter Setting range
Default value

Down Converter

Parameter Setting range Default value

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

Select

Mode

Color Space

SDI OUT1, SDI

Normal, 1080p, HDR BT.2020,

OUT2 , SDI OUT3, 1080i, 720p HDR BT.709,

SDI OUT4, SDI

SDR BT.709

OUT5, HDMI OUT1,

HDMI OUT2,

OUT-A1, OUT-A2,

OUT-A3, OUT-A4,

OUT-B1, OUT-B2,

OUT-B3, OUT-B4

SDI OUT1

Normal

SDR BT.709

Source

PGM, PVW, CLN,

ME PGM, AUX1,

AUX2, AUX3,

AUX4, MV1,

MV2, Key Out

PGM(OUT1), Normal

PVW(OUT2),

AUX1(OUT3),

AUX2(OUT4),

AUX3(OUT5),

AUX4(OUTA1),

AUX1(OUTA2),

AUX2(OUTA3),

AUX3(OUTA4),

AUX3(OUTB1),

AUX4(OUTB2),

AUX1(OUTB3),

AUX3(OUTB4)

Delay

Sharp

Minimum, 1F Fix Minimum

1 to 5 3

200

Setting menu table

Sub menu
Use [F1] to select.

Output (HDMI) / Y Assign

Parameter

Setting range

p HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2, OUT A1, OUT A2, OUT A3, OUT A4, OUT B1, OUT B2, OUT B3 or OUT B4 is displayed in the Y part.

Default value

HDMI Output Parameter Setting range
Default value

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

Source

PGM, PVW,

CLN, ME PGM,

AUX1, AUX2,

AUX3, AUX4,

MV1, MV2, Key

Out

MV1(HDMI

OUT1),

MV2(HDMI

OUT2),

AUX4(OUTA1),

AUX1(OUTA2),

AUX2(OUTA3),

AUX3(OUTB1),

AUX4(OUTB2),

AUX1(OUTB3)

Size

Color

Scale

Move Detect

Auto, XGA,

Auto, RGB,

Fit-V, Fit-H,

1 to 5

WXGA, SXGA, YUV444,

Full, Full90%,

WSXGA+,

YUV422

Full80%

UXGA,

WUXGA,

WQHD, Native

Auto

Full

201

Setting menu table

Menu
Config

Sub menu

Use [F1] to select.

Operate

Parameter

Setting range

Key/DSK Link

Default value Parameter Setting range

Key/DSK Link

Default value Parameter Setting range

Assign

Default value Parameter Setting range

ROI Latency

Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range

LCD Backlight

Default value Parameter Setting range

Button Illumination

Default value Parameter
Setting range

Color Group SDI IN 1/2

Default value Parameter
Setting range

Color Group SDI IN 2/2
Color Group Option

Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

Bus Mode

Time Unit

Delegation

A/B, PGM-A/ Sec, Frame

On, Off

PST-B, PGM-B/

PST-A

PGM-A/PST-B Sec

Key1

Key2

Key3

Off, Group1, Off, Group1, Off, Group1,

Group2,

Group3

Off

DSK1

DSK2

Off, Group1, Off, Group1,

Group2,

Group3

Off

FTB Source

DSK1 on AUX1 DSK2 on AUX2

Still1, Still2,

On, Off

Clip1, Clip2,

CBGD1,

CBGD2, White,

Black

Off

SDI IN

IN-A

IN-B

On, Off

Off

BKGD

Key

1F Fix,

1F Fix, Minimum

Minimum

Light

Adjust

On, Off, 60, 80%, 90%,

120, 180

100%, 110%,

120%, 130%,

140%, 150%

100%

Dimmer

Lighting

XPT Color

Transition

Color

Off, 80%, 90%, 100%, 110%, Input, Color Group1, Color

120%, 130%, 140%, 150%

Group2, Color Group3, Color

Group4, Color Group5, Color

Group6, Color Group7, Color

Group8

100%

150%

Input

IN1

IN2

SDI IN3

SDI IN4

Color Group1, Color Group2, Color Group3, Color Group4, Color

Group5, Color Group6, Color Group7, Color Group8

Color Group1 Color Group1 Color Group1 Color Group1

SDI IN5

SDI IN6

SDI IN7

SDI IN8

The setting range is the same as for the Color Group SDI IN 1/2 sub menu.

Color Group1 Color Group1 Color Group1 Color Group1

IN-A1

IN-A2

IN-A3

IN-A4

The setting range is the same as for the Color Group SDI IN 1/2 sub menu. Color Group1 Color Group1 Color Group1 Color Group1

202

Setting menu table

Menu
Config

Sub menu
Use [F1] to select. Color Group Parameter Option
Setting range Default value Color Group Parameter Internal Setting range Default value Color Group Parameter Still Setting range Default value Color Group Parameter Clip Setting range Default value Color Group Parameter Other 1/2 Setting range Default value Color Group Parameter Other 2/2 Setting range Default value Color Group Parameter Transition Setting range Default value Color Group Parameter Next Trans Setting range

Color Group KEY ON

Default value Parameter
Setting range

Color Group DSK/FTB ON

Default value Parameter
Setting range

Button Color Group1

Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

IN-B1

IN-B2

IN-B3

IN-B4

The setting range is the same as for the Color Group SDI IN 1/2 sub menu.

Color Group1 Color Group1 Color Group1 Color Group1

Black

CBGD 1

CBGD 2

CBAR

The setting range is the same as for the Color Group SDI IN 1/2 sub menu.

Color Group1 Color Group1 Color Group1 Color Group1

Still 1V

Still 1K

Still 2V

Still 2K

The setting range is the same as for the Color Group SDI IN 1/2 sub menu.

Color Group1 Color Group1 Color Group1 Color Group1

Clip 1V

Clip 1K

Clip 2V

Clip 2K

The setting range is the same as for the Color Group SDI IN 1/2 sub menu.

Color Group1 Color Group1 Color Group1 Color Group1

CLN

ME PGM

Key Out

Shift

The setting range is the same as for the Color Group SDI IN 1/2 sub menu. Color Group1 Color Group1 Color Group1 Color Group1 Macro Attach

The setting range is the same as for the Color Group SDI IN 1/2 sub menu.

Color Group1

AUTO

CUT

MIX

WIPE

The setting range is the same as for the Color Group SDI IN 1/2 sub menu.

Color Group1 Color Group1 Color Group1 Color Group1

BKGD

KEY

The setting range is the same as for the Color Group SDI IN 1/2 sub menu.

Color Group1 Color Group1

KEY1 ON

KEY2 ON

KEY3 ON

The setting range is the same as for the Color Group SDI IN 1/2 sub menu.

Color Group1 Color Group1 Color Group1

DSK1 ON

DSK2 ON

FTB ON

The setting range is the same as for the Color Group SDI IN 1/2 sub menu.

Color Group1 Color Group1 Color Group1

0.0 to 1.5 0.1

203

Setting menu table

Menu
Config

Sub menu

Use [F1] to select.

Button Color Parameter

Group2

Setting range

Default value

Button Color Parameter

Group3

Setting range

Default value

Button Color Parameter

Group4

Setting range

Default value

Button Color Parameter

Group5

Setting range

Default value

Button Color Parameter

Group6

Setting range

Default value

Button Color Parameter

Group7

Setting range

Default value

Button Color Parameter

Group8

Setting range

Default value

WFM

Parameter

Setting range

Default value

Vector

Parameter

Setting range

Default value

User Button1-4 Parameter

Setting range

Default value User Button5-8 Parameter
Setting range Default value GPI-In Setting Parameter Setting range
Default value

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

0.0 to 1.5 0.1 R

0.0 to 1.5 0.1 G

0.0 to 1.5 0.0 B

0.0 to 1.5 0.0 R

0.0 to 1.5 0.1 G

0.0 to 1.5 0.1 B

0.0 to 1.5 0.0 R

0.0 to 1.5 0.1 G

0.0 to 1.5 0.1 B

0.0 to 1.5 0.1 R

0.0 to 1.5 0.0 G

0.0 to 1.5 0.1 B

0.0 to 1.5 0.1 R

0.0 to 1.5 0.0 G

0.0 to 1.5 0.0 B

0.0 to 1.5 0.0 R

0.0 to 1.5 0.0 G

0.0 to 1.5 0.1 B

0.0 to 1.5

0.0

Style

Mode

Parade, Overlay YPbPr, RGB, Y

Parade

YPbPr

Bar Target

75%, 100%

100%

User1

User2

User3

User4

Key1 PVW, Key2 PVW, Key3 PVW, DSK1 PVW, DSK2 PVW, GPII-

EN, GPIO-EN, SHIFT, AUX Trans, AUX1 Trans, AUX2 Trans, DSK1

on AUX1, DSK2 on AUX2, Effect Dissolve, Macro Attach, None

Key1 PVW

Key2 PVW

Key3 PVW

DSK1 PVW

User5

User6

User7

User8

The setting range is the same as for the User Button1-4 sub menu.

DSK2 PVW

AUX Trans

Effect Dissolve SHIFT

GPI-In Enable AUX Sel

On, Off

AUX1, AUX2,

AUX3, AUX4

AUX1

204

Setting menu table

Menu
Config

Sub menu
Use [F1] to select. GPI-In Port1/2 Parameter
Setting range

Default value

GPI-In Port2/2 Parameter

Setting range

Default value

GPI-Out

Parameter

Setting

Setting range

GPI-Out Port1/5

Default value Parameter
Setting range

GPI-Out Port2/5
GPI-Out Port3/5
GPI-Out Port4/5
GPI-Out Port5/5

Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter
Setting range

System Menu

Default value Parameter Setting range Default value

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

Port1 Assign Port2 Assign Port3 Assign Port4 Assign

No Assign, AUTO, CUT, KEY1 ON, KEY2 ON, KEY3 ON, DSK1 ON,

DSK2 ON, FTB ON, BKGD AUTO, BKGD CUT, KEY1 AUTO, KEY1

CUT, REC Still1, REC Still2, REC Clip1, PLAY Clip1, STOP Clip1, REC

Clip2, PLAY Clip2, STOP Clip2, AUX XPT1 to 24, TlyG1 DSBL, TlyG2

DSBL, AUX Tly DSBL, MACRO001 to 100, MACRO Cancel

No Assign

Port5 Assign Port6 Assign Port7 Assign Port8 Assign

The setting range is the same as for the GPI-In Port1/2 sub menu.

No Assign

GPI-Out Enable AUX Tly Sel

On, Off
On Port1 Assign

AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, AUX4 AUX1 Port2 Assign

Port3 Assign

Port4 Assign

No Assign, AUTO, CUT, KEY1 ON, KEY2 ON, KEY3 ON, DSK1 ON,

DSK2 ON, FTB ON, BKGD AUTO, BKGD CUT, KEY1 AUTO, KEY1

CUT, TlyG1 SDI IN1 to TlyG1 SDI IN8, TlyG1 HDMI IN1, TlyG1 HDMI

IN2, TlyG1 IN-A1 to TlyG1 IN-A4, TlyG1 IN-B1 to TlyG1 IN-B4, TlyG2

SDI IN1 to TlyG2 SDI IN8, TlyG2 HDMI IN1, TlyG2 HDMI IN2, TlyG2

IN-A1 to TlyG2 IN-A4, TlyG2 IN-B1 to TlyG2 IN-B4, AuxTly SDI IN1 to

AuxTly SDI IN8, AuxTly HDMI IN1, AuxTly HDMI IN2, AuxTly IN-A1

to AuxTly IN-A4, AuxTly IN-B1 to AuxTly IN-B4, Event MEM

No Assign

Port5 Assign Port6 Assign Port7 Assign Port8 Assign

The setting range is the same as for the GPI-Out Port1/5 sub menu.

No Assign

Port9 Assign Port10 Assign Port11 Assign Port12 Assign

The setting range is the same as for the GPI-Out Port1/5 sub menu.

No Assign

Port13 Assign Port14 Assign Port15 Assign Port16 Assign

The setting range is the same as for the GPI-Out Port1/5 sub menu.

No Assign

Port17 Assign Port18 Assign Port19 Assign

The setting range is the same as for the GPI-Out Port1/5 sub menu.

No Assign

Lock

On, Off

Off

205

Setting menu table

Menu
Config

Sub menu

Use [F1] to select.

Key Source

Parameter

Signal

Coupling1

Setting range

Key Source Signal Coupling2

Default value Parameter
Setting range

System/Locked (When locked)

Key Source Signal Coupling3
Key Source Signal Coupling4
Key Source Signal Coupling5
Key Source Signal Coupling6
Key Source Signal Coupling7
Key Source Signal Coupling8

Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4
Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select. Fill/Source

Fill To Source,

Source To Fill

Fill To Source

IN1

IN2

SDI IN3

SDI IN4

IN1, IN2, SDI IN3, SDI IN4, SDI IN5, SDI IN6, SDI IN7, SDI IN8, IN-

A1, IN-A2, IN-A3, IN-A4, IN-B1, IN-B2, IN-B3, IN-B4, Black, CBGD 1,

CBGD 2, CBAR, Still 1V, Still 1K, Still 2V, Still 2K, Clip 1V, Clip 1K,

Clip 2V, Clip 2K

IN1

IN2

SDI IN3

SDI IN4

SDI IN5

SDI IN6

SDI IN7

SDI IN8

The setting range is the same as for the Key Source Signal Coupling2 sub menu.

SDI IN5

SDI IN6

SDI IN7

SDI IN8

IN-A1

IN-A2

IN-A3

IN-A4

The setting range is the same as for the Key Source Signal Coupling2 sub menu.

IN-A1

IN-A2

IN-A3

IN-A4

IN-B1

IN-B2

IN-B3

IN-B4

The setting range is the same as for the Key Source Signal Coupling2 sub menu.

IN-B1

IN-B2

IN-B3

IN-B4

Black

CBGD 1

CBGD 2

CBAR

The setting range is the same as for the Key Source Signal Coupling2 sub menu.

Black

CBGD 1

CBGD 2

CBAR

Still 1V

Still 1K

Still 2V

Still 2K

The setting range is the same as for the Key Source Signal Coupling2 sub menu.

Still 1V

Still 1K

Still 2V

Still 2K

Clip 1V

Clip 1K

Clip 2V

Clip 2K

The setting range is the same as for the Key Source Signal Coupling2 sub menu.

Clip 1V

Clip 1K

Clip 2V

Clip 2K

(All menus grayed out)

206

Setting menu table

Menu
System
(When unlocked)

Sub menu

Use [F1] to select.

Format

Parameter

Setting range

Output Phase Reference

Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range

Ancillary1 Ancillary2 Audio1 Audio2 Test Tone

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

Format

Switcher Mode Color Space

2160/59.94P, 2K, 4K

HDR, BT.2020,

50P, 29.97P,

HDR BT.709,

25P, 24P,

SDR BT.709

23.98P

1080/59.94P,

50P, 59.94i,

50i, 29.97p,

25p, 24p,

23.98p,

29.97Psf,

25Psf, 24Psf,

23.98Psf

720/59.94P,

50P

1080/59.94i 2K

SDR BT.709

System

H-Phase

V-Phase

0H, 1H

0.50 to 0.49 100 to 100

Sync

BB Setup

Gen Lock

BB, BB

0IRE, 7.5IRE Locked, Unlock

Advanced, Tri-

level Sync,

Internal

7.5IRE

Unlock

AUX

PGM

PVW

CLN

On, Off

Off

PGM, PVW, Off

Off

AUX1

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

IN1, IN2, SDI IN3 to 8, IN-A1 to 4, IN-B1 to 4, Follow Video, OFF

Follow Video

PGM

PVW

CLN

IN1, IN2, SDI IN3 to 8, IN-A1 to 4, IN-B1 to 4, Follow Video, OFF

Follow Video

Color Bar

Normal, Low,

Off

Normal

207

Setting menu table

Menu
System
(When unlocked)

Sub menu

Use [F1] to select.

Alarm

Parameter

Setting range

Initial Network1 Network2 Network3

Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter

Network4
ExtPanel Info
ExtPanelip SMEMRecall1
ExtPanelip SMEMRecall2
ExtControl Switcher

Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter Setting range Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter
Setting range

ExtControl AUX Panel1
ExtControl AUX Panel2
ExtControl AUX Panel3

Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value Parameter
Setting range Default value

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

Power

Fan

Temperature

Alarm, No

Alarm

Initial Execute

Fader Initial Execute

IP Address 0 to 255 192.168.0.8 Subnet Mask 0 to 255 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway 0 to 255

MAC Address Display only

Disable/Enable PortNo

Disable, Enable 62000 to 65535

Disable ME

62010 DSK

AUX

On, Off Off CBGD

On, Off Off XPT

On, Off Off

On, Off

Off

Disable/Enable PortNo

IntervalTime Response

Disable, Enable 62000 to 65535 0ms, 16ms, 32ms, 48ms 64ms, 80ms

Disable

62000

16ms

IP Address1 IP Address2 IP Address3

On, Off
On IP Address4

0 to 255 0.0.0.0 IP Address5

0 to 255 0.0.0.0 IP Address6

0 to 255 0.0.0.0 IP Address7

0 to 255 0.0.0.0 IP Address8

0 to 255 0.0.0.0 IP Address9

0 to 255 0.0.0.0 IP Address10

0 to 255 0.0.0.0 IP Address11

0 to 255 0.0.0.0 IP Address12

0 to 255 0.0.0.0

208

Setting menu table

Menu
System
(When unlocked)

Sub menu

Use [F1] to select.

ExtControl

Parameter

AUX Panel4

Setting range

Default value

ExtControl

Parameter

AUX Panel5

Setting range

Default value

ExtControl

Parameter

AUX Panel6

Setting range

Default value

Macro Trigger Parameter

Control1

Setting range

Default value

Macro Trigger Parameter

Control2

Setting range

Macro Trigger Control3

Default value Parameter
Setting range

Macro Trigger Control4

Default value Parameter
Setting range

Macro Trigger Control5

Default value Parameter
Setting range

Default value

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4
Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select. IP Address13 IP Address14 IP Address15 IP Address16

0 to 255 0.0.0.0 IP Address17

0 to 255 0.0.0.0 IP Address18

0 to 255 0.0.0.0 IP Address19

0 to 255 0.0.0.0 IP Address20

0 to 255 0.0.0.0 PortNo

0 to 255 0.0.0.0

60000 to 65535 65000 Disable/Enable

Disable, Enable Disable IP Address1 Macro1

IP Address2 Macro2

0 to 255
0.0.0.0 IP Address3

No Assign, Macro001 to Macro100 No Assign Macro3

0 to 255
0.0.0.0 IP Address4

No Assign, Macro001 to Macro100 No Assign Macro4

0 to 255
0.0.0.0 IP Address5

No Assign, Macro001 to Macro100 No Assign Macro5

0 to 255
0.0.0.0 IP Address6

No Assign, Macro001 to Macro100 No Assign Macro6

0 to 255
0.0.0.0 IP Address7

No Assign, Macro001 to Macro100 No Assign Macro7

0 to 255
0.0.0.0 IP Address8

No Assign, Macro001 to Macro100 No Assign Macro8

0 to 255 0.0.0.0

No Assign, Macro001 to Macro100 No Assign

0 to 255 0.0.0.0

No Assign, Macro001 to Macro100 No Assign

209

Setting menu table

Menu
System
(When unlocked)

Sub menu
Use [F1] to select. Macro Trigger Parameter Control6
Setting range

Macro Trigger Control7

Default value Parameter
Setting range

Macro Trigger Control8

Default value Parameter
Setting range

Macro Trigger Control9

Default value Parameter
Setting range

Macro Trigger Control10

Default value Parameter
Setting range

Macro Trigger Control11

Default value Parameter
Setting range

Tally Mode

Default value Parameter Setting range Default value

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

IP Address9 Macro9

IP Address10 Macro10

0 to 255
0.0.0.0 IP Address11

No Assign, Macro001 to Macro100 No Assign Macro11

0 to 255
0.0.0.0 IP Address12

No Assign, Macro001 to Macro100 No Assign Macro12

0 to 255
0.0.0.0 IP Address13

No Assign, Macro001 to Macro100 No Assign Macro13

0 to 255
0.0.0.0 IP Address14

No Assign, Macro001 to Macro100 No Assign Macro14

0 to 255
0.0.0.0 IP Address15

No Assign, Macro001 to Macro100 No Assign Macro15

0 to 255
0.0.0.0 IP Address16

No Assign, Macro001 to Macro100 No Assign Macro16

0 to 255
0.0.0.0 IP Address17

No Assign, Macro001 to Macro100 No Assign Macro17

0 to 255
0.0.0.0 IP Address18

No Assign, Macro001 to Macro100 No Assign Macro18

0 to 255
0.0.0.0 IP Address19

No Assign, Macro001 to Macro100 No Assign Macro19

0 to 255
0.0.0.0 IP Address20

No Assign, Macro001 to Macro100 No Assign Macro20

0 to 255
0.0.0.0 Tally Target On, Off On

No Assign, Macro001 to Macro100 No Assign

0 to 255 0.0.0.0

No Assign, Macro001 to Macro100 No Assign

210

Setting menu table

Menu
System
(When unlocked)

Sub menu
Use [F1] to select. Tally MV Color Parameter
Setting range Default value Tally Target Parameter Setting range

Default value

Now

Parameter Setting range Default value

Date

Parameter Setting range Default value

Time

Parameter Setting range

Default value

System Version Parameter Setting range

Default value

System Core Version

Parameter Setting range

Default value

Option

Parameter Setting range

Default value

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.

Group1

Group2

Red

Green

Red

Green

Group1

Group2

Off, PGM, CLN, ME PGM, Key Out, AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, AUX4

PGM

PVW

Get Date

Get Time

Execute

Year

Month

2000 to 2037 1 to 12

Hour

Minute

0 to 23

0 to 59

System Version

Version number

Day 1 to 31 Second 0 to 59 Set Execute

Set Execute
Set Execute
Delete Execute

System Core Version Version number

Update Execute

Slot A

Slot B

SDI-IN, HDMI-IN, SDI-OUT, HDMI-

OUT, 4K-DVE, None

211

Appendix (glossary)

Defined below are the terms used in this manual.

Word AB Bus system
Ancillary Data
Aspect ratio
AUX [Auxiliary Bus] BB [Black burst] Border
Chroma key
Clip Color Background
Cut Density Down Converter DSK [Downstream Key]
DVE [Digital Video Effect] Embedded Audio
Flip Flop system (PGM/PST system)
Flying Key Frame Synchronizer Freeze
FTB [Fade to Black] Genlock
GPI [General Purpose Interface] Hue IRE
Key Edge

Explanation
A bus control mode. By executing a transition, the A bus and B bus signals are output to the program images alternately.
The auxiliary data other than the video signals which is transmitted inside the data stream of the video serial interface. The data superimposed on the vertical blanking period is referred to as the V ancillary data (VANC).
The ratio between the horizontal and vertical dimensions of an image or screen. It is 16:9 for the HD format and 4:3 for the SD format.
A spare bus which can be switched by signals other than the main line output signals.
The black burst signal. A full-screen black level composite signal which is used as the reference signal for gen-lock.
The area or margin that is added to the edge of a wipe or key. Its width and color can be adjusted. The defocusing of the area around a border is referred to as the soft effect.
This refers to the function for creating the key signals based on the color information of the video signals and combining the keys.
The threshold level of the luminance when key signals are created from a key source.
The signals which are output from the internal color generator and used as the background image.
This refers to the effect where the display is instantly switched to the next image.
A parameter which is used to adjust the density of the key signals.
This is the function that converts material in the 4K format into the 2K/HD format.
This refers to the key combination process which is performed at the end of the mix effect. The key is always combined with the foremost image.
This refers to the transition patterns accompanying size reductions or slide effects.
This refers to the audio data packets which are transferred inside the data stream of the video serial interface.
A bus control mode. The signals selected by the program bus are always output as the program images. By executing a transition, the program bus and preset bus signals are switched over.
This function uses DVE effects to move, expand or reduce key signals.
A function which matches the synchronization of non-synchronized video input signals.
A function which continues the display of the same image, creating the impression that the image has been "frozen".
This is the effect where the background image is faded out to the black screen.
A function for synchronizing the video signals using an external sync signal as the reference.
Interface signals which control auto transition from an external source.
The color tone of the video signals.
A unit used for video signal levels. The setup level (black level) of the signals is expressed as 0 IRE, 7.5 IRE, etc.
The border or shadow added to the edges of keys.

212

Appendix (glossary)

Key Fill

Word

Key Gain Key Invert Key Mask

Key Source Line Synchronizer
Linear Key
Lum [Luminance] Luminance Key
ME [Mix Effect] Mix
Multi View Display
PinP [Picture in Picture] PVW [Preview] PGM [Program Bus] PST [Preset Bus] Sat [Saturation] SDI [Serial Digital Interface] Self Key Setup Data

Tally

Transition
Tri-level Sync Trimming

Explanation
The signal that uses key combination processing to fill in the areas left blank by the key signals.
A parameter which is used to adjust the amplitude of the key signals.
A function which inverts the key signals.
This is the function that specifies the area for key combination using the box pattern, etc. When only part of the area of the key signals is used, key combination is executed with the unnecessary area masked.
The video signals for creating the key signals.
A function to automatically adjust the input image signal phase to the horizontal synchronization reference signal phase.
The function which combines keys using monochrome key signals with gradations in its outlines as a reference.
The brightness portion of the video signals.
The function which creates key signals based on the luminance (brightness) information of the video signals to combine keys.
A video effect device which combines a number of video signals to create mix, wipe, key and other video signals.
The picture-changing effect produced by overlapping one image with the next. It is also referred to as "dissolve".
This function combines multiple materials and displays them on one screen. PGM, PVW and the input material can be previewed at the same time on a single screen.
This function combines a sub screen image with the background image.
The function for checking ahead of time the image which will be output after the next transition. The image is output from the PVW system.
The bus which always carries the program output signals.
The bus which carries the program output signals after the next background transition.
This refers to the intensity of the color chrominance level of video signals.
The standard by which video signals in various SD and HD formats are transmitted along a single coaxial cable.
A function that creates key signals from key fill signals for combining keys.
The memory in which the control panel statuses can be saved and recalled. The button selection statuses as well as the border, color and other setting information can be saved in this memory.
The signal which outputs the program output statuses of the input signals to an external device. The LED that indicates the program output status on the control panel is also referred to as tally.
A function that switches from one image to another. Wipe, mix and other effects are available for the images during switching.
The sync signal used for HD formats.
This is the function that eliminates the unnecessary parts at the top, bottom, left and/or right of the images which are combined using the PinP function.

213

Appendix (glossary)

Word Up Converter Video Memory Wipe

Explanation
This is the function that converts material in the 2K/HD format into the 4K format which yields a high resolution.
This is the memory in which the images (still images and moving images) with key signals can be stored.
A video effect in which one image is gradually replaced by another as the boundary between the two is moved using a preselected pattern.

214

Index

A
AUX bus crosspoint button ................................... 18
B
Background ........................................................... 178 3D Modify ........................................................... 178 Border ................................................................. 178 Border Color ....................................................... 178 Clip Trans Sync ................................................... 178 Modify ................................................................. 178 Position ............................................................... 178 Transition Margin ................................................ 178 Transition Time ................................................... 178
BKGD, KEY pattern selector button ...................... 19
C
Camera .................................................................. 188 ABB .................................................................... 189 AWB ................................................................... 188 Camera Control .................................................. 188 Camera Information ............................................ 188 Control Speed .................................................... 188 Gain1 .................................................................. 189 Gain2 .................................................................. 189 Lens Control ....................................................... 188 Lock .................................................................... 189 OSD Menu & Color Bars .................................... 188 Pedestal .............................................................. 189 Preset Settings ................................................... 189
Chroma Key ........................................................... 184 Adjust ................................................................. 184 Adjusting Mode ................................................... 184 Auto Compute ..................................................... 184 Chroma Key ........................................................ 184 Fine Tuning ......................................................... 184 Sampling ............................................................ 184 Sampling Area .................................................... 184 Value ................................................................... 184
Color Background ................................................ 179 CBGD1 Main ...................................................... 179 CBGD1 Move ..................................................... 179 CBGD1 Sub ........................................................ 179 CBGD1 Wash ..................................................... 179 CBGD1 Wave ..................................................... 179 CBGD2 Main ...................................................... 179 CBGD2 Move ..................................................... 179 CBGD2 Sub ........................................................ 179 CBGD2 Wash ..................................................... 179 CBGD2 Wave ..................................................... 179
Config .................................................................... 202 Assign ................................................................. 202 Button Color Group1 .......................................... 203 Button Color Group2 .......................................... 204 Button Color Group3 .......................................... 204

Button Color Group4 .......................................... 204 Button Color Group5 .......................................... 204 Button Color Group6 .......................................... 204 Button Color Group7 .......................................... 204 Button Color Group8 .......................................... 204 Button Illumination .............................................. 202 Color Group Clip ................................................. 203 Color Group DSK/FTB ON ................................. 203 Color Group Internal ........................................... 203 Color Group KEY ON ......................................... 203 Color Group Next Trans ...................................... 203 Color Group Option ............................................ 202 Color Group Other 1/2 ........................................ 203 Color Group Other 2/2 ........................................ 203 Color Group SDI IN 1/2 ...................................... 202 Color Group SDI IN 2/2 ...................................... 202 Color Group Still ................................................. 203 Color Group Transition ........................................ 203 GPI-In Port1/2 ..................................................... 205 GPI-In Port2/2 ..................................................... 205 GPI-In Setting ..................................................... 204 GPI-Out Port1/5 .................................................. 205 GPI-Out Port2/5 .................................................. 205 GPI-Out Port3/5 .................................................. 205 GPI-Out Port4/5 .................................................. 205 GPI-Out Port5/5 .................................................. 205 GPI-Out Setting .................................................. 205 Key/DSK Link ..................................................... 202 Key Source Signal Coupling1 ............................. 206 Key Source Signal Coupling2 ............................. 206 Key Source Signal Coupling3 ............................. 206 Key Source Signal Coupling4 ............................. 206 Key Source Signal Coupling5 ............................. 206 Key Source Signal Coupling6 ............................. 206 Key Source Signal Coupling7 ............................. 206 Key Source Signal Coupling8 ............................. 206 Latency ............................................................... 202 LCD Backlight ..................................................... 202 Operate .............................................................. 202 ROI ..................................................................... 202 System Menu ...................................................... 205 User Button1-4 ................................................... 204 User Button5-8 ................................................... 204 Vector ................................................................. 204 WFM ................................................................... 204
D
DSK1 ...................................................................... 184
Adjust ................................................................. 184 DSK .................................................................... 184 DSK On .............................................................. 185 DSK Priority ........................................................ 185 DSK Signal Coupling .......................................... 185 Fill Matte ............................................................. 184 Mask ................................................................... 185 Mask Adjust ........................................................ 185 PinP .................................................................... 185 PinP Border ........................................................ 185 PinP Position ...................................................... 185 PinP Sync ........................................................... 185

215

Index

PinP Trim ............................................................ 185 PinP Trim Adjust ................................................. 185
DSK2 ...................................................................... 186 Adjust ................................................................. 186 DSK .................................................................... 186 DSK On .............................................................. 186 DSK Priority ........................................................ 186 DSK Signal Coupling .......................................... 186 Fill Matte ............................................................. 186 Mask ................................................................... 186 Mask Adjust ........................................................ 186
E
Event Memory ....................................................... 193 Event Duration .................................................... 193 Mark ................................................................... 193 Path .................................................................... 193 Play ..................................................................... 193 Register .............................................................. 193 Target Select1 .................................................... 193 Target Select2 .................................................... 193 Timeline .............................................................. 193 Total Duration ..................................................... 193
F
Fader lever .............................................................. 21
I
Input ............................................................... 196, 199 Camera Settings1 ............................................... 199 Camera Settings2 ............................................... 199 Camera Settings3 ............................................... 199 Camera Settings4 ............................................... 199 Input ................................................................... 196
Input (HDMI) .......................................................... 198 C/C Matrix B ....................................................... 199 C/C Matrix R/G ................................................... 199 C/C Operation ..................................................... 198 C/C Process ....................................................... 198 C/C Setting ......................................................... 199 C/C Tone1 Black ................................................. 198 C/C Tone2 Gray L ............................................... 199 C/C Tone3 Gray H .............................................. 199 C/C Tone4 White ................................................. 199 Freeze ................................................................ 198 HDMI Input ......................................................... 198 HDMI Status ....................................................... 198 Limited ................................................................ 198 Name .................................................................. 198 ROI ..................................................................... 198 ROI Preset .......................................................... 198
Input (SDI) ............................................................. 197 C/C Matrix B ....................................................... 198 C/C Matrix R/G ................................................... 198 C/C Operation ..................................................... 197

C/C Process ....................................................... 197 C/C Setting ......................................................... 198 C/C Tone1 Black ................................................. 197 C/C Tone2 Gray L ............................................... 197 C/C Tone3 Gray H .............................................. 197 C/C Tone4 White ................................................. 197 Freeze ................................................................ 197 FS ....................................................................... 197 Name .................................................................. 197 ROI ..................................................................... 197 ROI Preset .......................................................... 197 Status ................................................................. 197 Up/Down Converter ............................................ 197
K
Key1 ....................................................................... 180
3D Modify ........................................................... 180 Adjust ................................................................. 180 Edge1 ................................................................. 180 Edge2 ................................................................. 180 Edge Color ......................................................... 180 Fill Matte ............................................................. 180 Flying Key Aspect ............................................... 180 Flying Key Rotation ............................................ 180 Flying Key Rotation/Size ..................................... 180 Key ..................................................................... 180 Key On ................................................................ 181 Key Priority ......................................................... 181 Key Signal Coupling ........................................... 181 Mask ................................................................... 181 Mask Adjust ........................................................ 181 PinP .................................................................... 181 PinP Border ........................................................ 181 PinP Position ...................................................... 181 PinP Sync ........................................................... 181 PinP Trim ............................................................ 181 PinP Trim Adjust ................................................. 181 Position ............................................................... 180 Transition ............................................................ 180
Key2 ....................................................................... 182
Adjust ................................................................. 182 Edge1 ................................................................. 182 Edge2 ................................................................. 182 Edge Color ......................................................... 182 Fill Matte ............................................................. 182 Key ..................................................................... 182 Key On ................................................................ 183 Key Priority ......................................................... 183 Key Signal Coupling ........................................... 183 Mask ................................................................... 182 Mask Adjust ........................................................ 182 PinP .................................................................... 182 PinP Border ........................................................ 182 PinP Position ...................................................... 182 PinP Sync ........................................................... 183 PinP Trim ............................................................ 183 PinP Trim Adjust ................................................. 183

216

Index

Key3 ....................................................................... 183 Adjust ................................................................. 183 Fill Matte ............................................................. 183 Key ..................................................................... 183 Key On ................................................................ 183 Key Priority ......................................................... 183 Key Signal Coupling ........................................... 183 Mask ................................................................... 183 Mask Adjust ........................................................ 183
L
LAN cable .............................................................. 140
M
Macro ..................................................................... 192 Attach ................................................................. 193 Insert Delay ........................................................ 192 Macro Assign 1/6 ................................................ 192 Macro Assign 2/6 ................................................ 192 Macro Assign 3/6 ................................................ 192 Macro Assign 4/6 ................................................ 192 Macro Assign 5/6 ................................................ 192 Macro Assign 6/6 ................................................ 192 Register .............................................................. 193 Store Select1 ...................................................... 192 Store Select2 ...................................................... 192
Memory operation button ...................................... 19
Menu ........................................................................ 28
Menu selection buttons ................................... 23, 28
Multi View Display ................................................. 194 Display ........................................................ 195, 196 MV ...................................................................... 194 MV Frame ................................................... 195, 196 MV Pattern 1/4 ............................................ 195, 196 MV Pattern 2/4 ............................................ 195, 196 MV Pattern 3/4 ............................................ 195, 196 MV Pattern 4/4 ............................................ 195, 196 MV Split ...................................................... 195, 196 MV Tally Green ................................................... 196 MV Tally Group1 ................................................. 195 MV Tally Group2 ................................................. 195 MV Tally Red ...................................................... 196
O
Output .................................................................... 200 Output ................................................................. 200
Output (HDMI) ....................................................... 201 Assign ................................................................. 201 HDMI Output ...................................................... 201
Output (SDI) .......................................................... 200 Assign ................................................................. 200 Down Converter .................................................. 200

P
PGM/A bus crosspoint button ............................... 18
Positioner ................................................................ 24
Project File ............................................................ 190 Last Load Date ................................................... 190 Last Load File ..................................................... 190 Project File ......................................................... 190 Target Select1 .................................................... 190 Target Select2 .................................................... 190
PST/B bus crosspoint button ................................ 18
R
Rotary encoder ............................................ 23, 24, 28
S
SD Card ................................................................. 190 Card Information ................................................. 190 Card Management .............................................. 190 Create Thumbnail ............................................... 190 File ...................................................................... 190 Mode .................................................................. 190 Target Select1 .................................................... 190 Target Select2 .................................................... 190
Shot Memory ......................................................... 193 Path .................................................................... 193 Register .............................................................. 193 Target Select1 .................................................... 193 Target Select2 .................................................... 193
System ................................................................... 207 Alarm .................................................................. 208 Ancillary1 ............................................................ 207 Ancillary2 ............................................................ 207 Audio1 ................................................................ 207 Audio2 ................................................................ 207 Date .................................................................... 211 ExtControl AUX Panel1 ...................................... 208 ExtControl AUX Panel2 ...................................... 208 ExtControl AUX Panel3 ...................................... 208 ExtControl AUX Panel4 ...................................... 209 ExtControl AUX Panel5 ...................................... 209 ExtControl AUX Panel6 ...................................... 209 ExtControl Switcher ............................................ 208 ExtPanel Info ...................................................... 208 ExtPanelip SMEMRecall1 ................................... 208 ExtPanelip SMEMRecall2 ................................... 208 Format ................................................................ 207 Initial ................................................................... 208 Macro Trigger Control1 ....................................... 209 Macro Trigger Control2 ....................................... 209 Macro Trigger Control3 ....................................... 209 Macro Trigger Control4 ....................................... 209 Macro Trigger Control5 ....................................... 209 Macro Trigger Control6 ....................................... 210

217

Index

Macro Trigger Control7 ....................................... 210 Macro Trigger Control8 ....................................... 210 Macro Trigger Control9 ....................................... 210 Macro Trigger Control10 ..................................... 210 Macro Trigger Control11 ..................................... 210 Network1 ............................................................ 208 Network2 ............................................................ 208 Network3 ............................................................ 208 Network4 ............................................................ 208 Now .................................................................... 211 Option ................................................................. 211 Output Phase ..................................................... 207 Reference ........................................................... 207 System Core Version .......................................... 211 System Version ................................................... 211 Tally Mode .......................................................... 210 Tally MV Color .................................................... 211 Tally Target .......................................................... 211 Test Tone ............................................................ 207 Time ................................................................... 211
T
Time ....................................................................... 187
AUX1 BUS Trans ................................................ 187 AUX2 BUS Trans ................................................ 187 BKGD ................................................................. 187 DSK1 .................................................................. 187 DSK2 .................................................................. 187 Effect Dissolve .................................................... 187 FTB ..................................................................... 187 Key1 ................................................................... 187 Key2 ................................................................... 187 Key3 ................................................................... 187
U
User button ............................................................. 20

XPT Assign 6/6 ................................................... 194 XPT Setting ........................................................ 194 XPT Switch ......................................................... 194

V
Video Memory ....................................................... 191 Limit Time ........................................................... 191 Memory .............................................................. 191 Play Mode1 ......................................................... 191 Play Mode2 ......................................................... 191 Rec1 ................................................................... 191 Rec2 ................................................................... 191 Rec3 ................................................................... 191 Video Memory1 .................................................. 191 Video Memory2 .................................................. 191 Video Memory3 .................................................. 191
X
XPT ......................................................................... 194 XPT Assign 1/6 ................................................... 194 XPT Assign 2/6 ................................................... 194 XPT Assign 3/6 ................................................... 194 XPT Assign 4/6 ................................................... 194 XPT Assign 5/6 ................................................... 194
218

MEMO
219

References

Adobe PDF Library 15.0 Adobe InDesign CC 13.1 (Windows)